TP03 PLC PROGRAMMING Manual

TP03 Programmable Logic Control

72-000002W Version: 1.5 2011-4-29 0086-0510-8522-7555

 Table of
1. PLC Component
content

Chapter I PLC Component1

1 Product summary and corresponding programming language...............................................1
2 Devices for PLC.....................................................................................................................3
3 Program memory and parameter structure .............................................................................6
4 Notes(Input and output processing, response lagging, dual-coil) ..........................................8

0
 Summary
1. PLC Component

Chapter I PLC Component

1 Product summary and corresponding programming language

Product summary
TP03 M type: 20 / 30 points
‹ Built-in Flash memory ( 8,000 Steps )
‹ Retentive data with lithium battery
‹ Can expand to 128 points
‹ Can expand 8 channels AD input & 2 channels DA output

TP03 H Type : 20/30 points

‹ Built-in EEPROM ( 8,000 Steps ) ,Built-in RTC, RS485 communication
‹ Retentive data and RTC data with lithium battery
‹ Removable terminal block
‹ Can expand to 256 points with adding an external power supply
‹ Can expand 8 channels AD input & 2 channels DA output

TP03 H Type : 40/60 points

‹ Built-in EEPROM ( 16,000 Steps ) ,Built-in RTC, RS485 communication
‹ Retentive data and RTC data with lithium battery
‹ Removable terminal block
‹ Can expand to 256 points with adding an external power supply
‹ Can expand 60 channels AD input & 10 channels DA output

TP03 S Type : 14/20/26/36 points

‹ Built-in EEPROM (4,000 Steps ), RS485 communication
‹ Can expand to 80 points
‹ Can expand 8 channels AD input & 2 channels DA output

Programming mode
Instruction list (IL) programming
It refers to the sequential control instruction input with LD, AND, OUT and etc., and
such mode is the basic input form for programming sequential control program, however,
the content is hard to understand.
For example:
Step No. Instruction Device
0 LD X000
1 OR Y005
2 ANI X001
3 OUT Y005

1
 Summary
1. PLC Component

Ladder Logic (LD) programming

The ladder Logic programming employs sequential control signals and device
numbers, and draws sequential control circuit on the drawing. Such method represents
sequential control loop with contact symbol and coil symbol, so it is easy to understand
the content. Meanwhile, the state displayed by the loop can be used to monitor action of
PLC.

X000 X001
Y005
Y005

Ladder Logic is used to represent

the above instruction list program
Sequential function chart (SFC) programming
SFC programming is the input method for sequential control design according to the
mechanical actions. In the peripheral equipment with personal computer and other image,
the chart below can be used to determine flow of the sequential control.

S0 Initial state
Transfer Start
conditions
S 20 Rise

State Upper limit

(Working S 21 Fall
procedure)
Lower limit
S 22 Rise
Upper limit

Return S0
Of the above three programmed sequential control program, they are stored in memory of
PLC in instruction list (content of the instruction list), therefore, representation and edition of the
program in accordance with chart below can be exchanged (even it is instruction list program,
according to SFC conversion rule, devices corresponding to SFC chart can be used to represent
program based on instructions).

Instruction
list

Ladder
SFC
chart

2
 Device
[Link] component

2 Devices for PLC

There are so many relays, counters and timers in PLC, and they have many contacts a
(normally open contact) and contacts b (normally close contact). These contacts and coils make up
sequential control loop. The arrow represents signal transfer.
In addition, there is memory device used to store data in PLC-data register (D).

Input terminal or
input connector
Input relay: X
Interface for receiving extenral switching signal of PLC is input relay, and symbol of the device is X.
PLC is installed with input relay with corresponding number of points.

Auxiliary relay:
Counter: C
M
There are several
PLC has several
counters in PLC, Output relay: Y
auxiliary relays,
Timer: T and symbol of the
and symbol of Interface for
PLC has many device is C.
the device is M. driving external
timers, and
load of PLC is
symbol of the
output relay and
device is T.
State: S symbol of the
PLC has devices device is Y.
of several states, PLC can have
and the symbol is several output
S. relays.

Contact for external output of the output relay（1 contact

a）
Output terminal PLC is installed with output contact with corresponding
or output number of points.
connector

3
 Device
[Link] component

Interpretation for devices:

Input and output relays (X, Y)
Address numbers of input relay, output replay and extension relay are distributed as per
X000—X007, X010—X017, …Y000—Y007, Y010—Y017 and etc. in basic units in octal
code, which follow the basic units and they are in correspondence with numbers of X and Y in
octal code.
In addition to numbers of X and Y in octal code, the following device numbers are in decimal
code
Auxiliary relay (M)
The auxiliary relay is the relay in PLC. The relay is different from input and output relays,
which can not obtain external input and it can be used in program. Some relays can hold
ON/OFF state in case of power failure for PLC.
Step relay (S)
It is the relay used as working step number represented by SFC. When it is not used as
working step number, as the auxiliary relay, it can be programmed as common contact or coil.
In addition, it can be used as signal alarm for diagnosing external failure.
Timer(T)
The timer executes clock pulses 1ms, 10ms, 100ms and etc. in PLC, when specified setting
value is reached, the output contact acts. The timer based on clock pulse can be used to detect
0.001-3276.7 seconds.
For TP03 M/H type, T192-T199,T246~T249 are the special timer for sub-program and
program interruption.
For TP03 S type, T196-T199,T246~T249 are the special timer for sub-program and program
interruption (See chapter II Device for detail).
Drive input of timer coil of T246-T255 is OFF, the current value continues to act. Other timers
are cleared 0.
Counter(C)
The counter is divided into the following types according to different applications.
Internal counting General use/Holding for power failure
16-bit counter: for increasing counting, range of counting: 1-32,767
32-bit counter: for increasing/decreasing counting, range of counting:
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
These counters can be used as internal signal of PLC, with response speed less than
10Hz (0.1s).
High-speed counting Holding for power failure
32-bit counter: for increasing/decreasing counting, range of counting:
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647(Single-phase and single counting, single-phase and
double-counting, double-phase and double counting) are distributed to input relay. The
high-speed counter can perform 100kH counting, which has nothing to do with scan
cycle of PLC.

4
 Device
[Link] component

Data registers (D)，(V)，(Z)

The data register is the device for storing data. Data register of PLC is 16-bit (the highest bit is
the symbol mark), range of data: -32768~32767. Combine the two registers to execute 32-bit
data processing (the highest bit is symbol mark). Range of data:
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647. Like other soft devices, the data register is classified for
general use and holding in case of power failure.
Of data registers, Z and V registers for index (address index) are provided. See the following
on combined use of Z and V registers and other devices.
If V0=3, Z0=5, D100V0=D103 C20Z0=C25 ← device number + values of V[ ] or Z[ ].
The data register and index register can be used for indirect specifying and applied instruction
of the timer and counter.
Constant (K)，(H)
Of values used by PLC, K represents values of decimal system, H represents values of
hexadecimal system and they are used as setting values of timer and counter or operand of
applied instructions.
Pointer (P)，(I)
The pointer is used for branching and interruption. The pointer P for branching is used to
specify F00(CJ) conditional jump or F01(CALL) sub-program jump. The pointer I for
interruption is used to specify input interruption, timing interruption and counter interruption.

5
 Memory and
1. PLC Component
parameter

3 Program memory and parameter structure

Structure of storage device

See the figure on structure of storage device of PLC, in addition, devices of the storage
device are divided into A, B and C according to content of initialization.
●Data register ●Index register
C：For general use B：V register
A：For holding in case of power failure
B：Z register
System memory A：For file use
CPU B：For special use
ROM
A：Clock data
●Current value register of timer
C：For 100ms use A: for 100ms use
C：For 10ms use A: for 1ms use
A: Parameter ●Current value register of counter
C：For general use 16-bit and 32-bit
Content of built- A：For power failure use 16-bit and 32-bit
in storage device A：For high-speed counter
is held via battery
Built-in storage device of bit-device
A:Program of PLC or flash memory
storage device
Via If extended ●Contact image zone
parameter storage device is C：Input relay
setting loaded, the built- C：Auxiliary relay for general
A: Annotation in storage device use
{
is OFF and one A：Auxiliary relay for holding
8,000 ~ A：File register side of the in case of power failure
16,000 storage box will B：Special auxiliary relay
steps act in priority. C：State for general use C: Output
Refer to the following Setting of A：State for holding in case of locking
capacity of Storage Device on setting power failure memory
range of the program storage device. A：Signal alarm

Data register and bit-device storage C：Output relay

are in the built-in storage device of
PLC. ●Timer contact, timing coil
When power is OFF or RUN→STOP, C：For 100ms use C：For 100ms use
the storage content is cleared, content in total
of the device and some special device C：For 10ms C：For 100ms in total
is held by battery or flash memory. ●Counter contact, counting coil, reset
coil
C：16-bit and 32-bit for general use
A：16-bit and 32-bit for holding in case
of power failure
A：For high-speed counter

Power Power
Type of storage devices STOP→ RUN RUN→STOP
OFF OFF→ON
A: Battery, Flash memory backup
No change
supporting series storage device
B: Special M and D, index register Clear Setting of initial No change☆
value ☆
C: Other non-backup supporting No change Clear
Clear
series storage device No change of M8033 drive
☆ The represented part will be cleared from STOP→ RUN, please pay attention.

6
 Memory and
1. PLC Component
parameter

Parameter structure
The parameters are used to specify range of holding in case of power failure and capacities of
annotation and file registers, and setting and change of parameters can be executed via
PC/PDA LINK. Regarding operation and its details, please refer to Help text of PC/PDA
LINK. Refer to TP03 operating manual of functions of the parameters.
Parameter type and setting content
① Settings of storage device capacity: D8006.
② Settings of locking range: it is used to change range of holding in case of power failure of
PLC.
③ Password registration Password can be set, which is used to error writing of programmed
sequential control program or embezzlement, however, for online operation of programming
software, password can be used to set 3 protection levels.
④ Other parameters: it is used to set validity/invalidity of RUN/STOP, specify non-battery
operation mode and set PC general communication.
Initial values of parameter settings
TP03 M/H Type
Item Initial value PC/PDA device
Capacity of storage 8K (M/H 20&30 points)
Program capacity ⊙
device 16K (40&60 points)
Annotation capacity 0 ⊙
Locking range Auxiliary relay (M) 500-1023 (0-1023) ⊙
(Holding range in State (S) 500-999 (0-1023) ⊙
case of power failure) Counter (C) (16) 100-199 (0-199) ⊙
Counter (C) (32) 200-255 (200-255) ⊙
Data register (D) 200-511 (0-511) ⊙
Password None ⊙
Input setting of terminal RUN None ⊙
Input number of terminal RUN None ⊙
PC general communication settings None ⊙
TP03 SR Type
Item Initial value PC/PDA device
Capacity of Program capacity 4K (S 14&20&26&36 points) ⊙
storage device Annotation capacity 0 ⊙
Locking range Auxiliary relay (M) 500-1023 (0-1023) ⊙
(Holding range in State (S) 500-999 (0-1023) ⊙
case of power Counter (C) (16) 90-99 (0-99) ⊙
failure) Counter (C) (32) 220-255 (220-255) ⊙
Data register (D) 400-511 (400-511) ⊙
Password None ⊙
Input setting of terminal RUN None ⊙
Input number of terminal RUN None ⊙
PC general communication settings None ⊙
⊙ : Change available

7
 Notes
1. PLC component

4 Notes(Input and output processing, response lagging, dual-coil)

Action time sequence and response lagging of input and output relays

[Input processing]
Input image
storage zone

[Program processing]
Refreshing of image
storage zone of
devices

[Output processing]
Transferring to
output locking zone

Restrictions on signal width of input pulse

Time width of input ON/OFF of PLC is longer than cycle time of PLC, if response lagging of
input wave filter is 2ms, the cycle time is 10ms, time of ON/OFF needs 12ms respectively.
Therefore, the input pulse of 1,000/(12+12)=40Hz and above can not be processed, however,
if special function and applied instruction of PLC are used, such defect will be improved.

Such input ON signal can

Such ON signal can be obtained ON signal can not
not be obtained be obtained
OFF ON ON OFF

Output
Input processing （ Time）
processing Scan cycle

See the left chart, the same coil Y003 can be used at
Output processing
X001=ON X002=OFF
several points.
For example, take X001=ON, X002=OFF
X001
Y003
For initial Y003, for X001 is ON, the image storage zone
X003
Y004 is ON, the output Y004 is ON.
X002
Y003 However, for the secondary Y003, the input X002 is OFF.
Therefore, the image storage zone is rewritten OFF.
Output processing Therefore, actual external output Y003=OFF, Y004=ON.
Y003=OFF Y004=ON

8
2．Functions of device Table of Contents

Chapter II Device ..............................................................................................................................1

1 Processing of digits, constants K and H.................................................................................1
2 List of Device Numbers .........................................................................................................2
3 Number and function of input and output relays (X/Y) .........................................................5
4 Number and function M of auxiliary relay M ........................................................................8
5 Number and function of status relay S ................................................................................. 11
6 Number and function of timer T ..........................................................................................13
7 Number and function of counter C.......................................................................................17
8 Number and function of built-in counter C ..........................................................................22
9 Number and function D of data register D...........................................................................23
9.1 Data register D ..........................................................................................................23
9.2 Supplementary register W.........................................................................................26
9.3 Index register V，Z ..................................................................................................27
10 Number and function P/I of pointer ...................................................................................29

0
 2．Functions of device Table of Contents

Chapter II Device
1 Processing of digits, constants K and H

Processing of digits

Decimal z Setting value K of timer and counter.

system digit z Numbers of auxiliary relay M, timer T, counter C, status S and etc. (number of
DEC device).
z Specify digit and command action K in application command operation.
Hexadecimal For decimal system digit, specify digital command action H in application
system digit command operation.
HEX
Binary digit z Specify digits of counter or data register with timer of decimal or hexadecimal
BIN system, however, such digit is processed with binary system digits within PLC.
When monitor is performed on PC/PDA link, such device can be converted into
decimal or hexadecimal system digit.
Octonary z Device numbers of the input/output relay are executed according to octonary
digit OCT digit system, therefore, it can be numbered 0~7, 10~17…70~77 and etc., there
is no 8 and 9 in octonary system.
BCD z BCD code is used to express 0-9 of decimal system with 4-digit binary system.
code It is easy to process, therefore, it is used to digital switch of BCD output form
or monitor control of 7 codes and etc.
Constants K, z K is the symbol of expressing integral of decimal system.
H z H is the symbol of expressing integral of hexadecimal system.
When operation for command digit and etc. is done on PC/PDA for
programming, input with K for decimal digit and H for hexadecimal digit, such
as K10, H102.

Conversion of digits
Hexadecimal
Octonary digit Decimal system digit Binary digit
system digit BCD
OCT DEC BIN
HEX
0 0 00 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 1 01 0000 0001 0000 0001
2 2 02 0000 0010 0000 0010
3 3 03 0000 0011 0000 0011
4 4 04 0000 0100 0000 0100
5 5 05 0000 0101 0000 0101
6 6 06 0000 0110 0000 0110
7 7 07 0000 0111 0000 0111
10 8 08 0000 1000 0000 1000
11 9 09 0000 1001 0000 1001
12 10 0A 0000 1010 0001 0000
13 11 0B 0000 1011 0001 0001
14 12 0C 0000 1100 0001 0010
15 13 0D 0000 1101 0001 0011
: : : : : : :
143 99 63 0110 0011 1001 1001
Device Internal device BCD digit
Internal
Main numbers of numbers except switch, 7
Constant H processing
Application input and constant, input and codes
of PLC
output relays output relays monitor

1
2．Functions of device List of device
numbers

2 List of Device Numbers

PLC of TP03 series has 4 basic programming elements. To identify varieties of programming
elements, different symbols are specified. It is stated below:
X: Input relay, for storing on and off the external input circuit.
Y: Output relay, used to output physical signal from PLC directly.
M: Auxiliary relay and S: status relay: internal computation symbol of PLC.

List of device device:

TP03M/H machine types:
Input/ Output
TP03-20 TP03-30 TP03-40 TP03-60 Increasing expansion
Type
Relay X X000~X013 X000~X017 X000~X027 X000~X043 X000~X177
X000~X377 12 points 16 points 24 points 36 points 128 points for M type
255 points X000~X377
256 points for H type
Relay Y Y000~Y007 Y000~Y005 Y000~Y017 Y000~Y027 Y000~Y177
Y000~Y377 8 points 14 points 16 points 24 points 128 points for M type
256 points Y000~Y377
256 points for H type

TP03SR machine type

Input/
Output TP03SR-14 TP03SR-20 TP03SR-26 TP03SR-36 Increasing expansion
Type
Relay X X000~X007 X000~X013 X000~X017 X000~X023 X000~X117
X000~X377 8 points 12 points 16 points 20 points 80 points
255 points
Relay Y Y000~Y005 Y000~Y007 Y000~Y011 Y000~Y017 Y000~Y117
Y000~Y377 6 points 8 points 10 points 16 points 80 points
256 points

There are 512 points for X and Y of relay, actual I/O module can be used for output and input, and
the left points are used as auxiliary relay. Numbers of X and Y is octonary digital system, such as
X000~X007, X010 after X007 not X008.

2
 2．Functions of device List of device
numbers

TP03M/H machine type

Auxiliary M0~M499 M500~M1023 M1024~M7679 M8000~M8511
relay 500 points ※1 for 524 points 6656 points 512 points
M general use ※2 for keeping ※3 for keeping ※4 for special use
Status relay S0~S499 S500 ~ S1023 S1024 ~ S4095
S 500 points ※1 524 points ※2 3072 points
for general use for keeping ※3 for keeping
For initialization S0~S9 S900 ~ S999
/Origin return S10~S19 100 points For alarm
Timer T0~T199 200 point T200~T245 T246~T249 4 points T250~T255 T256~T511
T 100ms 46 points 1ms in total 6 points, 256 points,
(T192~T199 for 10ms (T246~T249 for 100ms in total 1ms ※5
sub-program) ※5 ※5 sub-program) ※3 ※ 3
Counter 16-bit plus counting 32-bit plus and minus 32-bit high speed plus and minus
C counting
C0~C99 C100~C199 C200~C234 35 points C235~C245 C246~C249 C251~C254
100 points 100 points ※2 for keeping 1 phase 1 1 phase 2 2 phase
※1 for ※2 for input input input
general use keeping ※2 ※2 ※2
Data register D0~D199 D200~D511 D512~D7999 7488 D8000~D8511 W0~W9999
D 200 points 312 points points 512 points 10000 points
※1 for ※2 for ※3 for file ※4 for special use Supplementary
general use keeping (D2000~D3299 can register( Available
be set as file register) since H/M V2.3)
Data register V0~V15, Z0~Z15
V, 32 points (For indirect specifying)
Nested N0~N7 P0~P255 256 I00X~I50X I6XX~I8XX I010~I060
finger 8 points points 6 points 3 points 6 points
N,P,k For main control Finger of Pointer for Pointer for time Pointer for
circuit jumping and interrupt input interrupt counting
sub-program interrupt
Consta K 16-bit -32,768~32,767 32-bit -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
nt H 16-bit 0~FFFFH 32-bit 0~FFFFFFFFH

※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping field
for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for power
failure.
※3 Fixing range for keeping in case of power failure, and the keeping range can not be changed.
※4 Refer to list of special elements.
※5 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are not used to set and change the keeping
field for the keeping field for power failure.

3
 2．Functions of device List of device
numbers

TP03SR machine type

Auxiliary M0~M499 M500~M1023 M1024~M1535 M8000~M8511
relay 500 points 524 points 512 points 512 points
M ※1 for general use ※2 for keeping ※3 for keeping ※4 for special use
Status relay S0~S499 500 points S500 ~ S1023
S ※1 for general use 524 points ※2 for keeping
Initialization S0~S9 S900 ~ S999
/Origin return S10~S19 100 points for alarm
Timer T0~T39, T196~T199 T200~T245 T246~T249 4 points T250~T255
T 44 points 100ms 46 points 1ms in total 6 points
(Sub-program: 10ms (Sub-program: 100ms in total ※3
T196~T199) ※5 ※ 5 T246~T249) ※3
Counter 16-bit plus counting 32-bit plus and minus 32-bit high speed plus and minus
C counting
C0~C89 C90~C99 C220~C234 C235~C238 C246~C247 C251~C253
90 points 10 points 15 points C241~C242 1 phase 2 2 phase
※1 for ※2 for ※2 for keeping 1 phase 1 input input Input
general use keeping ※2 ※2 ※2
Data register D0~D399 D400~D511 D8000~D8511
D 400 points 112 points 512 points
※1 for ※2 for ※4 for special use
general use keeping
Data register V0~V15, Z0~Z15
V、Z 32 points (For indirect specifying)
Nested N0~N7 P0~P127 128 I00X~I30X I6XX~I8XX I010~I060
finger 8 points points 4 points 3 points 6 points
N、P、I For main control Finger of Pointer for Pointer for time Pointer for
circuit jumping and interrupted input interrupt counting
sub-program interrupt
Consta K 16-bit -32,768~32,767 32-bit -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
nt H 16-bit 0~FFFFH 32-bit 0~FFFFFFFFH

※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping field
for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for power
failure.
※3 Fixing range for keeping in case of power failure, and the keeping range can not be changed.
※4 Refer to list of special elements.
※5 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are not used to set and change the keeping
field for the keeping field for power failure.

4
2． Functions of device Input and output
relays

3 Number and function of input and output relays (X/Y)

Input and output relays

Number of input and output relays
Numbers of input and output relays are made up of inherent address No. of basic unit and
address No. of expansion equipment of the above-mentioned number and these address numbers
are expressed in octonary system. For example, in octonary system, 17 and 20 are adjacent
integrals.
TP03M/H machine type
Input/ Output
TP03-20 TP03-30 TP03-40 TP03-60 Increasing expansion
Type
Relay X X000~X013 X000~X017 X000~X027 X000~X043 X000~X177
X000~X377 12 points 16 points 24 points 36 points 128 points for M type
255 points X000~X377
256 points for H type
Relay Y Y000~Y007 Y000~Y005 Y000~Y017 Y000~Y027 Y000~Y177
Y000~Y377 8 points 14 points 16 points 24 points 128 points for M type
256 points Y000~Y377
256 points for H type

TP03SR machine type

Input/
Output TP03SR-14 TP03SR-20 TP03SR-26 TP03SR-36 Increasing expansion
Type
Relay X X000~X007 X000~X013 X000~X017 X000~X023 X000~X117
X000~X377 8 points 12 points 16 points 20 points 80 points
255 points
Relay Y Y000~Y005 Y000~Y007 Y000~Y011 Y000~Y017 Y000~Y117
Y000~Y377 6 points 8 points 10 points 16 points 80 points
256 points

Input relay is the window for PLC receiving external switching quantity. PLC reads and stores
external signal conditions into image memory. The input terminal is connected to external
normally opened contact or closed contact and series connection or parallel connection circuits
or electronic sensor made of several contacts or electronic sensor (such as, proximity switch). In
Ladder Logic, normally closed contact and closed contact of input relay can be used for many
times.
PLC of output relay is the window for PLC sending loading signal, the output relay is used to
transmit output signal of PLC to the output module and the later one drives external loading.

5
2． Functions of device Input and output
relays

Function
The following is the sketch map of PLC control system. When external input circuit of
X000 terminal is get connected, the corresponding input image memory is “1” and “0” when it is
disconnected. Status of input relay only depends on status of external input signal, which is not
controlled by users’ program. Therefore, there will not be coil of input relay in Ladder Logic
When Y000 coil is connected, normally opened contact of corresponding hardware relay of
output module of relay is closed and the external loading works. Each relay in the output relay
has only one contact, however, in Ladder Logic, normally opened contact and closed contact of
each output relay can be used for many times.
External power
supply
COM1 COM1
Program row
X000 X001
X000 X000 Y000 Y000
Load
Y000
X000 Y000
Input Normally Output
terminal opened contact terminal
X000 Y000 Normally
PLC
closed contact

Input terminal is the terminal for receiving Output terminal is the terminal connected to the
external input switch signal. PLC input terminal outside. The output relay is the point for
is connected to input component X which is an external output (transistor, double-direction
electronic relay with optical coupling features, flow, the relay is used for output terminal in
and it owns several normally opened contacts (a PLC). The output relay on PLC has many
point) and normally closed contact (b point). normally opened/closed contacts and can be
Theses points are used in PLC and input relay used. External output point and internal point
can not be driven in program. can be seen below.

6
2． Functions of device Input and output
relays

Action time sequence of input relay

PLC can perform sequence control by executing the following program repeatedly. When
massive input and output is
used, drive time and
computation cycle of
Input processing Read in output wave filter and
X000 output assembly will be
X001 correspondingly delayed.
X002
Input
Read in

image ●Input processing

zone Before PLC executing
program, all ON/OFF
status of PLC will be read
into the image zone.
During program executing,
in case of input change,
content of input image
Element image zone

Y000 ③Read in zone will not be changed,

X000
and when it is processed in
④Read in
the next cycle, such change
will be read.
M 0
⑤Read in
Y000 In addition, even
ON→OFF and OFF→ON
happen, before judging
ON/OFF, there will be
about 10ms delay for the
input wave filter.
⑥ Output Output processing

Y000
●Program processing
Y001 PLC reads out ON/OFF
Output terminal

Output Y002 from input image zone or

locking
storage image zone of other image
zone area according to
command. It computes
from step 0, then write the
results into the image zone,
therefore, image zone of the device element shall execute according to content of the image
memory with the internal contacts.
●Output processing
Once all the commands have been executed, ON/OFF of image memory of output Y is
transmitted to the locking zone, and it becomes actual output of PLC.
For contacts for external output of PLC, the response will be delayed according to the device
element for output.

7
2． Functions of device Auxiliary relay M

4 Number and function M of auxiliary relay M

Auxiliary relay
The auxiliary relay (M) is realized by device It can not accept external input signal and also can
not drive external loading, it is an internal status sign
Number of auxiliary relay M is stated blow: the number is distributed according to decimal
system.

TP03M/H machine type

For general use Use for keeping in case Special use for For special use
of power failure keeping in case of
power failure
M0~M499 M500~M1023 M1024~M7679 M8000~M8511
500 points ※1 524 points ※2 6656 points ※3 512 points

TP03SR machine type

For general use Use for keeping in case Special use for For special use
of power failure keeping in case of
power failure
M0~M499 M500~M1023 M1024~M1535 M8000~M8511
500 points ※1 524 points ※2 512 points ※3 512 points

※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping field
for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for power
failure.
※3 Fixing range for keeping in case of power failure, and the keeping range can not be changed.

Case of function and act

PLC has many auxiliary relays. Like output relay, coil of such auxiliary relay is driven by contact
of device elements in the PLC.
The auxiliary relay has many electronic normally opened contacts and closed contacts, and they
can be used in PLC, however, such contact can not drive external loading, and drive of external
loading shall be executed through the output relay.

For general use

When power down, the auxiliary relay, the output relay will be OFF. If it is powered a second time,
besides the external input signal is ON, the others are still OFF.
M 100

Distribution of auxiliary relays for general use and keeping for power
M 100 down in TP03 can be set and adjusted through PC/PDA link.
N orm ally opened contact

M 100
N orm ally closed contact

8
2． Functions of device Auxiliary relay M

For keeping for power failure

Some control system memorizes status before power failure and such status will re-appear for a
second operation.
Auxiliary relay for keeping for power supply is also called relay for keeping. It makes use of
backup battery or flash memory in the PLC for keeping for power failure. It keeps the relay instant
status in the first scanning cycle after PLC is powered on.
If the special relay for keeping for power supply is taken as general auxiliary relay, RST or ZRST
can be used to clear at the front-most of the program.
In addition, when inter-PC link or parallel connection link is used, some auxiliary relay is
occupied as link.
The left figure displays the demonstration for keeping for
power failure of M600. In the circuit, if X000 is connected,
M600 acts, even X600 keeps acting, therefore, even X000 is
open circuit caused by power failure, M600 will continue to
act for a second operation.
However, if normally closed contact of X001 is open circuit
for a second operation, M600 will not act.

See the left figure for the commands SET, RST

Example of keeping for power failure

X000
SET M600 LS1(X000) LS2(X001)

X001
RST M600

Circuit for keeping for setting and clearing for

power failure

When it is operated for a second time, direction of advance is the same as the direction before
power failure.

X000 X001
Right drive
M600 command
M600 X000=ON (Left limit switch) →M600=ON→ Right
drive → Power off→ Platform stops → Operate a second
X001 X000 time (M600=ON) →X001=ON (Right limit switch)
Left drive
M601 command →M600=OFF, M601=ON→ Left drive.
M601

9
2． Functions of device Auxiliary relay M

Special use
There are 512 special auxiliary relay in the PLC. These relays have its specified functions, which
are divided into two types:
a. (Special auxiliary relay with contact functioning): drive coil of PLC is used, and the user can
use such contact.
M8000: Operation monitor
M8002: Initial pulse
M8012: 100ms cycle oscillation
The user can not use undefined special auxiliary relay.
b. (Special auxiliary relay with coil drive): the users can drive these coils for specified operation.
M8033: Keep memory as required
M8034: All outputs forbidden
M8039: Constant scanning
Please note that there are two validities when driving and after executing END.

10
2． Functions of device Status

5 Number and function of status relay S

Status
The status relay is a kind of programming element for programming sequence control and it is
used with commands of STL and RET described in chapter 4. The status relay for general use does
not have the function of keeping in case of power failure. The relay for keeping in case of power
failure can utilize the built-in backup battery or Flash memory of PLC for storing ON/OFF.
The status number S is stated blow (distributed according to decimal system).
TP03M/H machine type
Status relay S0~S499 500 points S500 ~ S1023 524 points S1024 ~ S4095
S ※1 for general use ※2 for keeping 3072 points
S0~S9 for initialization S900 ~ S999 ※3 for keeping
/ S10~S19 for origin return 100 points for alarm

TP03SR machine type

Status relay S0~S499 500 points S500 ~ S1023 524 points
S ※1 for general use ※2 for keeping
S0~S9 for initialization S900 ~ S999
/ S10~S19 for origin return 100 points for alarm

※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping
field for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for
power failure.
※3 Relevant features for keeping for power failure, which can not change with parameters.

Example of function and action

Status S is an important device for simple programming of step control of working procedure,
which is used with step echelon command STL.

For general use/keeping

S2
As the step control of working procedure described in the figure, if
Start X000
Y000 the starting signal X000 is on, the status S20 is on, the
S 20
Down
electromagnetic valve Y000 for down acts, the result is that: if the
Lower limit
X001 lower limit switch X001 is ON, the status S21 is on and
Y001
S 21 electromagnetic valve Y001 for clamping acts.
Clamping
Clamping If the limit switch X002 confirmed by clamping is ON, the status S22
X002
Y002 is ON. With action moving, the status will return to original status.
S 22
Up After status relay for general use is powered off, it is OFF. The status
Upper limit
X003 relay for keeping in case of power failure can store the status before
power failure. Therefore, it can be operated from the middle working procedure.

11
2． Functions of device Status

X001
S10 Like status relay, auxiliary relay has many normally opened and closed
S10
contacts, it can be used within the sequence control procedure.
M30
In addition, if it is not used for step echelon command, status relay S
Y005 and auxiliary relay M can be used in general sequence control.

PLC can change distribution for general use and power off use via setting of PC/PDA link
parameters.

For signal alarm

The status for signal alarm can also be used as output of external failure diagnosis.
For instance, compile external failure diagnosis circuit in the figure below, monitor the special
data register D8049 and display minimum number of S900~S999.
In case of several failures, clear the failure with minimum number to get the number of the next
failure.

If special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven, the

M8049 monitor is under effective condition.
M8000
After drive advance outputs Y00, if the advance
Y000 X000
F46 ANS T 0 K 10 S900 terminal detects that X000 does not work within 1
second, S900 acts.
X 001 X002 If the upper limit X001 and lower limit X002 do
F46 ANS T 1 K 20 S901 not work over 2 seconds, S901 acts.
For continuous operation mode input X003 is ON
X 003 X004
for machine with interval less than 10 seconds, if
F46 ANS T 2 K100 S902
the action switch X004 does not work in one cycle,
M8048
S902 acts.
Y010 If any of S900~S999 is ON, the special auxiliary
relay M8048 acts, the failure display output Y010
X005 will act. External failure diagnosis program is
F47 ANR P
changed into OFF by the reset button X005. For
each X005 ON, action of minimum number resets
one by one.

12
2．Counter Counter C

6 Number and function of timer T

Number of timer
TP03M/H machine type
Timer T T0~T199 200 points T200~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255 T256~T511
100ms 46 points 4 points,1ms in total 6 points,100ms 256 points,
(For sub-program 10ms (For sub-program in total 1ms
T192~T199) T246~T249)

TP03SR machine type

Timer T T0~T39，T196~T199 T200~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255
44 points 100ms 46 points 10ms 4 points,1ms in total 6 points,100ms in
(For sub-program: (For sub-program total
T196~T199) T246~T249)
If it is not used as counter number of the counter, it can be used as data register for storing data.
Function
The timer accumulation is used for clock pulse of 1ms, 10ms, 100ms and etc. of PLC. When
reaching specified setting, contact of the output acts. The setting value employs the constant K as
setting value and data register D can be used for indirect specifying.
For general use

X000 If drive input X000 of the timer coil T200

K123
T200 is ON, T200 employs the clock pulse
totaled 10ms of the counter. If the value is
T200
Y000 equal to setting value K123, output contact
of the timer acts.
1.23 Second The output contacts acts 1.23 seconds after
coil drive.
X000
Drive input X000 is off or powered off, the
Setting timer resets and the output contact resets.
Current value
value

Y000

For accumulated use

X001
T250 K345
T250
Y001
X002
RST T250

13
2．Counter Counter C

If drive input X001 of the timer coil T250 is

ON, T250 employs the clock pulse totaled
100ms of the counter. If the value is equal to
setting value K345, output contact of the timer
acts.
During computation, even input X001 is off or
failure of power supply, when it restarts, and it
continues to compute and the accumulated action
time is 34.5 seconds.
If reset input X002 is ON, the timer resets and the output contact also resets.
Special timers
T256~T511,these 256 points are special timers. When PLC is on ,they are used for general use. In case of RUN→STOP
or power failure, they are used for accumulated use, the output contacts and data will keep.
Specifying method of setting value
Specifying of constant
T10 is the counter taking 100ms (0.1S) as unit and 100 is specified as
constant, so the timer 0.1S×100=10S works.
K is constant (integral of decimal system) 10 seconds timer
Indirect specifying D
Write content of indirect specified data register into program
or input with digit switch. If it is specified as memory for
keeping in case of power failure, please note that low voltage
may lead to unstable setting value.

Processing of digital device

Current value of the counter can be used as value through application command and etc.
When it is used as data device, refer to number and function of internal counter.

Attentions in the procedure

The timer of T192-T199 for sub-program and interrupted program and it starts timing when
executing coil command or END command.
If timing reaches setting value, when executing coil command or END command, the output
contact acts. The common timer executes coil command timing. Refer to act and precision of the
timer in the following. Therefore, under some conditions, the coil command is used for executing
sub-program or not timing for interruption and can not act.
If 1ms accumulated timer is used in the sub-program or interrupted program, when it reaches
setting value, we must not that when executing initial coil command, the output contact acts.

14
2．Counter Counter C

Details and precisions of the timer

Besides the timer of interrupting executing, after the coil drive, the timer starts timing, after timing,
the initial coil executes and the output contact acts.

Timing action (if length of time is

long, several clocks are used) Contact not working
Input
X010=OFF? ON
processing
Timer starts counting
X010
K 12 Contact working
T0
{1.2
T0 Y010
Second}
Y010 ON

The 1st cycle The 2nd cycle The nth cycle The (n+1)th cycle

Seen from the above figure, action precision of timer contact from driving coil to finishing, it can
be expressed in the followings:
(T+To) ~ (T-α)
a: Correspondent with 1ms, 10ms and 100ms of the counter, namely 0.001, 0.01 and 0.1Second
T: Setting time of timer (S)
To: Scanning cycle (S)
When programming, the timer contact shall be written before the coil command, with maximum
error +2T.
When setting value of the timer is 0 and the next coil command for scanning is executed, the
output contact starts acting. In addition, after 1ms counter of interrupting execution executes coil
command, 1ms clock pulse counting is executed in interruption mode.

Case of actions
Output delay on and off timer
X001 T5
X001
Y000
X001
Y000 K200 20Seconds
T5 T5

Sparkling point
When programming, the timer contact shall be written before the coil command, with maximum
error +2T.
When setting value of the timer is 0 and the next coil command for scanning is executed, the
output contact starts acting. In addition, after 1ms counter of interrupting execution executes coil
command, 1ms clock pulse counting is executed in interruption mode.

X001 T2 X001
T1 K 20
T1 T2 T1
T1 Y000
T2 K 10
T2

Y000 1 computation cy

15
2．Counter Counter C

In addition, F66ALT command can be used for sparkling action.

Several counters by application command F65

Output on and off counter, single pulse output timer and sparkling timer are programmed.

X000
z Specified value m is the setting value of
F65 STMR T10 K100 M0
the specified counter, 10 seconds in the
X000
case.

M0 10秒 10秒

M1 10秒 10秒 z M0 is OFF delay timer.

M2 10秒
z M1 is ONE-SHOT timer after input point
M3 ON—OFF.
z M2 and M3 are sparkling actions. See the
left figure.
X000 M3
F65 STMR T10 K100 M0 z See the left figure on wiring of M3, and
M1 and M2 have no sparkling.
X000

z When X000 is changed into OFF, M0,M1

M2
and M3 are changed into OFF, and T10
M1 resets.
z Timer used here can not be used for other
circuits.
In addition, if F64TTMR demonstration timer command is used, input time of the switch can be
used to set time of the counter.

16
2．Counter Counter C

7 Number and function of counter C

Number of counter
Number of the counter is stated below and the number is distributed according to decimal system.
TP03M/H machine type
Counter 16-bit in total 32-bit plus and minus 32-bit high speed plus and minus
C C0~C99 C100~C19 C200~C234 35 points C235~C245 C246~C249 C251~C254
100 points 9 100 ※2 for keeping 1 phase 1 phase 2 2 phase input
※1 for points 1input input ※2
general use ※2 for ※2 ※2
keeping

TP03SR machine type

Counter C 16-bit in total 32-bit plus and minus 32-bit high speed plus and minus
C0~C89 C90~C99 C220~C234 15 points C235~C238 C246~C247 C251~C253
90 points 10 points ※2 for keeping C241~C242 1phase2 2phase
※1 for ※2 for 1 phase input input
general use keeping 1input ※2 ※2 ※2

※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping field
for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for power
failure.

Auxiliary relay numbers for 32-bit counter plus/minus switching

Counter Direction Counter Direction Counter Direction Counter Direction
No. switching No. switching No. switching No. switching
C200 M8200 C209 M8209 C218 M8218 C227 M8227
C201 M8201 C210 M8210 C219 M8219 C228 M8228
C202 M8202 C211 M8211 C220 M8220 C229 M8229
C203 M8203 C212 M8212 C221 M8221 C230 M8230
C204 M8204 C213 M8213 C222 M8222 C231 M8231
C205 M8205 C214 M8214 C223 M8223 C232 M8232
C206 M8206 C215 M8215 C224 M8224 C233 M8233
C207 M8207 C216 M8216 C225 M8225 C234 M8234
C208 M8208 C217 M8217 C226 M8226 —— ——

17
2．Counter Counter C

Features of counter
Features of 16-bit counter and 32-bit counter are stated below. It can be used according to
switching of counting direction and range of counting.
Item 16-bit counter 32-bit counter
Counting direction Positive counting Positive counting/negative counting
switching (See the above sheet)
Setting value 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Specified setting Constant K or data The same as left, one couple of memory
value register after data completion (two)
Change of current Without change after Change after positive counting (Circulating
value positive counting counter)
Output point Keep acting after Keep acting for positive counting and
positive counting negative counting for reset
Reset actions When executing RST, current value of the counter is zero, and the
output point resets
Current register 16 bits 32 bits

Example of function and action

Distribution of status for counters for general use and keeping for power failure can be set and
changed on PC/PDA link.
16-bit counter-for general use/keeping for power failure
16-bit binary plus counter, the effective setting value is K1~K32,767 (decimal constant). The
setting values K0 and K1 have the same significances, namely, the output contacts acts at the first
counting.
X 01 0
RST C 0
If power supply for PLC is cut off, counting value for
X 011
C0 K 10 general counter will be cleared, and the counter for
C 0
Y 00 0
Setting v alue ( constant) keeping for power failure can store the counting value
Indir ect specifyi ng
before power failure, therefore, the counter can continue
to count from the last value before power failure.
X010
The counting input X011 drives C0 coil one time,
X011

9
10 current value of the counter increases. When it executes
8

5
6
7
the coil command the tenth time, the output contact acts.
4

1
2
3
After that, if the counting input X011 acts a second time,
0
current value of the counter will not change.
Y000
If reset input X010 is ON, RST command is executed.
Current value of the counter is 0 and the output contact resets.
Setting value of the counter, besides specified by constant K, it can be specified by number of data
register. For instance, D10 is specified, and D10 is 123, so it is the same as setting K123.
When the setting values are written into current data register with MOV and other commands, for
the next input, the output coil is connected and the current memory is changed into setting value.

18
2．Counter Counter C

32-bit counter----for general use/keeping for power failure

Effective range of setting value of 32-bit binary plus/minus is -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
(Decimal system constant). Special auxiliary relay M8200~M8234 is used to specify direction of
minus/plus.

X012
M8200 If C△△△ drives M8△△△, it is minus; otherwise, it is
X013 plus.
RST C200
According to constant K and data register D, the setting
X014
C200 K—5
value can be positive and negative, and content of data
C200
Setting value (consta register with adjacent numbers are regarded as one couple
Indirect specifying
Y001 and processed as 32-bit data. Therefore, when D0 is
specified, D0 and D1 are processed as 32-bit setting value.

X012 Up Down Up When counting input X014

is used to drive C200 coil,
X013 Reset input
plus and minus are both
X014
available.
5
3
4 4
3
When current value of the
2 2
1
Current value
0
1
0 0
counter is increased from
-1
-2 -6-5, the output contact
-3 -3
-4 -4
-5 -5 relocates, and when it is
Output is connected -6 -6
-7 -7
-8 decreased from -5-6, the
Y001 output contact resets.

For general use/keeping for power failure

Increasing/decreasing of the current value has nothing to do with action of output contact. If it is
counted from 2,147,483,647, it will be changed to -2,147,483,648. Likewise, if it is minus from
-2,147,483,648, it will be changed to 2,147,483,647. Such action is called ring counting.
If reset input X013 is ON, RST command is executed, current value of the counter is changed to
0 and the output contact resets.
When the counter for keeping for power failure is used, current value of the counter, action of the
output contact and power failure for reset keep.
32-bit counter can be used as 32-bit data register. However, 32-bit counter can not be used as
device element in 16-bit application command.
When the setting values are written into data register of current value with D-MOV command and
etc., counting can be performed for the following counting input and the contact can not be
changed.

19
2．Counter Counter C

Specifying of setting value

16-bit counter
Specifying of constant K
X003 Constant (Decimal system integral)
C0 K100 1-32,767 100 counts
Indirect specifying D
Write content of the indirectly specified data register
X001 into program in advance or input through digit
F12 MOV K100 D5
switch.
X003
C0 D5 When it is specified as the memory for keeping for
power failure, please note that inadequate voltage
may lead to unstable settings.
D5=K100 (100 counts)

32-bit counter
Specifying of constant K
X003 Constant (decimal system integral)-2,147,483,648~ 2,147,483,647
C200 K 43,210
43210 counting

Indirect specifying D

X001
F12 MOV K43210 D5(D6) 2 indirectly specified data memories are grouped to one
X003 group. While 32-bit command is written into setting value,
C200 D5(D6)
do not repeat the data register on other program.

Response rate of the counter

When the counter executes circulating scanning and counting for X, Y, M, S, C and other contacts
of PLC, for instance, X011 is taken as counting input, duration for getting through and
disconnecting must be longer than scanning time of PLC (generally less than 10Hz). As for the
mentioned high-speed counter executing counting with specified input for interrupted processing
and counting for KHz, it has nothing to do with scanning time.

Processing of digital device element

The counter and timer act according to setting value. When the output contacts are used, counting
value (current value) can be used as value for control.
Current value of the counter is the same as memory, processed as 16-bit or 32-bit data device
elements.

20
2．Counter Counter C

16-bit（C）
Structure of current value memory and setting value memory of counter and timer (only limited to
16 bits)

Upper 16-bit Lower

position position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15
*1
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Mark
0：Positive number
Range of values to be processed：
1：Negative number
16位：0~32,767
32位：-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

*1: The above data valid only taken as data register.

32-bit（C）

Upper 32-bit Lower

position position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
*1 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912

16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
32,768
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65,536
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432

Mark
0：Positive
number
1：Negative
number

Case of application command

X000
F12 MOV C 20 D 10 C20(Current value)→D10 transmission
X000
F10 CMP K 100 C 30 M0
Compare decimal system integral 100 and C30
X000
(current value), output the results to M0-M2.
F18 BCD C 10 K2Y000
Convert C10 (current value), output it to
X000
F22 MUL C5 K2 D4(D5) Y000-Y007. 7-code monitor.
X000 Double C5 (current value), send it to D5 and
F12 DMOV C 200 D0(D1)
D4.
X000
F11 DZCP K100 K20000 C 200 M10 C200(current value)→send it to D1, D0

Compare C200 (current value) and decimal system integral 100-20,000, output the results to M10-M11.
Case of application command describes how to use counter and timer as device element. Please
refer to the following instructions.

21
2． Functions of device High-speed
counter

8 Number and function of built-in counter C

Number of built-in high-speed counter

Built-in high-speed counter of PLC is expressed below:
It is distributed on input X000~X007 and X000~X007 according to number of the counter C,
which can not be used repeatedly.
The input number which is not used as high-speed counter can be used as general input relay.
Besides, number of high-speed counter which is not used as high-speed counter can be used as
32-bit data register.
U: Plus input; D: Minus input A: A-phase input
B: B-phase input; R: Reset input; S: Starting input
TP03M/H machine type
1 phase 1 counting input 1 phase 2counting input 2 phase 2 counting input
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254

X000 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A

X001 U/D R R D D D B B B

X002 U/D U/D U/D R R R A R

X003 U/D R R U B
X004 U/D U/D S D R
X005 U/D R S R S S

C250 / C255 Keep and unavailable

TP03SR machine type
1 phase 1counting input 1 phase 2 counting input 2 phase 2counting input
C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C246 C247 C251 C252 C253

X000 U/D U/D U U A A

X001 U/D R D D B B

X002 U/D U/D R R A

X003 U/D R B

C239~C240, C243~C245,C248~C250,C254~C255 Keep and unavailable

{Reading on the table}

Input X000, C235 single-phase and single input counting, without interruption reset and
interruption starting input functions.
If C235 is used, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254 and interruption pointer I00
are not used.
Refer to the operation manual 4 on the high-speed counter.

22
2． Functions of device Data register D

9 Number and function D of data register D

9.1 Data register D

Number of data register
Number of data register D is expressed as follows: (numbers are distributed according to decimal
system):
TP03M/H machine type:
Data register D D0~D199 D200~D511 D512~D7999 7488 points D8000~D8511
200 points 312 points For file ※3 (D2000~D3299 512 points
※1 for ※2 for can be set as file register) ※4 for special
general use keeping use
TP03SR machine type
Data register D D0~D399 D400~D511 D8000~D8511
400 points 112 points 512 points
※1 for ※2 for ※4 for special
general use keeping use
※1 Non-keeping field for power failure Parameters are used to set and change the keeping field
for the keeping field for power failure.
※2 Keeping field for power failure Parameters can be used to set and non-keeping field for power
failure.
※3 Fixing range for keeping in case of power failure, and the keeping range can not be changed.
※4 Refer to list of special elements.

Structure and function of register

Data register is the device element for storing data and the type is expressed as follows. These
register is 16-bit (positive and negative mark for the maximum digit bit). Combine the two data
register to store 32-bit data (positive and negative mark for the maximum digit bit).

16-bit (D)
One data register (16-bit digit range) -32,768~+32,767

Positive 16-bit Lower

number position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1

*1
Mark
0：Positive number
1：Negative number

Readout and writing-in of data register employ application command. In addition, direct
readout/writing-in can be executed from the unit (monitor) and programming equipment.

23
2． Functions of device Data register D

32-bit (D)
Two adjacent data registers is used to express 32-bit data (the high digit bit is a big number and the
low digit bit is a small number, in Index register, V is a high digit and Z is low digit).
Therefore, we can process data of -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.

Upper 32位 Lower

position position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b0
*1
1,073,741,824
536,870,912

16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
268,435,456
134,217,728

8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216

65,536
32,768
Mark
0：Positive
number
1：Negative
number

When 32-bit is specified, if the following digit bit (such as D0) is specified, the number after the
high digit bit (such as D1) will be occupied automatically. The low digit bit can be specified any
device element of odd or even. Considering monitoring of PC/PDA link, the following even
device element number is recommended.
For general use/keeping for power supply
Once data is written into the data register, if other data will not be written, it will not change.
However, in case of RUN→STOP or power failure, all the data will be cleared. If special auxiliary
relay M8033 is driven, it can keep. Therefore, the data register for keeping for power failure can
keep the content in case of RUN/STOP and power failure.
PC/PDA link parameter setting can be used to change distribution of PLC for general use and
keeping for power failure, except for special device element.
When the special data memory for keeping for power failure is used for general use, please apply
RST or ZRST commands to clear it content when starting.
When inter-PC simple link or parallel connection link is used, some data register is occupied by
link.
Refer to document register D on usage of document register.
Special purpose
Data register for special purpose refers to writing in data for special purpose or writing special
data into the data register in advance. When the power supply connected, it is set at the initial
value and becomes 0 after [Link] is used to write.
For instance, in D8000, time of monitoring timer is initially set by the system ROM. If it is to be
changed, the transmission command F12 MOV is used to write in target time in D8000.

Refer to additional instructions for program memory and parameter structure for special data
register for keeping for power failure.
Refer to additional instructions for basic functions on relevant description of data register type and
function.

24
2． Functions of device Data register D

Case of action
Digit and data of data register can be used for control. Take basic command and application
command for example, the data register can be used as expected. Refer to the following
application commands.
<Data register for basic commands >
‹ Specified setting value of timer and counter
D0 Timer/counter acts as per specified data register.
T2 <Data register of application command> Such as F12(MOV)
action case of command
D20 ‹ Change current value of counter
C20
F12 MOV D5 C2

‹ Read current value of timer/counter into the data register.

F12 MOV C10 D4

Current value of counter (C10) is sent to D4.

‹ Memorize the data in the data register.

F12 MOV K8000 D10(D11)

‹ Store data in the data register.

Send 200 to D10 (Decimal system)
16位 Send 80,000 to D10 (D11) (Decimal
F12 MOV K200 D10
system).
Values exceeding 32,767 are 32-bit
32位 F12 DMOV K80000 D10(D11) values, therefore, double (D) command
is used. If low digit, bit (D10), the high
digit bit (D11) is occupied.
‹ Send content of data register to other data registers.

F12 MOV D10 D20

Send content of D10 to D20.

<Unused timer and counter are regarded as data register > Take command F12(MOV) as example.
M8002
Send 300 to T10 (decimal system)
F12 MOV K300 T10

Send T10 to current value register of C20. At this time,

F12 MOV T10 C20 T10 does not work as a timer but as data register.
K300 When 32-bit is used, 2 16-bit data registers (such as C0
C20 and C1) are used to express and 1 32-bit counter (such
as C200 and etc.) is used to express.

25
2． Functions of device Data register D

9.2 Supplementary register W

Number of data register
Number of data register W is expressed as follows: (numbers are distributed according to decimal
system):
TP03M/H 40/60 machine type:
Supplementary register W W0~W9999 10000points ※1
※1 In case of RUN→STOP or power failure, all the data of Supplementary register W are
[Link] the register W are used for general use.

Structure and function of register

Supplementary register is the device element for storing data and the type is expressed as follows.
These register is 16-bit (positive and negative mark for the maximum digit bit). Combine the two
data register to store 32-bit data (positive and negative mark for the maximum digit bit).

16-bit (W)
One data register (16-bit digit range) -32,768~+32,767

Positive 16-bit Lower

number position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15
16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
*1 1
Mark
0：Positive number
1：Negative number

Readout and writing-in of data register employ application command. In addition, direct
readout/writing-in can be executed from the unit (monitor) and programming equipment.

32-bit (W)
Two adjacent data registers is used to express 32-bit data (the high digit bit is a big number and the
low digit bit is a small number, in Index register, V is a high digit and Z is low digit).
Therefore, we can process data of -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.

Upper 32位 Lower

position position
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b0
*1
1,073,741,824
536,870,912

16,384
8,192
4,096
2,048
1,024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
268,435,456
134,217,728

8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216

1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65,536
32,768

Mark
0：Positive
number
1：Negative
number

When 32-bit is specified, if the following digit bit (such as W0) is specified, the number after the
high digit bit (such as W1) will be occupied automatically. The low digit bit can be specified any
device element of odd or even. Considering monitoring of PC/PDA link, the following even
device element number is recommended.

26
2． Functions of device Data register D

9.3 Index register V，Z

Function and structure
Like common data register, the Index register V and Z is 16-bit data register for readout and
writing-in data. There are 32 registers V0~V15 and Z0~Z15.
Besides the same using methods, such register can be used with other device element number or
values in application command, and change device element number or value, so it is a special
register.

In addition, pay attention that LD, AND, OUT and other basic sequence control command of PLC,
or device element number of step echelon command and Index register may be used together.

16 bit 16bit 16bit The two kinds of Index register have the same
V Z structure with the above data registers.
V0~V15： 8point Z0~Z15： 8point

32 bit

32 bit
When device element of 32-bit application
V0(Upper position)Z0(Lower position) command or values over 16 bits are process,
Z0-Z15 must be used. See the combination
V1(Upper position)Z1(Lower position) of V and Z in the left figure. TP03 PLC
takes Z as low digit bit of 32-bit digit.
Therefore, even the high digit V0-V15 is
V2(Upper position)Z2(Lower position)
specified, address-change can not be
realized. In addition, if it is specified as
V3(Upper position)Z3(Lower position) 32-bit digit, for V (high digit) and Z (low
digit) are referred simultaneously, if V is at
high digit, and other rest digit may lead to
error. Even 32-bit application command
does not exceed 16-bit digit, for writing-in
of Z, see the left figure. For DMOV and
other 32-buit command, re-write 32-bit
V14(Upper position) Z14(Lower position) Index register for V (high) and Z (low).

V15(Upper position) Z15(Lower position)

Case of 32-bit search register writing:

D MOV K300 Z2
K300—(V2,Z2)

27
2． Functions of device Data register D

Address-change of device element

For device element which may lead to address change, the content is described below:
Device element and value of decimal system: M, S, T, C, D, KnM, KnS, P, K.
For instance, V0=K5, when D20V0 is executed, the executed device element number is D2
(D20+5). In addition, the constant can be changed. For example, when K30V0 is specified, the
executed element is the value K32(K30+5) of decimal system.
Device element of octonary system: X, Y, KnX, KnY.
For instance, Z1=K8, when X0Z1 is executed, the executed device element number is X10
(X0+8 plus of octonary system). As for device element address change of octonary system,
content of V and Z are converted into octonary system digits, then plus computation is executed.
Therefore, assume Z1=K10, X0Z1 is specified as X12, please not that this number is not X10.
Value of hexadecimal system: H
For instance, V5=K30 and specify H30, it is regarded as H4E (30H+K30). Besides, specify
H30V5 with V5=H30, it is regarded as H60 (30H+30H).

Case of address change and attentions

Concerning address change of value of application commands and attentions, please refer to
address change of value of Index register.

28
2． Functions of device Pointer P and I

10 Number and function P/I of pointer

Pointer number
Pointer [P] and [I] are expressed as follows (distributed according to decimal system). When
pointer for input interruption is used, the interrupted input code is distributed, which can not be
used for high-speed counting and pulse wave density F56.

TP03M/H machine type

For For interruption input For time For counting
branching interruption interruption
P0~P255 Input Rising edge Falling edge I6□□ I010 I040
256 X000 I001 I000 I7□□ I020 I050
points X001 I101 I100 I8□□ I030 I060
X002 I201 I200 3 points 6 points
X003 I301 I300
X004 I401 I400
X005 I501 I500
6 points

TP03SR machine type

For For interruption input For time For counting
branching interruption interruption
P0~P127 Input Rising edge Falling edge I6□□ I010 I040
128 X000 I001 I000 I7□□ I020 I050
points X001 I101 I100 I8□□ I030 I060
X002 I201 I200 3 points 6 points
X003 I301 I300
4 points

Case of function and action

Function and action of finger for branching pointer and interruption are stated below:
Almost all the fingers and application commands can be used together. Therefore, refer to the
instruction manual for operation and instruction. Function and action of finger for branching
pointer and interruption are stated below:

29
2． Functions of device Pointer P and I

For branching
1 F00 (CJ)Conditional jumping 2 F01 (CALL)Accessing sub-program

X000

Main program
CALL P10
X000
CJ P1 Jumping

FEND

Jumping

Routine sub-program
Mark
Mark P1 P 10

Return
When X001 is ON, F00 (CJ) is jumped to SRET
specified position and execute the program
END

For interruption
There are 3 types of pointer for interruption, application command FNC03 (IRET) for interruption
return, FNC04(EI) interruption allowable and FNC05(DI) interruption forbidden.
1. For input interruption: specified input number is not affected by PLC scanning cycle. When
reading the signal, sub-program is interrupted. When input is interrupted, signal less than the
scanning time can be read. During control of PLC, short time pulse wave signal can be
processed in priority.
2. For time interruption: the specified interrupted time cycle (10ms-99ms), interrupt the
sub-program and interruption processing program for fixed time outside PLC scanning time.
3. For counting interruption: compare the results from high-speed counter in PLC to interrupt
sub-program, and prior control is realized by counting of high-speed counter.

30
 Table of
3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions
Contents

Chapter III Interpretation of Basic Sequential control Sequence...................................................1

1 List of basic instructions ........................................................................................................1
2 Interpretation of [LD]/ [LDI]/ [OUT]/[OUT I] ......................................................................3
3 Instructions AND, ANI...........................................................................................................4
4 Instructions OR，ORI ...........................................................................................................5
5 Instructions LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF.....................................................................6
6 Instruction ORB .....................................................................................................................8
7 Instruction ANB .....................................................................................................................9
8 Instructions MPS,MRD and MPP ........................................................................................10
9 Instructions MC and MCR ...................................................................................................14
10 Instruction INV ..................................................................................................................15
11 Instructions PLS and PLF ..................................................................................................16
12 Instructions SET and RST..................................................................................................17
13 Instructions of output reset of counter (OUT, RST)...........................................................18
14 Instructions NOP and END ................................................................................................20
15 Instructions SMCS and SMCR ..........................................................................................21
16 Instructions JCS and JCR...................................................................................................22
17 Attentions for programming...............................................................................................24
17.1 Step and executive sequence of program ................................................................24
17.2 Action and countermeasures for double-coil of double output................................25
17.3 Loop and countermeasures for unavailable programming ......................................26

0
 List of basic
3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions
instructions

Chapter III Interpretation of Basic

Sequential control Sequence
1 List of basic instructions
List of basic instructions
Symbol Function Circuit form Step
XYMSTC
[LD] Normally open contact for computation starting 1
XYMSTC
[LDI] Normally closed contract for computation starting 1
XYMSTC
[AND] Series connection normally open contact 1
XYMSTC
[ANI] Series connection normally closed contact 1

[OR] Parallel connection normally open contact XYMSTC 1

[ORI] Parallel connection normally closed contact XYMSTC 1

XYMSTC
[LDP] Computation starting of rising edge 2
XYMSTC
[LDF] Computation starting of falling edge 2
XYMSTC
[ANDP] Rising edge checks series connection 2
XYMSTC
[ANDF] Falling edge checks series connection 2

[ORP] Pulse rising edge checks parallel connection XYMSTC 2

[ORF] Pulse falling edge checks parallel connection XYMSTC 2

X001 X002 Y001

[ANB] Parallel connection loop in series connection X003 X004

1

X001 X002 Y001

[ORB] Series connection loop in parallel connection X003 X004

1

1
 List of basic
3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions
instructions

[MPS] Computation and storage 1

[MRD] Storage readout MPS
1
MRD

[MPP] Storage readout and reclosing MPP

1

X001 INV Y001

[INV] Reverse 1

X001
[MC] Master control MC N YM 3

X001
[MCR] Reclosing of master control MCR N 2

[NOP] No action
[END] Programming scanning completes
[STL] Programming of step ladder style chart 1
Completion of programming of step ladder
[RET] RET 1
style chart
X001
[PLS] Rising edge energizes coil PLS YM 1

X001
[PLF] Falling edge energizes coil PLF YM 1

[P] Mark ——
[I] Interruption mark ——
Y&M:1
S&
specialM
XYMSTC
:2
[OUT] Coil T:3
C:3(32bits)
,
5(16bits
)
X001
Y,M:1
[SET] Setting coil SET YMS S,special
M:2
X001
T,C:2
[RST] Reclosing coil RST YMS D&V&Z&
special D:3
[SMCS] Starting of loop branching SMCS 1
Completing of loop
[SMCR] SMCR 1
branching
Starting of jumping
[JCS] JCS 1
branching
Completing
[JCR] JCR 1
of jumping branching

2
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions LD，LDI，OUT

2 Interpretation of [LD]/ [LDI]/ [OUT]/[OUT I]

[LD]/ [LDI]/ [OUT]/[OUT I]

Interpretation of instructions
(1)[LD] Normally open contact and bus bar connection instruction, for X, Y, M, T, C and S.
(2)[LDI] Normally closed contact and bus wiring connection, for X, Y, M, T, C and S.
(3)[OUT] Coil drive instruction, for drive one specified coil with result of logic computation.
For instance, output contact, auxiliary relay, step point, output coil of timer/counter, which can
not be used for input coil X, only for Y, M, T, C and S.
(4)[OUT I] coil drive instruction is used for LDI of drive instruction [OUT], only for Y, M.

Programming case
X001 Y001
LD X001
OUT Y001
X001 Y002
LDI X001
OUTI Y002

Output of timer/counter
When instruction OUT is used for the timer and counter, the constants K and H are used to specify
pre-setting vales and data memory can be used to specify pre-setting values of D, T, and C
indirectly.
See the following table on setting ranges of time constant K and setting values of corresponding
time:

Counter of timer Setting range of value K Actual setting values Number of steps
1ms 1~32,767 0.001~32.676S 3
10ms 1~32,767 0.01~327.67S 3
100ms 0.1~3,276.7S
16-bit counter 1~32,767 The same as left 3
32-bit counter -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 The same as left 5

3
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions AND，ANI

3 Instructions AND, ANI

Instructions [AND]/[ANI]
Interpretation of instructions:
AND Normally open contact series instruction, for X, Y, M, T, C and S.
ANI Normally closed contact series connection instruction, for X, Y, M, T, C and S.
1) AND and ANI instructions are used for series connection of single contact, no restriction on
quantity of series connection joint and using times.
2) [AND]/[ANI] instruction is used for series connection of single contact. If circuit block with
two or more contacts in parallel connection is to be series connection, instruction ANB is used.
Instruction ANB is the series connection instruction for parallel connection circuit block,
without device followed.

Programming case

X001 X005 C022

LD X001
OR C022
C022 AND X005
OUT C022
C023
X004 X003 LD X004
ORI C023
C023 ANI X023
OUT C023

Relation of MPS and MPP

If the ladder logic procedure is the following diagram, instructions MPS and MPP will be used.

Y003 X003 T1
Y004

M010

4
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions OR，ORI

4 Instructions OR，ORI
[OR]/[ORI]
Interpretation of instructions
[OR ] is normally open contacts in parallel connection, for X, Y, M, T, C and S.
[ORI] is normally closed contacts in series connection, for X, Y, M, T,C and S.
When control circuits of the ladder logic is comprised of several contacts in parallel connection,
instructions OR and ORI will be used.
1) Instruction [OR]/[ORI] is used with said instruction [LD]/ [LDI] in parallel connection, no
restriction on using times.
2) Instruction [OR]/[ORI] is only used for parallel connection of single contact. If circuit block
with two or more contacts in series connection is to be parallel connection, instruction ORB is
used. Instruction ORB is the parallel connection instruction for series connection circuit block,
without device followed.
Parallel connection instruction of series connection circuit block ORB
ORB: make two or more series connection circuit blocks in parallel connection.
For circuit block with two or more contacts in series connection, when the series connection
circuit block is to be parallel connection, instructions LD and LDI are used for starting end of the
branch and instruction ORB is used for finishing end of the branch.
Programming
X001 Y001
LD X001
X002 ORI X002
OR M001
OUT Y001
M001 LDI Y001
AND X003
Y001 X003 X004 M002 OR M002
ANI X004
OR M003
M002
OUT M002

M003

Series connection instruction for parallel connection circuit block ANB

ANB: the instruction for connecting starting end of the parallel connection circuit block to the said
circuit in series connection;
Circuit with two or more contacts in parallel connection is called parallel connection circuit block,
and instruction ANB is used for connecting parallel connection circuit block in series connection.
LD ANB LD

OR OR

OR

OR

5
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF

5 Instructions LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF
Instructions
[LDP]/ [LDF]/ [ANDP]/ [ANDF]/ [ORP]/ [ORF]

Interpretation of instructions
The instructions [LDP]/ [ANDP]/ [ORP] refer to the device operated by the instructions can
connect one scanning cycle when triggering (OFF→ON) on the rising edge.
The instructions [LDF]/ [ANDF]/ [ORF] refer to the device operated by the instructions can be
active one scanning cycle when triggering (ON→OFF) on the falling edge.

Programming

X001 M000
LDP X001
X002 ORP X002
OUT M000
M1
X003 X004 LDP X003
ANDP X004
OUT M1

X001 M000

LDF X001
X002 ORF X002
M1 OUT M000
X003 X004 LDF X003
ANDF X004
OUT M1

In the above chart, when X001-X004 is switched from ON-OFF or OFF-ON, M0 or M1 is only
connected to one scanning cycle.

6
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF

Interpretation of actual drive of output coil:

z The following circuits have the same drive effects:

OUT instruction and pulse instruction

X010 X010
M6 PLS M6

X010
Scanning
M6 cycle

In two circumstances, when X010 is switched from OFF-ON, M6 is only connected to one
scanning cycle.
Pulse executing form of rising edge detecting and applied instruction

X020
M OV K10 D0

X020
M OV P K10 D0

When X020 is changed from OFF-ON, data is D0 is transmitted for one time, and the two
procedures have the same drive effect.
When previous condition logic results of the instruction MOV are ON, the data is transmitted
continuously; when the logic results are OFF, the data transmission is stopped.
When previous condition logic results of the instruction MOVP is switched from OFF to ON, the
data is transmitted, and such switches are in correspondence with times of data transmission.

7
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions ORB

6 Instruction ORB
Instruction [ORB]
Instruction interpretation
ORB: the instruction for parallel connection for two or more series connection circuits.
The circuit with more than two series connection contacts is called series connection circuit block.
When parallel connection is used for series connection block, the instruction LD/LDI is used at the
beginning of the branch and the instruction ORB is used at the ending of the branch.
1) [ORB] and [ANB] the same, it is a single instruction without device, without any device
number followed.
2) In multi-parallel connection circuit, if each series connection circuit uses the instruction ORB,
times of parallel connection is not restricted. The instruction ORB can be used continuously. At
this time, times of repeated use of the instruction LD/LDI on one bus bar shall be less than 8
times.

Programming
LD X001
X001 X002 Y001 AND X002
LD X003
X003 X004 AND X004
ORB
X005 X006
LD X005
AND X006
ORB
OUT Y006

8
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions ANB

7 Instruction ANB
Instruction [ANB]
Instruction interpretation
ANB: the instruction for starting end of the parallel connection circuit block with previous circuit
in series connection:
1) The circuit with more than two parallel connection contacts is called parallel connection block.
The instruction ANB is required for series connection of parallel connection block; when it is
connected to the previous circuit in series connection, the instructions LD and LDI can be
used as starting end of the branch circuit, after finishing parallel circuit block of the branching
circuit, the instruction ANB can be used for finishing series connection of the two circuits.
2) The instruction ANB does not follow any device, without any device number followed.
When several circuits are in parallel connection, if each parallel connection block employs the
instruction ANB for sequential series connection, quantity of parallel connection circuit is not
restricted. The instruction ANB can be used collectively, but on the same bus bar, repeated use
of the instructions LD and LDI must be less than 8 times.

Programming

X001 X002 X003 Y001

LD X001
OR X004
X004 X005 X006
LD X002
AND X003
X007
LD X005
X010 AND X006
ORB
OR X007
ANB
OR X010
OUT Y001

9
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions MPS,MRD,MPP

8 Instructions MPS,MRD and MPP

Instructions [MPS]/ [MRD]/ [MPP]
Instruction interpretation
(1) MPS (PUSH): push instruction.
(2) MRD (READ): read instruction.
(3) MPP (POP): pop instruction.
The group of the instructions can execute push protection for state of the contacts, when state of
the contacts is required, the instruction pop is executed to ensure correction wiring with following
circuit.
1) In the PLC, there are 8 memories for middle computation results, which are equal to stacking in
microcomputer. One section of stacking is required according to the principle of first in and first
out.
MPP MPS
2) When the instruction MPS is used one time,
computation results of the time will be positioned to the first MRD
stacking unit (called stacking top) of the stacking bottom. When
MPS is used a second time, the computation results will
be positioned to bottom top, and the former data will be
positioned to the next stacking unit.
3) When the instruction MPP is used, the data is transmitted
to the previous stacking. After it is sprang out, the data disappears
from the stacking. Stacking
4) MRD is the special instruction for reading of stacking top, and
data in the stacking will not be transmitted to the next or previous stacking.
5) Instructions MPS, MRD and MPP are without device
numbers.
6) MPS and MPP shall be used in couple, and repeated
Continuous use shall be less than 8 times.

Programming
Y001 LD X001
X001 X002
MPS
X003 Y002 AND X002
OUT Y001
X004 Y003 MRD
AND X003
Y004 OUT Y002
MRD
AND X004
OUT Y003
MPP
OUT Y004
END

10
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions MPS,MRD,MPP

Case of programming:
One section of stacking

X000 X001 X002

Y000 0 LD X000
1 AND X001
2 MPS
Y001 3 AND X002
4 OUT Y000
X003 X004 5 MPP
Y002 6 OUT Y001
7 LD X003
X005 8 MPS
Y003 9 AND X004
10 OUT Y002
X006 X007 11 MPP 19 AND X010
Y004 12 AND X005 20 OUT Y005
13 OUT Y003 21 MRD
X010 14 LD X006 22 AND X011
Y005 15 MPS 23 OUT Y006
16 AND X007 24 MPP
X011 17 OUT Y004 25 AND X012
Y006 18 MRD 26 OUT Y007

X012
Y007

One section of stacking, both applied of instructions ANB and ORB

11
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions MPS,MRD,MPP

X000 X001
Y000 0 LD X000
1 MPS
X002 2 LD X001
3 OR X002
4 ANB
X003 X004 5 OUT Y000
Y001 6 MRD 12 ANB
7LD X003 13 OUT Y001
X005 X006 8 AND X004 14 MPP
9 LD X005 15 AND X007
10 AND X006 16 OUT Y002
X007 11 ORB 17 LD X010
Y002 18 OR X011
19 ANB
X010
20 OUT Y003
Y003
X011

Two sections of stacking

X000 X001 X002

Y000 0 LD X000
1 MPS 8 OUT Y001
X003 2 AND X001 9 MPP
Y001 3 MPS 10 AND X004
4 AND X002 11 MPS
X004 X005 5 OUT Y000 12 AND X005
Y002 6 MPP 13 OUT Y002
7 AND X003 14 MPP
X006 15 AND X006
Y003 16 OUT Y003

Four sections of stacking

12
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions MPS,MRD,MPP

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004

Y000
0 LD X000
8 AND X004
1 MPS
9 OUT Y000
Y001 2 AND X001
10 MPP
3 MPS
11 OUT Y001
4 AND X002
12 MPP
Y002 5 MPS
13 OUT Y002
6 AND x003
14MPP
7MPS
15 OUT Y003
Y003
16 MPP
17 OUT Y004
Y004

X000
Y004
LD X000
X001
OUT Y004
Y003
AND X001
OUT Y003
X002
AND X002
Y002
OUT Y002
AND X003
X003
OUT Y001
Y001
AND X004
OUT Y000
X004
Y000

The above loop needs tri-MPS instruction programming.

However, if the following loop is used, the instruction MPS may not be used and it is to program.

13
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions MC,MCR

9 Instructions MC and MCR

Instructions [MC]/ [MCR]

(1) MC (Master control): connection instruction for public series connection contacts (new bus bar
for public series connection contacts).
(2) MCR (Master control reset): reset instruction of MC instruction.
The two instructions are set at the starting point and ending point of the master control circuit
block.

Instruction interpretation
1) In the chart below, when the input X001 is active, instructions between MC and MCR are
executed; when X01 is inactive, devices between instructions MC and MCR are the following
state: accumulative timer, counter and device driven by the instruction SET/RST keep current
state; if non-accumulative timer and device driven by the instruction OUT, it shall be inactive.
2) After executing the instruction MC, the bus bar (LD and LDI) is transferred to MC contact. If it
returns to original bus bar, the return instruction MCR is used. The instruction MC/MCR must
be used in couple.
When using different device numbers Y and M, the instruction MC can be used repeatedly. If
the same device number is used, like the instruction OUT, double coil output will occur.
3) The instruction MC can be used in nested way, namely, the instruction MC can be used the
instruction MC. Number of the nested level is from small to big. When the instruction MCR is
returned level by level, the number of nested level is from big to small.

Programming

X001
MC N0 M1 LD X001
MC N0 M1
X002 LD X002
Y001 OUT Y001
LD X003
X003
Y002 OUT Y002
MRC N0
MRC N0

If the instruction MC is used in the instruction MC, number of the master control point shall be
from small to big.
(N0→N1→N2→N3→N4→N5→N6→N7).When returning, the instruction MCR is released from
big to small .(N7→N6→N5→N4→N3→N2→N1→N0)
the biggest number of nested level is 8 (N7)

14
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions INC

10 Instruction INV

Instruction [INV]
The INV instruction is expressed with one short diagonal with an inclination angle of 45 degrees.
The instruction INV is required before the computation results.
Instruction interpretation
The instruction INV has no device, without specified device number, and actions in the program
are described below:
Computation Computation results
results before after executing the
executing the instruction INV
instruction INV
OFF→ ON
ON→ OFF

Programming

ON

OFF OFF
X001
ON ON
Y001
OFF

See the above chart, when the input relay X001 is inactive, the output coil Y001 is active. When
X001 is active, Y001 is inactive. The instruction INV can be written at the same positions for
inputting AND, ANI, ANDP and ANDF. The instruction INV can not be connected to bus bar like
LD, LDI, LDP and LDF, and can not be used singly like OR, ORI, ORP and ORF.

15
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions PLS,PLF

11 Instructions PLS and PLF

Instructions [PLS]/ [PLF]

(1) PLS: differential output instruction, valid for rising edge;
(2) PLF: differential output instruction, valid for falling edge.
The two instructions are used for pulse output of goal objects. In case of input signal jumping, a
pulse with width of one scanning cycle is generated.
Instruction interpretation
When the instruction [PLS] is used, the drive input point is ON and the driven assembly has one
scanning cycle.
When the instruction [PLF] is used, the drive input point is OFF and the driven assemblies Y and
M have one scanning cycle.
For instance, the input points X000 and X001 are active according to the following chart. When
PLC is operated as per operation→ stop→ operation, it is known from logic relation of time
sequence of analyzing program, when X000 is connected to the rising edge, M0 coil keeps
powered and holds one scanning cycle, closing of M0 normally opened makes Y001 powered and
reset 1; when X001 is connected to falling edge, M1coil is powered and holds one scanning cycle.
Closing of M1 normally opened makes Y001 reset 0.

Programming

X000
LD X000
PLS M0
PLS M0
M0
SET Y001
LD M0
SET Y001
X001
PLF M1
LD X001
PLF M1
M1
RST Y001 LD M1
RST Y001

X000

X001
Scanning
M0 cycle
Scanning
M1 cycle

Y001

16
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions NOP,END

12 Instructions SET and RST

Instructions [SET]/[RST]
(1)SET (Set): Set instruction to keep the coil powered.
(2)RST (Reset): Reset instruction to keep the coil de-powered.
The instructions SET and RST used in applied program can set mark and clear mark for any state
or time at any place for customers’ program.
Indication interpretation
1) The instructions SET and RST have the function of self-holding. In the following procedure,
when X001 is active, even if it is inactive, Y001 keeps active, once X002 is active, even if it is
inactive, Y0001 keeps active.
2) There is no restriction on use of the instructions SET and RST, other programs can be inserted
into SET and RST, which is only effective when executing the last one.
3) In addition to Y, M and S for the instructions SET and RST, there are T, C and D, namely,
clearing operation can be executed for data register D and index register and the timer T and
counter C can be reset to clear the time and counting value.

Programming
X001
SET Y001
X002
RST Y001
X003 LD X001
SET M1 SET Y001
LD X002
X004 RST Y001
RST M1 LD X003
X005 SET M1
SET S1 LD X004
RST M1
X006 LD X005
RST S1 SET S1
LD X006
X007
RST D1 RST S1
LD X007
X001 RST D1
T247 LD X001
K10 OUT T247 K10
X007 LD X007
RST T247 RST T247

X001
X002
Y001

17
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions NOP,END

13 Instructions of output reset of counter (OUT,

RST)
Programming

X010
RST C0
X011 K10
C0
C0
Y000

Interpretation of logic relation of the above program:

1) When the input point X011 from OFF—ON, the counter C0 starts increasing counting. When
the counting value reaches setting value K10, the output contacts C0 acts and the output coil
Y000 is active; when X011 is from OFF—ON, current value of the counter remains the same
and the output coil Y000 is still active;
2) After the instruction OUT C, the constant K for counting is specified or the data memory is
used for specifying indirectly. Only another input X010 is on, the counter C0 will be reset to 0
and the output contact Y000 returns.
Hi-speed counter programming

X010
M△△△
X010
RST C△△△
X011 K10
C△△△
C△△△
Y002

z When single-phase and single input counter of C235-C245 is used, special auxiliary relay
M8235-M8245 shall be used for specifying the direction of counting. When X010 is ON, it
is decreasing counting; when X010 is OFF, it is increasing counting.
z When X010 is ON, output contact of the counter C returns and current value of the
counter returns to 0.
z If counter (C241 and C242) with the function of reset is used in the program, when the
corresponding reset input is ON, the same effect with the above instruction can achieve
through interruption and program is unnecessary for it.
z When X011 is ON, counting shall be executed for the counting input ON/Off of X000-X005
determined by number of the counter. With the counter (C244 and C245) with starting input,
if the corresponding starting input point is not ON, counting can not be executed.

18
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions NOP,END

z Current value of the counter is increasing, when it reaches the setting value (constant K or
content D), the output contact is SET; if it is lower than current value, it is RST.

19
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions NOP,END

14 Instructions NOP and END

Instructions [NOP]/ [END]

(1) NOP: No op instruction (or for deleting one instruction);
(2) END: program ending.
During debugging of the program, if the instructions NOP and END are appropriately used, it will
bring convenience to users.
Instruction interpretation
1) NOP is a no op instruction, and CPU will not execute the objective instruction. The instruction
NOP shares one step sequence in the program, there is no corresponding device to express in
the ladder-shaped chart, however, it can be reflected in the step sequence in the ladder-shaped
chart.
2) After clearing all the executing instruction programs, all the instructions will be changed to
NOP.
3) The program NOP can be inserted for minimizing times of change of step number when
modifying or adding instructions.

As for finished program, when the instruction NOP is inserted, the program will not change.
Please pay attention to it.

AND——NOP ANI——NOP

OUT——NOP

OR——NOP

ORI——NOP

4) The instruction END is used for ending of the program, without objective device. Power failure
can be set by the instruction END in the program. The instruction END can be inserted by section,
then debug section by section, after debugging, delete the instruction END.

20
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions SMCS, SMCR

15 Instructions SMCS and SMCR

Instructions [SMCS] and [SMCR]
(1) [SMCS]: it is equal to one conditional bus bar, when the condition before the instruction
is ON, the conditional bus bar is active.
(2) [SMCR]: the conditional bus bar returns.
In the program SMCS and SMCR, the conditional bus bar must be used in couple. In the program,
the instruction SMCS can be used for many times continuously or discontinuously, which is
mainly used for the positions which require several occurrences in the circuit and it can be
simplified.
For example:

X001
SMCS

X002 X001 X002

Y015 Y015

X003 X001 X003

Y016 Y016

X004 X001 X004

Y017 Y017

SMCR

Instruction SMCS in the program can be used for many times, see the chart below. After it is used
for one time, one condition for auxiliary bus bar is added. After the instruction SMCS has been
used for many times, only one SMCR instruction can clear all the conditions.

X001
SMCS

X002 X001 X002

Y015 Y015

X010 X001 X010 X003

SMCS Y016

X003 X001 X010 X004

Y016 Y017

X004
Y017

SMCR

Each instruction after SMCS and before SMCR can execute computation with the condition before
SMCS.
When the common circuit is pretty complicated or reoccurs several times, such instruction can
simplify the program.
Note: OUT, TMR, CNT and applied instructions can not be after the instruction SMCS directly.

21
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions JCS,JCR

16 Instructions JCS and JCR

Instructions [JCS]，[JCR]
(1) [JCS] Jumping branching starting
(2) [JCR] Jumping branching returning
All the instructions after JCS and before JCR will not be executed, namely, during JCS conditional
input is ON, content of the memory will remain the same. The instruction END is not allowed
between JCS and JCR, otherwise, the program will be error and the EER instruction light is ON.
X001
JCS

X002
Y001

X003 K50
T250

X004
RST T250

JCR

X001

X002

Y001

X003
2s 3s
X004

T250

Note1: Pay special attention to timing signal of the timer, and relative time relation of input
signals of counter (switch from OFF→ON) and applied instruction and JCS ON/OFF state.

JCS state A B C

Input signal ① ② ③ ④

on on off on
‹ When X002 is at OFF→ON of ①, Y001 will act, for state of JCS is OFF.
‹ When X002 is at OFF→ON of ②, Y001will not act, for state of JCS is ON.
‹ OFF→ON in ③ will not act, for state of JCS is ON.
‹ State of [JCS] will be switched into OFF when X002 is at ③ON, Y001 will not act; for in
state (A) of JCS, Y001 will be switched from OFF to ON with input signal. When JCS is ON,
it will not be affected by state change of ON→OFF or OFF→ON; for JCS is off (state B), it
will be switched from OFF→ON, and Y001is switched from ON→OFF.

22
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions JCS,JCR

‹ When input signal in ④ is from OFF→ON, Y001 is still OFF and will not act. For state of
JCS is ON.
‹ State of [JCS] is OFF when ④ is ON, Y001 acts.
Note 2: when state of [JCS] is ON, instructions effecting positions between JCS and JCR will not
be executed.
Note 3: the instruction between JCS and JCR will be executed certainly, which is not affected by
state ON or OFF of JCS.
At this time, execution of the program will be suspended and the next scanning cycle is entered.
Note 4: instructions between JCS and JCR can be inserted between SMCS and SMCR.
X000
SMCS

X001
JCS

X002
Y001

X003 K50
T250

X004
RST T250

JCR

SMCR

X000

X001

X002

Y001

X003
2s 1s 2s
X004

T250

Note 6: another JCS is inserted between JCS and JCR, and only one JCR can be used as state
ending.

23
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions Attentions

17 Attentions for programming

17.1 Step and executive sequence of program

1) Ladder in the ladder-shaped chart starts from the left bus bar and ends in the right bus bar.
Each row at the left side is the combination of contacts, which represents the conditions for
driving logic coil, and the logic coil representing the results can only located at the right bus
bar. The contacts can not be at the right side of the coil.
2) The contacts shall be drawn on the horizontal line, not the vertical line.
3) When series connection and parallel connection are employed, branch with more contact shall
be located at the left side of the ladder-shaped chart; when parallel connection is for blocks in
series connection, the parallel connection branch with more contacts shall be located above
the ladder-shaped charter.
4) Double-coil output is not recommended.
Structure and step consequence of contacts
As for circuit of the same program, according to forming mode of the contacts, the program can be
simplified and saved in capacity.

① LD ②LD ⑤ OUT ① LD ③AND ④ OUT

④ ANB ③OR ② OR

Without ANB

① LD ⑤ OUT ① LD ②AND ④ OUT

② LD ③AND ③LD
④ ORB
Without ORB

Executing sequence of program

The program is processed from up to down and from left to right. Flow of the program instruction
is executed according to the following block diagrams.

① ⑤

③ ⑦
② ⑨ ⑩
⑥

④ ⑧

24
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions Attentions

17.2 Action and countermeasures for double-coil of double output

If double output (double-coil) is used in sequential control program, the later action shall execute
in priority.
Input processing
X001=ON X002=OFF
See the chart at the left side, pay attention to use of the same coil
X001 Initial
Y003 Y003 in several positions.
For instance, when 001=ON and X002=OFF,
Y003
Y004
Y004 At the beginning Y003, for X001 is active, the RAM is ON and the
the second time
X002 output Y004 is active.
Y003
Y003 is inactive for a second time by X002, and the RAM is OFF.
Therefore, actual external output is Y003= OFF and Y004=ON.
Output processing
Y003=OFF Y004=ON

Countermeasures for double output

The double output does not disobey the rule in program, but the actions are very complicated,
therefore, the following program is recommended.

A B A B
Y000 Y000
C E
ignorable ignorable
D
C E
Y000
D

A B
or
M100
C E
M101
D

M100 E
Y000
M101

Skipping instruction and step ladder style instruction can be used and the above program is
switched to the same output. When the step ladder style instruction is used, in the master program
and state program, use of double output and the same output shall be paid attention to.

25
 3 Interpretation of basic sequential control instructions Attentions

17.3 Loop and countermeasures for unavailable programming

Bridge circuit
See the chart below: change direction of flow of the bi-directional loop (parallel connection for
loops without D and B).
C E B
A B F
F A

E A E D

C
C D

Connecting position of the coil

z Do not write contact at the right side of the coil.
z Coil among contacts shall be programmed first.

A
A B D F
C

B D
E F

26
 Table of
4 Instruction instructions of step ladder style programming chart Contents

Chapter IV Instructions of step ladder style programming chart....................................................1

1 Step instructions STL, RET ...................................................................................................3
2 Action and SFC representation of step ladder style programming chart................................6
3 Features of SFC......................................................................................................................8
4 Prepared knowledge for programming SFC flow ................................................................10
5 Form of SFC flow ................................................................................................................14
5.1 Skipping and repeating flows....................................................................................14
5.2 Combined flow of branching and merging................................................................15
6 Function of initial state ........................................................................................................16
7 Intermediate state program...................................................................................................17
7.1 General flow without branching and merging...........................................................17
7.2 General states with skipping and repeating...............................................................18
8 Branching and merging state program .................................................................................19
8.1 Selective branching and merging state......................................................................19
8.2 State of parallel branching and merging....................................................................20
8.3 Combination of branching and merging....................................................................21
9 Case of single flow...............................................................................................................22
10 Case of selective branching and merging...........................................................................26
11 Case of parallel branching and merging flow.....................................................................28
12 Fexible use of initial state (F60 IST) instruction................................................................29

0
 4 Instruction instructions of step ladder style programming chart Interpretation

Chapter IV Instructions of step ladder style

programming chart
Programming languages of PLC——Sequential function chart (SFC)
Sequential Function Chart is an illustrated method for describing sequential control
function. As for complicated sequential control system, internal interlocking is very
complicated. If it is programmed with step chart, the programming step will be too long and
its readability is greatly reduced. SFL represented mechanical action, with state transfer
programming, especially for complicated sequential control program.
Programming train of thought for programming with SFC:
(1) According to requirements of program
determined by structure, one complicated Preparation
control procedure can be divided into several
working steps; such working step is called state. SB2
The state is separated by transferring. Adjacent
states have differentiations. When transferring STEP 1 Forward
conditions of adjacent state are satisfied,
transferring can be realized, namely, from the SQ2
previous state to the next state.
STEP 1 Waiting
(2) Element of SFC is made up of state,
transferring and oriented segment. SQ4
① State: It represents one working step
(action), the state symbol is represented in STEP 1 Backward
single line frame. The assembly number is
in the frame. One control system shall have
SQ1
one initial state, which is correspondence
with the operation origin and symbol of the initial state is double line frame.
② Transfer: It represents change from one state to another. Oriented segment is used to
connect the transfer to indicate the direction. Vertical line on the oriented segment
and the marked symbol represents conditions of state transfer.
③ Actions in correspondence with state are represented with one or several rectangles
at the right side.

(3) Basic forms of SFC, which is divided into three forms:

① Single flow structure: it refers to the state is operated one after another, each state is
connected to one transfer and vice versa;
② Selective structure: it refers to several single flow branches after one state. When
the corresponding transferring conditions are satisfied, one single flow branch can be
selected one time. Transferring conditions of selective structure is one horizontal line
is active after the state and the first transfer is active under the horizontal line. After
ending of the single flow branch, one horizontal line shall be used to represent and
there should be no transfer under it.

1
 4 Instruction instructions of step ladder style programming chart Interpretation

③ Parallel structure: it refers that under some transferring, if the transferring

conditions are satisfied, several single flow branches can be triggered simultaneously,
and these parallel sequential branches shall be written between the two lines.

S1
S1
0
S1 0 3
0 S2 S4 S2 S4

S2 1 4 1 2

1 S3 S5 S3 S5
2 5
S3
3
S6
S6

(a ) Single flow structure (b ) Selective structure (c ) Parallel structure

2
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart STL，RET

1 Step instructions STL, RET

Instruction symbol Function Circuit representations Step

[STL] Starting of step ladder

[RET] Finishing of step ladder RET

STL and RET are a couple of step instructions, which means starting and ending of step
instructions.
Instruction interpretation
(1) STL (Step ladder): connected to master bus bar normally open contact instruction, the contact
instruction TL is used to represent with normally open contacts with two small rectangles,
namely:
(2) RET (Return): return to bus bar instruction.
The step ladder is the starting of working step control for executing step point of internal devices.
The initial state must start with S0-S9, and RET is the ending of the step point (S), meanwhile, it
must be ended with S0-S9 and the program returns to the bus bar. At the end of the step ladder
style programming chart, the instruction RET is required. In one program, totaled 10 step flows in
maximum can be written and each step flow requires the instruction RET to end. Write the state
adder style programming chart according to the following rules. SFC and ladder style
programming chart are exchangeable.

Programming and actions

Repeated Use of state action and output
S20
●Note: the state symbol S can not be used repeatedly.
Y001
●If the instruction RET is not written at the end of programming, editor
S21 of PC 06 software can perform self-check and add; automatically
Y002 PC06 software When logic relation in SFC is correct, you can see the
added instruction RET in the mnemonic view and ladder style
S22

Y003
programming chart.
●If the contact STL is active, there are some relevant loop [Link] the
contact STL is inactive, there are not any relevant loop actions. After one
Scanning time scanning cycle, the instruction will not be executed (skipping state).
●See the left chart, during different status, the same coil (Y002) shall be
output when programming. At this time, S21 or S22 is active, the coil Y002 will be active in
different step sequence. In ladder-shaped programming, owing to complicated action of dual-coil,
so it is not recommended.
In addition, when SFC is used for editing, when program the same output coil (Y002) for the state
in the master program or vice versa, it shall be processed in dual-coil of the ladder style
programming chart. Please pay attention.

3
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart STL，RET

Y001
Output interlocking
Y002
Positive During state transfer, it is active within shortest time (one
S20
rotation
Y001 Y002
scanning cycle). Therefore, to avoid failure of simultaneous
Negative active of a couple of outputs, interlocking can be set on
S21
rotation
PLC according to manual of the PLC.
Repeated use of timer
●In SFC, the timer coil can set points for the same timer under different states as the output coil,
however, it can not be set under adjacent state; if the same timer is set under adjacent state, in case
of state transfer, the timer coil will not be inactive and the current value can not be reset.

Instruction applied for state

S 10
Y001 Driving method of output
X005 See the chart on the left side, from bus bar in the state, once LD
Y002
Bus bar or LDI is written, instruction for not required contact shall not
in STL
Y003 be programmed. Method in the following chart shall be used to
modify such loop.

S 10
Y001

Y003
Bus bar
in STL X005
Y002

S 10
Y001
X005
Y002
Bus bar
in STL M8000
Y003

The instructions OUT and SET have the

Transfer to the next state
S 10 same functions for state (S) after the
SET S 42 instruction STL and they will reset the
Transferring
transferring source. In addition, it has the
conditions
S 50 function of holding. However, when the
Transferred to instruction OUT is used, it is used for
separation state
transferring to separation state.

4
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart STL，RET

List of sequential control instruction in the state

Instruction LD/LDI/LDP/LDF, ANB/ORB MC/MCR
AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF/ MPS/MRD/MPP
OR/ORI/ORF,INV,OUT
State SET/RST,PLS/PLF
Initial state/general state Available Available Unavailable
Branching Output Available Available Unavailable
and processing
merging Transfer Available Unavailable Unavailable
processing
In interruption program and sub-program, the instruction STL can not be used.
In the instruction STL, the skipping instruction is not forbidden. However, the action is so
complicated and not recommended.

Symbol interpretation in the SFC

Symbol Description
Ladder-shaped mode, indicates internal edition program, only general ladder style
L programming chart not step ladder style programming program
Initial step point, representing the chart for initial step, the available setting range is
S0~S9.
General step point, the available setting range is S10~S1023

Step point skipping, the step point state transferred to non-adjacent step point

Transferring conditions of step point, state transferring conditions between two step
points.
Select branching chart, from the same step point transferred to the corresponding
step point under different transferring conditions
Select merging chart, more than two different step point state transferred to the same
step point with the same transferring conditions
Parallel branching, from the same step point transferred to more than two step points
with the same transferring conditions
Parallel merging point, when more than two step points are established, they are
transferred to the same step point with the same transferring conditions.

5
 Representation
4. Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart of SFC

2 Action and SFC representation of step ladder logic

Function of instructions
Sequential control edition of SFC is built in PLC of TP03. The SFC chart can be inverted into
instruction sheet or ladder style programming chart program, and from instruction sheet or
ladder-shape chart to SFC chart.
●In SFC, each state can be regarded as micro-control working step. The input conditions and
output control can be programmed according to the sequence. The biggest feature of the control is
that when current working step is in progress, the previous working step does not work, the
working steps operate according to program to realize step control.
The step ladder style programming instruction can be represented in the following actions.

S31 If X001 is S31

Y030 Y030
active ON active

X001 X001
SET S32 SET S32

S32
S32
Y030 Y030
If S32 is active, S31 active
will be inactive
Y032 automatically Y032

X002 X002
SET S33 SET S33

If the SFC chart indicates step ladder style programming loop in the left chart, see the
following chart:

Action S31 Y030 If X001 is ON S31 Y030

X001 Called transferring X001 Called transferring

conditions conditions

S32 Y030 Action S32 Y030

If S32 is active, S31
X002 Y032 will be inactive X002 Y032
automatically

In the SFC chart, function of each piece of equipment and the whole process are
understandable, the sequential control design is easy, even to the third person, it is used for
maintenance, modification and troubleshooting. The SFC chart and step ladder style programming
chart shall be programmed according to rules, which are exchangeable with the same content. The
familiarized ladder style programming chart can be used. When editing SFC chart, corresponding
peripheral equipment and programming software.

6
 Representation
4. Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart of SFC

Actual representation of the instruction

According to the above-mentioned statement, the step ladder style programming chart and SFC
chart have the same content, with the following representations. STL chart is represented in ladder,
and SFC is based on state (working procedure) to represent the flow in mechanical way.
M8002 M8002
SET S0 L SET S0

S0 X000
SET S20 S0

X000
S 20 Y023 Y023
Y021 Forward S 20 Y021

X011 Forward
SET S21 X011 Forward small

S 21 Y021 Y021
Y023 Backward S 21 Y021

X012 Backward
SET S22 X012 Backward

S 22 K50
T0 S 22 T0

T0
SET S23 T0 Forward small

S 23 X023 Y023
Y021 Forward S 23 Y021

X013 Forward
SET S24 X013 Forward

S 24 Y021 Y021
Y023 Backward S 24 Y021

X012 Backward
S0 X012 Backward

RET

END

Programming equipment
SFC can be programmed with personal computer (PC06 user’s software); sequential control
program programmed by SFC can be saved in TP03 PLC in the form of instruction.

7
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

3 Features of SFC

Simple action case

When mechanical action is filed for others’ reading, it shall be programmed in the form of single
program in accordance with time sequence chart or structural chart.

LS11

LS13

Actions

1. Press the starting button, the trolley moves forwards, when the inching switch LS11 acts, it
moves backwards. (LS11 is normally ON, when it moves forward at limit, it is OFF, the same
for other inching switches).
2. When moving backwards, the inching switch LS12 acts, after stopping for 5 seconds, it moves
forwards, after the inching switch LS13 acts, it moves backwards.
3. When the inching switch LS12 acts a second time, drive motor of the trolley stops.

When actions are described correctly, complicated mechanical actions will be simple. The
mechanical technicians and electric technicians can have deep discussions.

Basically, if electric technicians want to design PLC program, without action chart of PLC, it can
not be designed.
However, the step action is very complicated for electric technicians, which required rich
experience and designing time. And PLC chart seems pretty complicated from the third person,
and such designer of PLC takes responsibility for mechanical maintenance.

8
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

Processing of single flow

Basic form of working step transfer is the control of single flow. In sequential control of single
action, only single flow is adequate. With input conditions and operators, with following selective
branching and parallel branching, complicated
M 8002
conditions can be treated in a simple way.
LAD0 SET S0

S0
· In ladder circuit block LAD0, the auxiliary relay
S ta r t M8002 with action in a shortest time can make the
X 000
Y 023 initial state S0 reset (ON) during switching from
S 20 Y 021
stop-start switching of PLC.
F o rw a rd
X 011 F o r w a r d s m a ll
· As for provided initial working step, such
distributed PLC is called initial state device of
Y 021
S 21 Y 021 S0-S9.
B ack w ard · As for distributed state S02-S889 for the working
X 012 B a ck w ard steps, including the state for holding in case of
K 50 power failure, it can keep the state. In addition,
S 22 T0
when S10-S19 employs the instruction IST, they are
T0 F o r w a r d s m a ll
also for special purposes.
· Timer, counter and auxiliary relay and other
Y 023
S 23 Y 021 devices are set in PLC, which can be used at your
F o rw a rd discretion. Such timer T0 takes 0.1 second as unit
X 013 F o rw a rd action. Therefore, the setting value is K50, after the
Y 021 coil is driven for 5 seconds, the output contact acts.
S 24 Y 023
B ac k w ard

X 012 B ac k w ard

S20 RET

LAD1 EN D

Selective processing and simultaneous processing of several working steps

When executing one of several flows, it is called selective branching.
When executing several flows simultaneously, it is called parallel branching.

S 20 Branching state S 20 Branching state

X000 X010 X020 X000

S 21 S 31 S 41 S 21 S 24 S 27
X001 X011 X021 X001 X011 X021
S 22 S 32 S 42 S 22 S 25 S 28
X002 X012 X022 X002 X012 X022
S 23 S 26 S 29
S 50

X007
S 30 Merging state

9
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

4 Prepared knowledge for programming SFC flow

Separation of flow
SFC program has several initial state, and each initial state is separated program.

OUT OUT
S3 S4

S20 S40

OUT

S41

S39 S59

Take the above chart as example, after the instruction STL of S20-S39 of the initial state S3 is
executed, then relevant programs to S4 are executed then.
In the program, the instruction except the instruction STL can be used to execute other state.
In the left chart, the initial state S3 includes the instruction OUTS41. The initial state S4 includes
the instruction LD S39. Do not confuse the instruction STL.

Restriction of branching loop quantity

Quantity of one parallel branching or selective branching shall be less than 10.
However, if there are several parallel branching or selective branching, total loop quantity of each
initial state may not exceed 16.
S4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10

OUT OUT RST OUT

OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16

State from or before merging to the separation state by transferring or reset are not allowed. No op
state must be set. Transferring and reset can only be executed from the branching.

10
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

Program of complicated transitional conditions

There is only condition for each node in TP03 SFC program. If program shall be written as per the
chart below at the left side, method at the right side shall apply.

X004
X004
S30 Y000 S30 Y000
X000 X001
X000 X002 M0
X001 X003 M0 X002 X003

S31 S31

Instructions MPS, MRD and MPP can not be used in transitional conditional circuit. The right
method shall be used for programming.

Actions of ▽ and ↓

S0
S 90
S 10
S 90
S 19 S 70
S 80
S0
S 80

When state resetting is represented in the flow, it shall be represented with▽.

The symbol ↓ indicates transfer to upward state (repeat) or downward state (skipping), or
transferred to state on other separated flow.

X000
ZRSTP S0 S 50

S0

S 50

S0

11
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

Clearing of state and output forbidden

Forbidden
SET M 10

S 10
Y001

M 10
Y005

M30

T4

It is equal to forbidding output in emergency step stop. Please comply with Safety Attentions
contained in the manual.

Clearing of state range

Forbid step random output in actions.
All the output relays (Y) PLC are off.
Forbidden
M8043

Special relays
To program SFC effectively, varieties of special relays shall be employed with content described
below:
Component No. Description Function and purpose
M8000 Operation monitoring During operation of PLC, the relay needs always
(contact a) connecting, which can be used as input state for
driving programming of operation state indication
of PLC.
M8002 Starting pulse The relay is active in a short time (one scanning
(contact b) cycle) from stop to start of PLC. It is used for
resetting of starting setting or initial state of the
program.
M8040 Transfer forbidden Driving the relay forbids transfer among state.
Under the conditions of forbidding transferring,
internal programs will still execute, therefore, the
output coil will not be off automatically.
M8046 STL state action When any state is active, M8046 is automatically
active for avoiding simultaneous starting or for
action sign of working step with other flows.
M8041 Step starts Flag-sign for the instruction IST
M8047 STL monitoring is Driving the relay, the programming function can
effective read the executing state and display

12
 Features of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart SFC

Holding in case of power failure

Holding in case of power is used to keep its action with battery. During mechanical action in case
of power failure, when power gets connected, such action can be continued.

Function of instruction RET

The instruction RET is finally programmed after a series of instruction STL.
Executing the instruction means completion of the step ladder-shaper loop. When expecting to
interrupt a series of working steps and programming the master program, the instruction RET is
also required.
The instruction RET can be programmed repeatedly.

At the end of the instruction STL, if the instruction RET is not programmed, the software can add
the instruction RET to the end of the program.

Attentions:
Attentions for detecting with rising edge and falling edge:
When rising edge and falling edge of LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANF, ORP and ORF, the changed
contacts when the state is cut off will be detected when the state is active a second time.
As for changed conditions in case of the state is cut off, if rising edge and falling edge are used to
detect, please modify the procedure according to the chart below.

S3
X001
M 6
X001
SET S 42 X002
M 7
X002
S3

M6
SET S 42

M7

If it is transferred to S42 through X001 falling edge, if X002 is falling, S3 is cut off, and X002
falling edge can not be detected. When S3 is active a second time, it is detected. Therefore, in case
of second action of S3, it is transferred to S42.

13
 4. Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart Form of flow

5 Form of SFC flow

5.1 Skipping and repeating flows

It indicates combined action mode of SFC single flow, selection branching and parallel branching.

Skipping
Tranfer to the state below or out of the series is called skippng, with symbol ↓ to indicate
transferred goal state.

↓ ↓
S 20 S 20 S 30 S 40 S 30 S 40
S 22 S 42

S 21 S 21 S 31 S 41 S 31 S 41

S 22← →S 22 S 32 →S 42 S 32 →S 42

S 23 S 23 S 33 S 43 S 33 S 43

Repeating
Transfer to the above state is called repeating. The same as above, the symbol ↓ is used to indicate
transferred goal state.

→S 0 →S 0 S 60← →S 60

S 50 S 50 S 61 S 61

S 51 S 51 S 62 →S 62

S 63 S 63 ↓
S 60

S 59 S 59

14
 4. Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart Form of flow

5.2 Combined flow of branching and merging

S40 S60

A B

S51 S54
S41 S44

S52 S55 S56

S42 S45 S46

S43
S53

The above flows are possible programs. Flow of B is sound. Uner the conditions of flow A, there
is a waiting at the conflucence of parallel branching, pay attention to it.

S 40 S 61

S 41 S 44 S 62 S 66

S 42 S 45 S 46 S 63 S 65 S 67

╭╮ ↓
↖ S 63
S 43 不允许交叉
Cross not allowed S 64

The SFC chart can not be used for flow cross. Flow in the above chart shall be re-programmed
according to the program at the right side to realize reversal switching from program based on
instruction to SFC chart.

15
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart Initial state

6 Function of initial state

Use of initial state

●The initial state is located at the frontmost position of SFC chart, which is represented in S0-S9.
●If the initial state is driven by other state, other method shall be used for driving when the
operation starts.
Special auxiliary relay M8002 is used to drive during switching of stop-operation of PLC in the
following cases.
●General state other than starting state shall be driven by STL of other state, and drive out of the
drive shall not apply.
●The state driven by instructions other than STL is called initial state, which must be described in
the frontmost of the flow. In addition, for the instruction STL in the initial state, it must be
programmed before a series of instruction STL.

Function of initial state

As the idenfied device for reversal change
● When reversal change is executed from instruction sheet to SFC chart, starting section of the
flow shall be identified. Therefore, S0-S9 can be taken as initial state. If other numbers are used,
reversal change can not be performed.

16
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart Initial state

7 Intermediate state program

7.1 General flow without branching and merging

The following chart is a representative state from SFC. Each state has the functions of driving load,
specifying transferring goal and transferring conditions. When sequential control of relay is used
to represent SFC, it is the step ladder style programming chart below. It is programmed with SFC
chart or step ladder style programming chart. The programming sequence is driving processing of
load first, then transferring processing can be performed. Of course, there is driving processing
without driving load.

0 STL S 20 The instruction is used to represent program in the above chart,

1 OUT Y 010 see the left chart.
2 LD X 010 The instruction STL is the normally open contact connected to
3 OR X 011 main bus bar, in the following, coil is directly connected to
4 OUT Y 011 auxiliary bus bar or the contact is used to drive the coil.
5 LD X 000 Contact connected to the auxiliary bus bar uses the instsruction
6 ANI X 001 LD(LDI). If it returns to original bus bar, the instruction RET
7 SET S 21 shall be used. The contact STL drives the state S, it will be
automatically reset before moving of the state S.
As for instructions SET and
RST, it is a 2-step
instruction

As for continuous SFC chart, if several state program shall be executed and all the statees are
programmed, it will end after completing programming and the state sequential number can be
selected at your discretion. However, initial state is required before a series of STL instructions,
and the instruction RET shall be written finally.

17
 4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart Initial state

7.2 General states with skipping and repeating

S 0 S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4

S 20 S 21 S 40 S 50 S 60
OUT
→S 21 S 51

S 22 S 22 S 41 →S 52 S 61 →S 64
OUT
S 20 S 42 S 62 S 65

S 23 OUT→S 23 S 43 S 53 S 63
RST

Repeating
重复 Skipping
跳转 Jump out of the flow
向流程外跳转 Reset复位处理
processing

See the chart above, transferring to upward position (repeating), transferring to downward position
(skipping) and transferring out of the flow and other separation state. See 4-5. The symbol ê
represents the state symbol of transferred objective. See the chart below. The instruction OUT is
programmed and cross flow in 4-5-1 is also the same.

X001
Y001
Y001
S 40 ( ) X001
Tranfering program S 52 ( ) Tranfering program
STL S 40 STL S 52
LD X001 X002 X003 X005 LD X004
OUT Y001 OUT Y002
LD X002 LD X005
S 41 ↓S 52 S 53
SET S 41 SET S 53
LD X003
With the
OUT S52 instruction OUT

From S40, S52 is driven by X003, even the instruction OUT is used, when S52 holds its action,
the transfering source S40 will be resetted automatically. The left chart indicates resetting of S65
throught X007 from S65.
From S65, although resetting of other state is the same, it it not transferring. S65 will not be
resetted.

18
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

8 Branching and merging state program

8.1 Selective branching and merging state

Case of selecting branching

Y010
STL S 20
S 20
STL ( ) OUT Y000 —Drive processing
LD X000
SET S 21 —Directly transferring to the state be
LD X001
X000 X001 X002 SET S 31 —T ransferred to 1st branching state
LD X002
SET SET SET SET S 41 —T ranferred to 2nd branching state

S 21 S 31 S 41

The same as programming of general state, driving processing shall be executed, then transfering
processing shall be executed. All the transfering processing shall be executed according to the
sequence.

Case of selecting merging

S 29 Y010 S 39 Y011 S 49 Y012

STL ( ) STL ( ) STL ( )

X010 X011 X012

S 50
SET

State drive processing before merging shall be executed first, then continue transfering processing
of merging state according to the sequence. It becomes the rules of reversal inversion towards
SFC.
Pay attention to sequential numbers of the program, and the branching row and merging row cna

19
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

not be crossed.
8.2 State of parallel branching and merging

Case of parallel branching

Y000
STL S 20
S 20
STL ( ) OUT Y000 —Drive processing
LD X000
X000 SET S 21 —Directly transferring to the state
SET S 31
SET S 41 —T ransferred to 1st branching stat
SET SET SET —T ranferred to 2nd branching stat
S 21 S 31 S 41

The same as program for general state, driving processing shall executed first, then transfering can
be continued. All the transfer processing shall be executed according to the sequence.

Case of parallel merging

S 29 Y010 S 39 Y011 S 49 Y012

STL () STL () STL () （

）
STL S 29
OUT Y010 —Drive processing
（
）
X011
STL S 39
OUT Y011 —Drive processing
（
）
STL S 49
SET
OUT Y012 —Drive processing
（
S 50
）
→ STL S 29
→ STL S39
→ STL S49
LD X010
AND X011
AND X012
SET S 50
（
）

The continuous instruction

STL represents parallel merging.
Parallel branching is restricted
less than 8.

20
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

8.3 Combination of branching and merging

S 20 S 30 S 40 S 20 S 30 S 40 S 20 S 30 S 20 S 30
X000 X001 X002
X000 X001
X000 X000
X003 X004 X001 X002
S 50 S 60 S 50 S 60 S 40 S 50 S 40 S 50

Changed to the following forms:

S 20 S 30 S 40 S 20 S 30 S 40 S 20 S 30 S 20 S 30
X000 X001 X002
X000 X001
X000 X000
S100 Dummy
? ? ? state S101 Dummy
? ? ? state S102 Dummy
? ? ? state S103 Dummy
? ? ? state

S101 S102
X003 X004 X001 X002
S 50 S 60 S 50 S 60 S 40 S 50 S 40 S 50

STL S20 STL S 20 STL S 20 STL S 20

LD X000 STL S 30 LD X000 STL S 30
SET S100 STL S 40 SET S102 LD X000
STL S 30 LD X000 STL S 30 SET S103
LD X001 SET S101 LD X001 STL S103
SET S100 STL S101 SET S102
STL S 40 LD S101 STL S102 LD X001
LD X002 SET S 50 LD S102 SET S 40
SET S100 SET S 60 SET S 40
STL S100 SET S 50 LD X002
SET S50
LD X003
SET S 50

LD X004
SET S60

Direct branch after merging is not a good way, and one virtual state point is easy to write.

21
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

9 Case of single flow

Case of water spraying control
S3 Y000 Standby display

X000 Starting button

M8000 Central
STL Monitoring
S20 Y001 indicator light
M8047 effectively
T1 T1 K20
RUN Monitoring

S21 Central water

X002 X000 Y002 spraying
T2
M8040 Transfer forbidden T2 K20

Ring indicator
Step Starting S 22 Y003 light
T3
M8002 T3 K20
SET S3 Initial state
Ring water
S 27 Y007
Initial pulse spraying

T7 K20
T7 T7
X001 X001

S 20 S3 RET END

The above chart

1. Single operation (X001=OFF，X002=OFF). Press starting button, X000 acts, it acts as per the
sequence according to Y000→Y001→Y002→Y003→Y007→Y000, and returns to standby
state. Output is executed according to the sequence as per the 2-second timer.
2. Continuous operation (X001=ON), repeat actions Y001~Y007.
3. Step operation (X002=ON), press the starting button one time, output actions as per the
sequence.
Case of sparkling loop

S3 Y000
T0 T0 K 10

S 20 Y001
T1
T
T1 K 15

S3 RET END

Y000

Y001
1S 1.5S

1 When PLC is operated, initial pulse（M8002） drives state S3.

2 After the state S3 is ON, it outputs Y00, meanwhile, the timer starts timing. 1 second later, the
counting will end and transfer to state S20.
3 When state S20 is changed to ON, it outputs Y001, the timer starts timing, 1.5 seconds later, it
returns to S3.

22
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

Rotation control of cam shaft

Small negative Small positive
rotation rotation
X011 X011

Big negative Big positive

rotation rotation
X012

X013
Y023 M Y021
Big negative Big positive
rotation rotation

Limit switches X013 and X011 are set in the positions of the positive rotating angle, and limit
switches X012 and X010 are set in the positions of the negative rotating angle.
Press the starting button, execute positive rotating small→ negative rotation small → negative
rotation big→ negative rotation big and etc., then it stops.
M8000
M8047 STL effective monitoring
M8002 X000
M8040 Transfer forbidden
Initial state Starting
M8040 button Y020
M8043 All outputs forbidden
M8002 M8046
SET S6
Initial state
Initial state

The limit switches X010~X013 are normally OFF. When the cam reaches the setting angle, it is
ON.
S6 Y 020 Origin representation

X 000 Starting button

Y 023
S 521 Y 021 Positive rotation

X 011 Positive rotation of small angle is ON

Y 021
S 522 Y 023 Negative rotation
X 010 Negative rotation of small angle is ON
Y 023
S 523 Y 021 Positive rotation

X 013 Positive rotation of small angle is ON

Y 021
S 524 Y 023 Negative rotation

X 012 Negative rotation of big angle is ON

S 6 RET END

z When M8047 acts, the action state monitoring is effective. After S0-S899 act and the
instruction END is executed, M8046 acts.
z State point of SFC is held by the battery. In case of power failure during action, when
pressing the starting button a second time, it will continue acting. Before pressing the
starting button, output actions below Y20 are totally forbidden.

23
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

Case of sequential start and stop

The motor is started from M1 to M4 by the timer and stop with the reverse sequence.
Such SFC flow performs skipping based on single flow.

M1
M
Start M8002 Initial pulse
X000 2S S0
M2 X000 starting button
M
S20 SET Y000 MotorM1 starts
Start 3S
K 20
M3 T0 T0
M
X001 X001 Press the stop button and transfer to state S27
4S
S27 Motor M2 starts
M4 X21 SET Y001
M
K 30
T1
T1
Press the stop button and
X001 X001 transfer to state S26
S 22 S26 SET Y002 MotorM3 starts
M4 K 40
M T2
Stop T2
X001 4S Press the stop button and
X001 X001
transfer to state S25
M3
M S25 Motor M4 starts
S23 SET Y003
Stop
3S X001 Stop
M2 S 24 RST Y003 Motor M4 starts
M
K 40
2S T4 T4
M1
M S 25 RST Y002 Motor M3 starts
K 30
T5 T5

S 26 RST Y001 Motor M2 starts

K 20
T6 T6

S 27 RST Y000 Motor M1 starts

Y000

RET END
S0

24
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

The skipping flow in the previous page can be represented in selective and merging flows
described below. Flowing direction must be from up to down, which can not be crossed except
branching and merging.

M8002 Initial pulse

S0
X000 Starting button
S20 SET Y000
K 20
T0
T0
X001 stop
X001
X21 SET Y001
K 30
T1
T1
X001 X001 stop
S 22 SET Y002
K 40
T2
T2
X001 X001 stop
S23 SET Y003
S 30 S 31 S 32
X001 stop
S 24 RST Y003
K 40
T4 T4 S 30

S 25 RST Y002
K 30
T5 T5 S 31

S 26 RST Y001
K 20
T6 T6 S 32

S 27 RST Y000

Y000
RET END
S0

For instance, the state S20 acts, if X001 is active, the state S32 acts, then the contacts act, which
skip to the state S27.
There should be more than one state in the branching; therefore, no op state shall be set.

25
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

10 Case of selective branching and merging

Action of selective branching

S 20

One flow is executed from several flows is called selective

X000 X010 X020 z branching.

z See the left chart, X000, X010 and X020 can not be active
S 21 S23 S25 simultaneously.
X001 X011 X021 z For instance, when S20 acts and X000 is active, the action state
S 22 S24 S26 is transferred to S21, S20 will not act.
Therefore, even X010 and X020 act, S23 and S25 do not act.

X002 X012 X022 z Merging state S50 can be driven by either S22, S24 or S26.

S 50 S 50 Merging state

Action of selective branching

The following chart is the machine to convey classified big and small balls with the transmission
points.
The top left is the origin and sequence of actions is descending, absorption, ascending, rightward
moving, descending, ascending and leftward moving. In addition, the mechanical arm descends,
when the electromagnet presses the big ball, the lower limit switch LS2 is inactive; when pressing
the small ball, LS2 is active.
X001 X004 X005
LS1 Left limit LS14 LS5
Represent
Right Y003 with origin X003
Left Y004 Y007 LS3 Upper
M limit

For big ball, the piston fails to reach the

Ascending Y002 lower limit, X002 will not act
Descending Y000

X002
LS2 Lower
limit

Electromagn
etY001

Proximity
switch
small big
PS0
X000

26
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

For such SFC for selecting size or judging acceptance or not, the following branching and merging
SFC can be used to represent.
Take M8002 to drive initial pulse

S0 Operating sequences

X026 Starting
Y007 Origin position (upper limit, left limit and release)

S 21 Y000 Descending

T0 K20
Represent X002 contact
( normally closed contact)
T0 T0

X002 Lower limit (small ball ) X002 Fail to reach lower limit

S 22 SET Y001 Absorption S 25 SET Y001 Absorption

T1 K 10 T1 K 10
T1 T1

S 23 Y002 Ascending S 26 Y 002 Ascending

· If it is small ball (X002=ON) ,
Upper limit the left flow is valid; for big ball,
X003 Upper limit X003
the right flow is valid.
X004 X005
S 24 Y003 Right moving S 27 Y003 Right moving

X004 Right (small box) X005 Right( big box)

S 30 Y000
· If it is small ball , X 004 acts; for big ball , X 005 acts.
X002 Lower limit After merging, transfer to S30.
S 31 RST Y001

T2 K 10
T2

S 32 Y002 Ascending ·If the following auxiliary relay M8040 is driven , all the
state transfers are forbidden
. Of statuses 24, 27 and 33, it
outputs S33 at the right side and S34 at the right side for
X003 Upper limit
relevant interlocking contacts in series connection
.
X001
S 33 Y004 Left moving

X001 Left limit

S0 RET END

27
 Branching
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart and merging

11 Case of parallel branching and merging flow

S 20

X000

S 21 S24 S27
X001 X002 X003
S 22 S25 S28
X004 X005 X006
S 23 S26 S29

X007

z Branches with several flows executed simultaneously are called parallel branching.
z Take the above chart for example, after S20 acts, X0 is on, state S21, S24 and S24 will be
effective simultaneously and the flows start.
z After all the flows are completed, when X07 is active, merging state S30 acts and state S23,
S26 and S29 do not act.
z Such merging is called waiting merging. (Flows complete earlier shall wait until all the
flows are completed, then merging is continued).
For instance, parts A, B and C are processed separately, which are assembled after processing, and
this is a parallel branching and merging flow.

28
 Flexible use of
4 Interpretation of step ladder style programming chart F60 IST

12 Fexible use of initial state (F60 IST) instruction

See the following chart on mechanical reversal mode, and part or whole of the mode can be used.

Manual mod Operation: independent button to execute the loads

Return of origin: press the reset button to return to origin.
Automatic mode Step: press the button one time, it moves forward.
Cycle mode: press the starting switch at the position of orgigin,
automatic operation of one cycle is realized, then it stops at the origin.
Press the stop button during operation, it stop. Press the starting button
again, it continues from where it stops then it stops at the origin.
Continuous operation: press the starting button at the origin, it starts
repeative operation. After pressing the switch button, it will stop at the
origin.
In general, such control can be realized by writing step ladder style programming chart (SFC flow).
In applied instruction of PLC of TP03 series, such method can control the mechanical and fixed
instructions.

M8000

IST X020 S20 S20

RUN monitoring Applied instruction F60 (IST) is a

complete set of instructions for state in the
above mode or automatic control of special auxiliary relay.

IF the instruction IST is used, switching between modes and repeated control program sjhall be
used. We should only focus on writing program of mechanical action in the state to complete the
sequence design.
Refer to instruction F60(IST) in Applied Instrucitons.

29
 5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions Table of Contents

Chapter V Representation and Use of Applied Instructions ..........................................1

1 Representation and executing form of applied instructions................................1
2 Use of data in the applied instructions................................................................6
3 Change of operand with index register ...............................................................9
4 Specification of Constants K, H and E .............................................................12

0
 Representation and
5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions executing form

Chapter V Representation and Use of

Applied Instructions
The chapter introduces PLC applied instructions and programming method of TP03 series. In
general, one basic instruction can finish one specified operation and one applied instruction can
finish one series of operations, which is equal to one sub-program, therefore, function of applied
instruction is powerful. The basic instructions and ladder symbols are corresponding. The applied
instruction employs ladder symbols for memory view to represent what the instruction is to do.
Times of applied instruction in the whole program are restricted.
1 Representation and executing form of applied instructions

Instructions and operands

z PLC applied instruction can specify function No. F00-F 口口口, and the instructions are
represented with memory view. For instance, F45 is MEAN, representing “average value”.
z Applied instructions are made up of function No. and following memory view to form one
complete instruction.

X000 S. D. n
MEAN D100 D150 K5

z MEAN: Memory view of the instruction, representing average value in mathematical way.
S.: Source operands, called source for short, after executing the instructions, operand of the
content will not be changed. Under the conditions of changing device number with index, add “·”
[S· ] to represent and when the operand is not one, represent with [S1· ], [S2·] and etc.
D.: Destination operand, called destination for short, after executing the instructions, operand of
the content is changed. Like the source, index decoration shall apply; when the destination
operand is more, represent with [D1·], [D2·] and etc.
m , n: other operands, which are used to represent constant or make additional interpretation for
the source and destination. Decimal system figure is followed after K and hexadecimal system
figure is followed and H.
Program step: the step for executing the program. Generally speaking, the function number and
memory view occupy one step and each operand occupies 2-4 steps (2 steps for 16-bit operand
and 4 steps for 32-bit operand).

1
 Representation and
5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions executing form

Available device for operands

z X, Y, M, S and other bit devices can be used.
z Combine these devices, represent with KnX , KnY , KnM , KnS and other forms as data for
processing. Refer to following Use of Bit Device.
z Current value registers of processing data buffer D, timers T or counter C.
The data register D is 16-bit, when 32-bit data is processed, one couple of data registers can be
used.
For instance, when the data register D0 is specified as operand of 32-bit instruction, 32-bit data
(D0 and D1) is processed (D1 is high 16-bit and D0 is low 16-bit). Current registers of T and C
can be used as general registers; however, point 1 of 32-bit counter of C200~C255 can process
32-bit data, which can not be used for operand of 16-bit instructions.
Form and executing form of the instructions
Of PLC of TP03 series, according to size of data to be processed, the applied instructions are
divided into 16-bit instruction and 32-bit instruction. In addition, according to executing forms of
the instructions, it has features of continuous executing and pulse executing and etc.
The applied instruction can be used together or independently.
z In applied instruction of data processing, according to bit length of the data, it is divided into
16-bit and 32-bit.
X000
MOV K100 D10 The decimal figure 100 is sent to hexadecimal system
data register D10
X001
DMOV D20 D22 Content of （D21, D20) is sent to（D23, D22）

z As for function instruction represents prefix D, it can process 32-bit data.

z 32-bit is comprised of 2 adjacent registers.
z One device of the 32-bit counter (C200-C255) is 32-bit, and it can not be used as 16-bit
operand.
Pulse executing/continuous executing instructions
Pulse executing type
X000
MOVP D10 D12

Under pulse executing, the instruction MOV execute on data sending from OFF→ON under the
condition X000. To shorten scan time, pulse executing instruction must be used as much as
possible.
The symbol P represents the instruction is available for pulse executing.
F24 (INC), F25 (DEC) and etc. shall be in accordance with the instructions. If continuous
executing instruction is employed, each scan cycle and source content will change.

2
 Representation and
5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions executing form

Note: pulse executing instruction does not execute in the first scan cycle.
Continuous executing type
X000
MOV D10 D12

The above figure is continuous executing instruction, PLC works in circulating scan. If the
executing condition X001 is active, the above instruction is repeated one time in each scan cycle.
z When the drive inputs X0 and X1 are inactive, the instructions out of special symbols are not
executed and the destinations do not change.

Processing of symbols
General symbols
z According to types of applied instructions, the following symbols will act.
(For example) M8020: zero symbol M8022: carrying symbol
M8021: borrowing symbol M8029: executing results
When the instructions are ON, the symbols will be active or inactive; for OFF, it will not change
in case of error.
When there are too many instructions affecting the symbols, when executing the instructions each
time, the active/inactive state will be changed. Please refer to the following symbol program case.
z Program case of several symbols (standard case of executing results)
When there are several applied instructions for the same symbol action, please write symbol
contact-point after the instructions.

M8000
DSW X010 Y010 D0 K1 Read the value of digital switch

M8029
Action finishing of DSW is taken as
MUL D0 K10 D20 the triggering point to increase the
M8029 is taken number 10 times.
as action
finishing of
DSW.
X010
SET M0
D PLSY start

M0
DPLSY K1000 D20 Y000 After the number SW×10, output pulse
to Y100 with frequency of 1KHZ.
M8029 is taken
as action M8029
After setting pulse output, take action
finishing of RST M0
finishing of D PLSY as the triggering
DPLSY.
point, reset M0.

3
 Representation and
5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions executing form

M8029
As for applied instructions
employing the finishing symbol
Executing results
mark,for instance, DSW and DPLSY
M8000 shall employ M9029 as the finishing
DSW X010 Y010 D0 K1 mark. See the left chart on
X000 programming, and we can not judge
SET M0 which instruction is finished.
M0
DPLSY K1000 D20 Y000

M8029

Executing results

Symbol of computation errors

In case of errors in structure of applied instructions, available devices, number range and etc., it
may lead to error in computation and the following symbol bit will act and record the error
information.

M8067 In case of abnormal computation, M8067 will act and hold and store code of

D8067 abnormality in D8067.

In case of other new abnormality, D8067 will update new code of abnormality
and abnormal step number (when the abnormality is released, it is OFF). When PLC from
STOP→RUN, it is released.

Symbol for extended functions

In part of the instruction, the inherent special auxiliary relay determined by the applied instruction
can be used for function extension and the following example shall apply:

4
 Representation and
5 Representation and executing form of applied instructions executing form

X000
·When the instruction X000 is active,
XCHP D10 D20 exchange content of D10 and D11.

X000 Function extension symbol for XCH

M8160 ·When M8160 before the instruction XCH is
driven, the computation object and result
specify the same element, exchange the high 8-
bit and low 8-bit.
XCHP D10 D10

The same No.

M8000
·To return normal instruction XCH M8160
M8160 shall be inactive.

In addition, when the instruction for interrupting program needs the symbol for function extension,
before drive of the symbol for function extension, write the DI instruction (interruption inhibition)
and write the instruction EI (interruption permission) after inactiveness of the symbol for function
extension.

Restriction of simultaneous drive of the instructions

In applied instruction, even some instructions can be programmed several times, and there are
restrictions on action points.
Less than 6 instructions
F53 (DHSCS)，F54 (DHSCR)，F55 (DHSZ)
Less than 2 instructions
F72(DSW)，F74(SEGL)
Less than 1 instruction
F52(MTR)，F57 (PLSY)，F58(PWM)，F59 (PLSR)，F60(IST)，F62(ABSD)，F68(ROTC)，
F69(SORT)，F70(TKY)，F71(HKY)，F75(ARWS)，F80 (RS)，F87 (MBUS)，F156 (ZRN)，
F157 (PLSV)，F158 (DRVI)，F159 (DRVA)，F190(DTLK)，F191(RMIO) ，F193(DTLK2)。

5
 5 Representation and executing
Processing of data
form of applied instructions

2 Use of data in the applied instructions

Use of bit element

z Like X, Y, M and S, there are two states, namely ON or OFF. The element which is
represented with binary system is called bit element, and T, C, D and other devices for data
processing are called word element. Even it is a bit element, it can be used to process data by
combined use of the bit element. Under the circumstances, it represents with bit Kn and start
device number.
z 4-bit is used as the unit, and number of bit is K1-K4(16-bit data)，K1-K8(32-bit data)，
For instance, K2M0， M0~M7，2-bit data.

Symbol bit, 0=positive，1=negative

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
No change
D0 Low
Send

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Symbol bit, 0=positive，1=negative

D1 Low
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

z When 16-bit data is sent to specified of K1M0~K3M0, the high-bit data (namely 4 bit in
maximum) will not be sent according to insufficient specified data length; the same for
32-bit.
z In 16-bit (or 32-bit) computation, when the bit assembly is for specified number of bit
K1-K3 (K1-K7), if the high bit is not sufficient, add 0 for processing, and the highest bit is 0,
so the data is processed as positive.

M0
BIN K2X004 D0

z The specified bit element number can be specified freely. It is suggested that for X and Y, the
lowest bit number shall be set 0 (X000, X010, X020…Y000, Y010 and Y020); for M and S,
multiple of 8 is ideal. To avoid confusing, it shall be set M0, M10, M20… and etc.

6
 5 Representation and executing
Processing of data
form of applied instructions

Attached note
<Specifying of continuous character >
A series of data registers starting from D1 are D1, D2, D3, D4 and etc.
Through bit specifying, in the word situation, it can be used for a series of word processing. See
the followings.
K1X000 K1X004 K1X010 K1X014……, K2Y010 K2Y020 K2Y030
K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36……, K4S16 K4S32 K4S48
Namely, do not skip the device. Use the devices according to unit of the bit.
However, for 32-bit computation, if K4Y000 is used, the upper 16-bit is 0. When 32-bit data is
required, please specify K8Y000.

Use of floating-point decimal computation

In PLC, integral of PLC employs binary system.
In division computation of integral, for instance, 40/3=13 and 1.
In evolution computation of integral, decimal point is ignored.
Of PLC of TP03 series, to perform the computation more precisely, floating-point number
computation is used.

z The floating-point number computation is valid for the following instructions.

F49(FLT), F110(DECMP), F111(DEZCP), F118(DEBCD),
F119D(EBIN), F120(DEADD), F121(DESUB), F122(DEMUL),
F123D(EDIV), F127(DESQR), F129(INT)
<Decimal system floating-point number >
z Binary floating-point number is hard for user to judge, therefore, it shall be converted into
decimal floating-point number.
z A couple of data registers with continuous numbers can be used to process decimal system
floating-point number, the smaller number is the mantissa section and the bigger number is
the index section.
For instance, when the data registers (D1, D0) are used, the data is written into D0 and D1 by
the instruction MOV.
Decimal system floating-point value =「Mantissa D0」 X10[index DI]
Mantissa D0= (1,000~9,999) or 0
Index D1= -41 ~ +35
The highest bits of D0 and D1are the bit for positive and negative symbols, which are processed
as a complement code for 2.
Besides, in Mantissa D0, for instance, 100 does not exist. In situation for 100, it becomes
1000×10 −1 (Mantissa 1000, index-1). Processing range of decimal floating-point is stated below:
Minimum absolute value 1175×10-41 Maximum absolute value 3402×1035

7
 5 Representation and executing
Processing of data
form of applied instructions

z Decimal floating-point number is valid in the following instructions.

Binary floating-point number→ Decimal floating-point number conversion F118 (DEBCD)
Decimal floating-point number→ Binary floating-point number conversion F119 (DEBIN)
Binary floating-point number
Binary floating-point number is a couple of data buffers using continuous numbers, such as
situations (D11,D10), with results below:

D11(b15~b0) D10(b15~b0)

27 26 25 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-21 2-22 2-23

S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b2 b1 b0
Index section Index section
8 bit 23 bit

E0~E7=0 or 1 A0~A22=0 or 1
Mantissa section symbol(0:positive,
1:negative)
B0~b31=0, it is 0
0 -1 -2 -23
Binary floating-point number =±（2 +A22×2 +A21×2 +……+A0×2 ）
(E7×27+E6×26+……+E0×20) 127
×2 ／2
For example A22=1, A21=0, A20=1, A19~A0=0
E7=1, E6~E1=0, E0=1
0 -1 -2 -3 -23
Binary floating-point number =±（2 +1×2 +0×2 +1×2 +……+0×2 ）
(1×27+0×26+……+1×20) 127
×2 ／2
129 127 2
=±1.625×2 ／2 =±1.625×2

The positive and negative symbols are determined by b31, and complement code can not be used.
z Use of zero symbol (M8020), borrowing symbol (M8021) and carrying symbol (M8022),
see the symbol action on floating-point computation.
Zero symbol: when the result is 0, it is 1.
Negative symbol: the result is not the minimum and not 0, it is 1.
Carrying symbol: if the result exceeds available range of the absolute value, it is 1.

8
 5 Representation and executing
Change of operand
form of applied instructions

3 Change of operand with index register

Available applied instructions

In interpretation of applied instructions, see the following figure on operand of index decoration.
Add the mark “•” on the source S and destination D to distinguish the operand without change
functions.
Index change available

S· D·

MOV K100 D10

Case of index change

As for structure and function of the index register, please refer to [2-9-2 index register] mfor more
information.
Number decoration of data register
X000
MOVP K0 V0 Change of 16-bit instruction operand
Send content of K0 or K10 to the index register V0
K0→V0
X000 When X001 is active, and V0=0(D0+0=0), content of
K500 is sent to D0. If V0=10(D0+10=D10), content
MOVP K10 V0
of K500 is sent to D10.
K10→V0
X001
MOVP K500 D0V0

V0=0: K500→D0 (D0+0)

V10=0: K500→D10(D0+10)

X002
Change of 32-bit instruction operand
DMOVP K0 Z0
For the instruction DMOV is 32-bit instruction,
therefore, the index register for the instruction shall be
K0→V0，Z0 specified as 32-bit. In the 32-bit instruction, side Z (Z0-
X002
Z15) of the 32-bit instruction is specified, including
DMOVP K10 Z0 side V (V0-V15), which is taken as actions of the 32-
bit register.
K10→V0，Z0
X003 *1 even data written in Z0 does not exceed 16 bits (0-
32, 767), and V and Z shall be rewritten with the 32-bit
MOVP K69000 D0Z0 instruction. If only size Z is written, and other data is
left on side V, it may lead to great computation error.
V0, Z0 =0: K69000→D1 ,D0 (D0+0)
V10,Z0=0: K69000→D11,D10(D0+10)

9
 5 Representation and executing
Change of operand
form of applied instructions

Decoration of the constant K

X004
Change of the constant is the same as the device
MOV P K0 V5 number.
If X005 is ON, if V5=0, [K6+0=K6], content of
K0→V5 K6 is moved to D10.
X004 If V5=20, [K6+20=K26], content of K26 is
moved to D10.
MOV P K20 V5
Change of input and output relays (octal system
device number)
K10→V5
X005
MOV K6V5 D10

V5=0: K6 (K6+0 )→D10

V5=20: K26(K6+20)→D10

X010
When X, Y, KnX and KnY and other octal system device
MOV P K0 V3
number is executed for index change, content in the change
register of corresponding device number shall be plus after
K0→V3 octal system conversion.
X011
MOV P K8 V3
See the left figure, output Y7-Y0 with the instruction MOV
K8→V3 to change it into X7-X0, X17-X10 and X27-X20.
X012
MOVP K16 V3

K16→V3 The conversion is by octal system conversion through

X013 [X0+0=X0], [X0+8=X10] and [X0+16=X20], with the
device number, the input terminals are changed.
MOVP K2X0V3 K2Y0 Display case of current value of the timer

V3=0: X07~X00→Y7~Y0
V8=0: X17~X10→Y7~Y0
V16=0:X27~X20→Y7~Y0

M8000
According to Z0=0-9, then
BIN K1X000 Z0
5 T0Z0=T0-T9

(X003~X000)BCD→(Z0)BIN
X011 PLC
BCD T0Z0 K4Y000

(T0Z0)BIN→(Y017~Y000)BCD
According to Z0=0-9, then T0Z0=T0-T9

7-section code for display current value

of the timer, output Y017-Y000.

10
 5 Representation and executing
Change of operand
form of applied instructions

Decoration of instructions with restricted times of use

The object assembly number is decorated with index buffers and the program can be used to
change the object assembly number. As for instructions with restricted times of use, such method
has the same effect with programming the same instruction for several times.

X010
MOV K0 Z0 (K0) → (Z0) Pulse width determined by content of D10 is
output to Y000 or Y001.
X010
Such switching is determined by ON/OFF of
MOV K1 Z0 (K1) → (Z0)
X010
X011
PWM T0Z0 K4Y000 Y000Z0

Pulse width Pulse width Cycle Output number

The instruction F58 can execute the programming instruction one time. Without driving several
outputs at the same time, the controlled objects can be changed by changing the output numbers.
In addition, during the instruction executing, even Z is changed, the above switching is invalid. To
make better switching, please set condition of the drive instruction OFF one time.

Attentions:
z The 16-bit counter with index change can not be used as 32-bit counter. As results of index
change, for 32-bit counter, please add Z0-Z15 after the counter C200.
z V and Z self or bit specifying employs Kn, and n can not be changed. (K4M0Z0 is valid and
K0Z0M0 is invalid）
z Index change can not be executed for LD, AND, OUT and other PLC basic control
instructions and step chart instructions.

11
 5 Representation and executing
Change of operand
form of applied instructions

4 Specification of Constants K, H and E

K: Decimal H: Hexadecimal E: Real Number
When handling constants in a sequence program, use constant K (decimal), H (hexadecimal) or E
(floating point).
In peripheral equipment for programming, add “K” to a decimal number, “H” to hexadecimal
number and “E” to a floating point (real number) for operations associated with numeric values in
instructions. (Examples: K100 (decimal number), H64 (hexadecimal number) and E1.23 (or
E1.23+10) (real number))
The roles and functions of constants are described below.

Constant K (decimal number):

“K” indicates a decimal integer, and is mainly used to specify the set value of timers and counters
and numeric values as operands in applied instruction. (Example: K1234)
The decimal constant specification range is as follows:
- When word data (16 bits) is used … K-32768 to K32767
- When double data (32 bits) is used … K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647

Constant H (hexadecimal number):

“H” indicates a hexadecimal number, and is mainly used to specify numeric values a operands in
applied instructions. (Example: H1234)
When using digits 0 to 9, the bit status (1 or 0) of each bit is equivalent to the BCD code, so BCD
data can be specified also.
(Example: H1234 … When specifying BCD data, specify each digit of hexadecimal number in 0
to 9.)
The hexadecimal constant setting range is as follows:
- When word data (16 bits) is used … H0 to HFFFF (H0 to H9999 in the case of BCD
data)
- When double data (32 bits) is used … H0 to HFFFFFFFF (H0 to H99999999 in the case
of BCD data)

Constant E (real number):

“E” indicates a real num (floating point data), and is mainly used to specify numeric values as
operands in applied instructions. (Example: E1.234 or E1.234+3)
The real number setting range is from -1.0× 2128 to -1.0× 2 −126 , 0 and 1.0× 2 −126 to 1.0× 2128 .
In a sequence program, a real number can be specified in two methods, “normal expression” and

12
 5 Representation and executing
Change of operand
form of applied instructions

“exponent expression”.
- Normal expression: ….. Specify a numeric value as it is.
For example, specify “10.2345” in the form “E10.2345”
- Exponent expression: ... Specify a numeric value in the format “(numeric value) ×10 n ”.
For example, specify “1234” in the form “E1.234+3”.
“+3” in “E1.234+3” indicates “ 10 3 ”.

13
 List of applied
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

Chapter VI Applied Instruction

Interpretation
1 List of applied instruction
See the following table on types of applied instructions: form in accordance with function
sequences

Applied instruction Number of

16/32 P step
Classification
Instructi Symbol Instruction function Bit
16bit 32bit
on No.
Program 00 CJ Conditional jump 16 √ 3 ——
flow 01 CALL Sub-program call 16 √ 3 ——
02 SRET Sub-program return 16 1 ——
03 IRET Interruption return *1 1 ——
04 EI Interruption permitted *1 1 ——
05 DI Interruption inhibited *1 √ 1 ——
06 FEND Main program end *1 1 ——
07 WDT Timer *1 √ 1 ——
08 FOR Cycle loop start *1 3 ——
09 NEXT Cycle loop end *1 1 ——
Sending 10 CMP Comparison 16/ 32 √ 7 13
and 11 ZCP Inter-zone comparison 16/ 32 √ 9 17
compariso 12 MOV Sending 16/ 32 √
n Constant sent to storage device,
one character
Constant sent to storage device,
two characters
Storage device sent to storage 5 9
device, one character
Storage device sent to storage
device, two characters
Non-character or word/special
data range
13 SMOV Shift moving 16 √ 11 ——
14 CML Reverse moving 16/ 32 √ 5 9
15 BMOV Block moving 16 √ 7 ——
16 FMOV Multi-point moving 16/ 32 √ 7 13
17 XCH Exchange 16/ 32 √ 5 9
18 BCD BCD conversion 16/ 32 √ 5 9
19 BIN BIN conversion 16/ 32 √ 5 9
 List of applied
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

Applied instruction Number of

16/32 P step
Classification
Instructi Symbol Instruction function Bit
16bit 32bit
on No.
Arithmetic 20 ADD BIN addition 16/ 32 √ 7 13
21 SUB BIN subtraction 16/ 32 √ 7 13
22 MUL BIN multiple 16/ 32 √ 7 13
23 DIV BIN division 16/ 32 √ 7 13
24 INC BIN plus 1 16/ 32 √ 3 5
25 DEC BIN minus 1 16/ 32 √ 3 5
26 WAND WAND 16/ 32 √ 7 13
27 WOR WOR 16/ 32 √ 7 13
28 WXOR WXOR 16/ 32 √ 7 13
29 NEG NEG 16/ 32 √ 3 5
Cyclic 30 ROR Cyclic moving right 16/ 32 √ 5 9
shift 31 ROL Cyclic moving left 16/ 32 √ 5 9
32 RCR Carrying cyclic moving right 16/ 32 √ 5 9
33 RCL Carrying cyclic moving left 16/ 32 √ 5 9
34 SFTR Bit moving right 16 √ 9 ——
35 SFTL Bit moving left 16 √ 9 ——
36 WSFR Word shift right 16 √ 9 ——
37 WSFL Word shift left 16 √ 9 ——
38 SFWR Shift write 16 √ 7 ——
39 SFRD Shift read 16 √ 7 ——
Data 40 ZRST Batch return 16 √ 5 ——
processing 41 DECO Decoding 16 √ 7 ——
42 ENCO Coding 16 √ 7 ——
43 SUM ON bit number 16/ 32 √ 5 9
44 BON Check state of specified bit 16/ 32 √ 7 13
45 MEAN Mean 16/ 32 √ 7 13
46 ANS Signal alarm setting 16 7 ——
47 ANR Signal alarm resetting 16 √ 1 ——
48 SQR Square 16/ 32 √ 5 9
49 FLT BIN integral— floating-point 16/ 32 √
5 9
number
High-spee 50 REF Refreshing of input and output 16 √ 5 ——
d 52 MTR Matrix input 16 9 ——
processing 53 HSCS High speed counting setting 32 —— 13
54 HSCR High speed counting resetting 32 —— 13
55 HSZ High speed counting inter-zone 32
—— 17
comparison
56 SPD Pulse density 16 7 ——
 List of applied
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

Applied instruction Number of

16/32 P step
Classification
Instructi Symbol Instruction function Bit
16bit 32bit
on No.
57 PLSY Pulse output 16/32 7 13
58 PWM Pulse adjustment 16 7 ——
59 PLSR Pulse output with acceleration 16/32
9 17
and deceleration
Convenient 60 IST Initializing state 16 7 ——
instructions 61 SER Data searching 16/32 9 17
62 ABSD Absolute means for cam control 16/32 9 17
63 INCD Increment means for cam control 16 9 ——
64 TTMR Demonstration teaching timer 16 5 ——
65 STMR Special timer 16 7 ——
66 ALT Alternative output 16 √ 3 ——
67 RAMP Slope signal 16 9 ——
68 ROTC Rotating working bench control 16 9 ——
69 SORT Data arrangement 16 11 ——
Peripheral 70 TKY Digit key input 16/32 7 13
equipment 71 HKY 16-key input 16/32 9 17
input and 72 DSW Digit switch 16 9 ——
output 73 SEGD 7-section decoding 16 √ 5 ——
74 SEGL 7-section display as per time 16 7 ——
75 ARWS Arrow switch 16 9 ——
76 ASC ASCII code 16 11 ——
77 PR ASCII code printing output 16 5 ——
Peripheral 80 RS Serial data sending 16 11 ——
Equipment 81 PRUN Octal code bit sending 16/32 √ 5 9
SER 82 ASIC HEX-ASCII conversion 16 √ 7 ——
83 HEX ASCII-HEX conversion 16 √ 7 ——
84 CCD Check code 16 √ 7 ——
85 VRRD Potential value read 16 √ 5 ——
86 VRSC Potential scale 16 √ 5 ——
87 MBUS MODBUS 16 11 ——
88 PID PID control loop 16 9 ——
89 EPSC Scale of extended card 16 √ 9 ——
9 110 ECMP Floating-point comparison 32 √ —— 13
Floating-p 111 EZCP Floating-point inter-zone 32 √
—— 17
oint comparison
computati 112 EMOV Moving of floating-point number 32 √ —— 9
on 118 EBCD Binary floating-point – Decimal 32 √
—— 9
floating-point conversion
 List of applied
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

Applied instruction Number of

16/32 P step
Classification
Instructi Symbol Instruction function Bit
16bit 32bit
on No.
119 EBIN Decimal floating-point – Binary 32 √
—— 9
floating-point conversion
120 EADD Floating-point addition 32 √ —— 13
121 ESUB Floating-point subtraction 32 √ —— 13
122 EMUL Floating-point multiple 32 √ —— 13
123 EDIV Floating-point division 32 √ —— 13
124 EXP Exponent arithmetic computation 32 √ —— 9
125 LOGE Natural logarithm computation 32 √ —— 9
126 LOG10 Common logarithm computation 32 √ —— 9
127 ESQR Floating-point square root 32 √ —— 9
128 ENEG Binary floating-point numbers 32 √
—— 5
NEG computation
129 INT Binary floating-point –BIN 16/32 √
5 9
integral conversion
130 SIN SIN 32 √ —— 9
131 COS COS 32 √ —— 9
132 TAN TAN 32 √ —— 9
133 ASIN ASIN 32 √ —— 9
134 ACOS ACOS 32 √ —— 9
135 ATAN ATAN 32 √ —— 9
136 RAD Radian computation 32 √ —— 9
137 DEG Floating-point radian－>Angle 32 √ —— 9
147 SWAP Upper and lower character 16/32 √
3 5
conversion
156 ZRN Origin return 16/32 9 17
Location 157 PLSV Pulse output with variable width 16/32 7 13
158 DRVI Relative location 16/32 9 17
159 DRVA Absolute location 16/32 9 17
Time 160 TCMP Clock data comparison 16 √ 11 ——
computation 161 TZCP Clock inter-zone comparison 16 √ 9 ——
162 TADD Clock data addition 16 √ 7 ——
163 TSUB Clock data subtraction 16 √ 7 ——
166 TRD Read RTC data 16 √ 3 ——
167 TWR Set RTC data 16 √ 3 ——
Peripheral 170 GRY Decimal system-Grey code 16/32 √
5 9
equipment conversion
171 GBIN Grey code- Decimal system 16/32 √
5 9
conversion
Peripheral 188 CRC CRC check 16 √ 7
 List of applied
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

Applied instruction Number of

16/32 P step
Classification
Instructi Symbol Instruction function Bit
16bit 32bit
on No.
communic 190 DTLK Data Link 16 3 ——
ation 191 RMIO Remote I/O 16 3 ——
192 TEXT OP07/08 text instruction 16 √ 7 ——
193 DTLK2 Data Link2 16 7 ——
Contact-po 224 LD (S1)=(S2) 16/32 5 9
int 225 LD (S1)>(S2) 16/32 5 9
compariso 226 LD (S1)<(S2) 16/32 5 9
n 228 LD (S1)≠(S2 16/32 5 9
229 LD (S1)≦(S2 16/32 5 9
230 LD (S1)≧(S2 16/32 5 9
232 AND (S1)=(S2) 16/32 5 9
233 AND (S1)>(S2) 16/32 5 9
234 AND (S1)<(S2) 16/32 5 9
236 AND (S1)≠(S2 16/32 5 9
237 AND (S1)≦(S2 16/32 5 9
238 AND (S1)≧(S2 16/32 5 9
240 OR (S1)=(S2) 16/32 5 9
241 OR (S1)>(S2) 16/32 5 9
242 OR (S1)<(S2) 16/32 5 9
244 OR (S1)≠(S2 16/32 5 9
245 OR (S1)≦(S2 16/32 5 9
246 OR (S1)≧(S2 16/32 5 9
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F00~F09 Program flow

Program chart
Function No. Memory view Name Page
00 CJ Conditional jump 1
01 CALL Call sub-program 3
02 SRET Sub-program return 3
03 IRET Interruption return 5
04 EI Interruption permitted 5
05 DI Interruption inhibited 5
06 FEND Main program end 10
07 WDT Monitor timer 11
08 FOR Cycle start 12
09 NEXT Cycle end 12

0
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F00 CJ Conditional jump

F
CJ Conditional jump
0 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

Instruction format:

CJ P
P: destination symbol of conditional jump
When PLC is used, if some of the program does not need executing every time, such instruction
can be used to shorten the time of executing.

For instance,

X000
CJ P

Range of point (P) is: P0~P255 (TP03 M/H type)，P0~P127 (TP03 SR type). Of them, P63 refers
to END, and do not program it. Otherwise, it may lead to error.
Index change can be done for the pointer number. See the figure below:
X000
CJ P0Z0

It is jumped to (0+ (Z0)) for executing.

During executing of conditional jump, description of the element actions:
1. Y, M and S keep the state before jump;
2. 10ms and 100ms timers will suspend timing;
3. 1ms timer T246~T249 will continue timing and the output contact-joint will act normally .
4. Timer T192~T199 for executing subprogram will continue timing and the output contact-joint
will act normally;
5. High-speed counter during timing will continue counting and the output contact-joint will act
normally;
6. General counter will stop counting;
7. If clear instruction for the integrating counter and timer is drive before jump, during jump
executing, it is at clearing stage;
8. General applied instructions will not be executed.
9. Applied instructions during executing FNC53(DHSCS), FNC54(DHSCR), FNC55 (DHSZ),
FNC56 (SPD), FNC57 (PLSY)and FNC58 (PWM) will continue executing.

1
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

For example:
X000
CJ P8

X 001
Y 001
X 002
M1
X 003
S1
X 004
T1 K 10
X005
R ST T246
X006
T246 K1000

X007
R ST C0

X010
C0 K20

X011
MOV K3 D0
X000
P8 CJ P9

X 012
Y 001

X013
P9 R ST T246

R ST C0

The following table describes results of state change of the element during program jump:
State of contact-joint Action of contact-joint
Element Action of coil during jump
before jump during jump
X001, X002, X003 OFF X001, X002, X003 ON Y001, M1, S1 OFF
Y, M, S
X001, X002, X003 ON X001, X002, X003 OFF Y001, M1, S1 ON
X4 OFF X4 ON The timer dos not act
10ms,100ms
Timing stops, it continues
timer X4 ON X4 OFF
after X0 OFF
X5, X6 OFF X6 ON The timer does not act
1ms timer Timing stops, it continues
X5 OFF, X6 ON X6 OFF
after X0 OFF
X007, X010 OFF X010 ON The counter does not count
Counter Counting stop, after X0 OFF,
X007 OFF, X010 ON X010 OFF
it continues counting
Applied instruction does not
X011 OFF X011 ON
Applied execute
instructions The jumped applied
X011 ON X011 OFF
instruction does not execute
z Y001 becomes dual-coil, no matter jump inside or outside, it is processed as general
dual-coil.
z When reset instructions of the accumulated timer and counter jump outside, reset of the
timing coil and counting coil (clearing of contact-joint recovery and current value) are valid.

2
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F01 CALL Call sub-program

F
CALL Call sub-program
1 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

Instruction format:

CALL P
Range of pointer (P): P0~P255(TP03 M/H type)，P0~P127(TP03 SR type). Of them, P63 refers to
END, which can not be used as pointer of FNC01 (CALL). Index change is available for pointer
number.

F02 SRET Sub-program return

F
SRET Sub-program return
2
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

Instruction format:

SRET
For sub-program return, there is no applicable device.

Example 1:
X000
CALL P10
Main program

Mark FEND
P 10

Sub pragram

SRET

END

z When X000 is ON, the instruction CALL is executed, and it is executed after jumping to P10.
Executing the sub-program here, when the instruction SRET is executed, it is returned to the
original step.
z The pointer program shall be written after the instruction FEND.
z When it is used with the instruction CJ, the same number P can not be used.

3
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

Example 2:
X001
CALLP P11

FEND
Mark
P11

Sub-program
CALL P12

SRET 1
Mark
P12

Sub-program
SRET 2

END
z After X001=OFF→ON, the instruction CALL P P11 is executed one time, it jumps to P11.
z In the sub-program of P11, if the instruction CALL P12 is executed, sub-program of P12 is
executed. After executing the instruction SRET, it returns to sub-program of P11, then the
instruction SRET is executed to return to the main program.
z There are 16 layers of nesting in maximum.
z Timer in the sub-program employs T192~T199 or T246~T249.

4
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F03 IRET Interruption return

F
IRET Interruption return
3
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

F04 EI Interruption permitted

F
EI Interruption permitted
4
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

F05 DI Interruption inhibited

F
DI Interruption inhibited
5
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

The above 3 instructions are single instructions without drive contact-joints.

z Normally, the PLC is under interruption inhibition. If interruption is required, the instruction
FNC4 (EI) can be used for interruption.
z The pointer for interruption (I***) must be marked and programmed after the instruction.
FEND.
z Types of interruption:
1. Input interruption of external signal
2. Interruption of timer
3. Interruption of high speed counter
It is described below.
Input interruption of external signal
X000~X005 input signals are employed to execute routine program for interruption, applicable for
pickup of adjustment control and short time pulse.
See the following table on number and action of interruption pointer of 6 points.
Ix0x

0: Interruption of falling edge 1: Interruption of rising edge

X000~X005 are corresponding 0~5.

5
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

Pointer number Instruction of interruption

Input
Interruption of rising edge Interruption of falling edge inhibition
X000 I001 I000 M8050
X001 I101 I100 M8051
X002 I201 I200 M8052
X003 I301 I300 M8053
X004 I401 I400 M8054
X005 I501 I500 M8055

z The pointer number can not be repeatedly. As for the same outputs, the corresponding fall
edge interruption and falling edge interruption numbers can not be used for the input.
z If M8050~M8055 is ON, interruption to corresponding input is inhibited.
For example: the interruption processing must be executed for latest input information.

EI

FEND

I 101 M8000
REF X010 K8
X010
SET Y001

X010
RST Y001

IRET

END

z Rising edge testing of X001is ON, routine program for interruption and input refreshing are
executed. According to state of ON/OFF of X010, set Y001 or reset.

Interruption of the timer

It is not affected by scan cycle of the controller and it executes the interruption sub-program
within an interval of 10ms~99ms. Under the situations of long computation cycle of the main
program, the program to be determined needs a long time to process; or in the sequential control
scan, it is appropriate for executing the program with an interval.

See the following table on numbers and actions of interruption pointers of corresponding 3 points:

6
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

Ixxx

10~99 (ms)
6,7,8

Pointer No. Interruption cycle Instruction for interruption inhibition

I6xx M8056
xx：integral of 10~99, representing
I7xx M8057
interval of interruption
I8xx M8058

z Pointers (I6,I7,I8) can not be repeatedly.

z Set M8056~M8058 ON, and interruption is not allowed for corresponding timer.

For example: 1 is added on each 10ms, and compare with setting values.

Program
step EI
0
X000
SET M3

FEND

M3
I610 INC D0

X000
Interruption LD= K1000 D0 RST M3
indicator

IRET

END

z After each 10ms, 1 is added on current value of D0.

z When current value of D0 reaches 1000, M3 resets.

Interruption of high-speed counter

The interruption of current value of the high-speed counter is used with the comparison setting of
FNC53 (DHSCS). When current value of the high-speed counter reaches specified values, the
sub-program is interrupted.

See the following table on interruption pointer numbers and actions of corresponding 6 points.

7
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

I0x0

1~6

Pointer
Instruction for interruption inhibition
number
I010
I020
I030
M8059
I040
I050
I060

Example
Program
step EI
0

M8000
C255 K2,147,483,647

D HSCS K1000 C255 I010

Indicator number for

FEND
specifying interruption

Interruption
I010 routine program

Interruption
indicator
Interruption
IRET
return

END

z For the coil driving the high speed counter, it is used to specify the interruption pointer
in the instruction FNC (DHSCS).
z When current value of C255 varies from 999~1000, sub-program interruption is
executed.
z As for current values of the high speed counter, if active/inactive control can be done for
the output relay or auxiliary relay, the instructions FNC53(DHSCS), FNC54(DHSCR),
FNC55(DHSZ) can be used to simply the program.

Several interruption inputs

8
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

z In case of several interruptions, the earlier interruption shall be prior. In case of

occurrence simultaneously, the smaller pointer number shall be prior.
z During executing of interruption of routine program, other interruptions are not allowed.
Information of interruption during the period shall be kept and it will be executed after
the routine program and 8 interruptions in maximum.

Pulse width of input interruption

z If external signal is used for executing input interruption, ON or OFF signal with pulse
width more than 50us shall be input.

Recovery of input and output

z During interruption processing, when controlling the input relay and output relay, the
recovery instruction FNC (REF) and output relays can be used to obtain latest input
information or output computation results immediately to control without affecting by
the computation cycle.

Attentions
z As the number of input relay for interruption pointer, please do not use the applied
instructions for high speed counter, pulse density and etc. with the same input range for
repeated numbers.
z Please use the timer T192-T199 for routine program for timer in the sub-program and
routine program interruption. If general timer is used, timing can not be performed.
When 1ms accumulated timer is used, pay attention to it.

9
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F06 FEND Main program end

F
FEND Main program end
6
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

The instruction is an independent instruction without driving contact-joint, representing end of the
main program.
The instruction has the same effect with the instruction END, executing output processing, input
processing, refreshing of monitor timer and returning to step 0 of the program.

Main process program Main process program

X010=OFF

X011=ON

X011=OFF
X010 X011
CJ P20 CALL P21

Main process program Main process program

FEND FEND
P20
X010=ON

P21
Main process program Main process program

FEND I000 Main interruption routine

program

END END

z The instructions CALL and CALL P must be written after the instruction FEND, with the
instruction SRET to end the sub-program. The interruption program must be written after the
instruction FEND, with the instruction IRET to end the interruption program.
z After executing the instructions CALL and CALL P and before executing the instructions
SRET and IRET; or after executing the instruction FOR and before executing the instruction
NEXT; if the instruction FEND is executed, it may lead to abnormal program.
z If there are several FEND instruction, the sub-program and interruption program shall be
written between the last FEDN and END instructions.

10
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F07 WDT Monitor timer

F
WDT Monitor timer
7 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

The instruction is used for refreshing of the monitor timer to avoid error of the controller caused
by delay of the scan cycle.
For example: If the scan time exceeds specified values, PLC will stop operation. Under the
circumstances, the instruction WDT will be inserted into appropriate program step to refresh the
timer. Value of the monitor timer is set by D8000, with range of 200ms-1600ms.
X000
WDT P
One scan
X000
WDT Each scan

125ms program

250ms
program WDT

125ms program
END
END

If value of the monitor timer is set at 200ms, when scan time of the program is 250ms, it is divided
into two parts. Insert WDT into it, and the first part and second part of the program is less than
200ms.
z Testing time of the monitoring timer can be changed by rewriting content of D8000, see the
following figure:

M8002
MOV K300 D8000

WDT
z When the system is connected to many station locating, cam switch, ID interface, link,
analog quantity and other special extended equipment, when the controller runs, initializing
time of the buffing storage device will be extended to cause delay of the scan time. Besides,
when executing several FROM/TO instructions for sending data to several buffing storage
devices, the time will be delayed. Under the circumstances, it may cause abnormality of
timeout monitor timer, at this time, input the above program near the starting step to extend
time of the monitor timer.

11
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F08 FOR Cycle start

F
FOR Cycle start S1·
8
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

FOR S·

F09 NEXT Cycle end

F
NEXT Cycle end
9
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z

The instruction is a single instruction with driving contact-joint and used with FNC08(FOR).
After the instruction executes the instruction between FOR and NEXT for n times (specifying
by the instruction FOR), then steps after NEXT can be processed. It is valid when n=1~32,767,
when n= -32,767~0, it is processed as 1.
Example:

FOR K4

FOR D0Z0

X010
CJ P22

A B C
FOR K1X000

NEXT 1
P22
NEXT 2

NEXT 3

z After [c] program executed 4 times, it is moved to program after the instruction (3) of NEXT;
if [c] program is executed, content of the data register D0Z0 is 6m the [B] program executes
6 times; the instruction CJ can be used to skip program between FOR~NEXT, like
X010=ON.
z There are 16 layers of nesting, and FOR~NEXT must be in couple, otherwise, it may lead to
error.
z Too many cycles may lead to delay of the scan cycle, which may cause error of the monitor
timer and please pay attention.

12
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F10~F19 Data moving and comparison

Data moving and comparison

Function No. Memory view Name Page
10 CMP Data comparison 1
11 ZCP Zone comparison 2
12 MOV Date moving 3
13 SMOV Bit moving 4
14 CML Contrary moving 5
15 BMOV Batch moving 6
16 FMOV Multi-point moving 7
17 XCH Exchange 8
18 BCD BIN→BCD 9
19 BIN BCD→BIN 10

0
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F10 CMP Data comparison

F
CMP Data comparison S1· S2· D·
10 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

CMP S1· S2· D·

S1·: Comparison value 1

S2·: Comparison value 2
D·: Comparison result, occupy continuous 3 points.
For example: compare the computation elements S1· and S2·, the results are stored in D·.
X 001
CM P K 20 D 10 M 10

M 10
K 20>Current value of D 10， M 10 O N

M 11
Current value of K 20=D 10， M 11 O N

M 12
Current value of K 20<D 10， M 12 O N

Compare S1·/S2· with the integrals with symbols.

The destination address occupies the following two. If Y001 is specified, Y002 and Y003
occupied automatically.
The 32-bit instruction destination operand can not specify V, and it can only specify Z. When Zn is
specified, (Vn, Zn) make up 32-bit data. (The same for the following applied instruction if there is
no special interpretation).
When the instruction is not executed, the destination data is not affected.
To clear the comparison results, the reset instruction or overall instruction shall be used.

X000 X000
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2

RST M1

RST M2

1
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F11 ZCP Zone comparison

F
ZCP Zone comparison S1· S2· S· D·
11 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

ZCP S1· S2· S· D·

S1·: Lower limit of zone comparison

S2·: Upper limit of zone comparison
S·: Comparison value
D·: Comparison result, occupy continuous 3 points
The comparison value S· compares the lower limit value S1· and upper limit value, and the
comparison result is stored in D·.
When the lower limit value S1·> upper limit value S2·, and the lower limit S1· can be used for
comparison of upper and lower limits.
For example,
X001
ZCP K20 K200 C10 M10

M10
Current value of C10<K20, M10 ON

M11
K20≤ Current value of C10 ≤K200, M11 ON

M12
Current value of C10>K200, M12 ON

Data of S1·, S2· and S0· shall be compared by integral with symbols.
S1·≤S2· is required. When S2·<S1·, S2· is computed as S1·.
The destination address occupies 2 points automatically, if M0 is specified, it occupies M1 and M2.
When the instruction is not executed, the destination data is not affected.
If the results need to be cleared, the instructions RST or ZRST are used;
X000 X000
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2

RST M1

RST M2

2
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F12 MOV Date moving

F
MOV Date moving S· D·
12 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

MOV S· D·
S·: Data source
D·: Destination address of data moving
Content of S· is directly sent to D·, when the instruction is not executed, content of D· will not be
changed.
The 32-bit instruction employs DMOV instruction, and the operand occupies 2 characters
automatically.
The 16-bit element information transmission, when the instruction is executed, 4 bit elements of
X10-X13 are sent to Y10~Y13, which has the same function with the following program.
X000
MOV K1X10 K1Y10

X10
Y10
X11
Y11
X12
Y12
X13
Y13

3
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F13 SMOV Bit moving

F
SMOV Bit moving S· m1 m2 D· n
13 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

SMOV S· m1 m2 D· n

S·: data source

m1: start bit number of data source.
m2: number of sent data source
D·: destination address of data moving
n: Start number of bit of destination address
m1/ m2/ n：1~4
For example:

SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3

When M8168=OFF,
BIN code of D10 Conversion data
of BCD of
D10 converted into BCD 103 102 101 100 source data, the
code 2nd bit from the
4th bit is sent to
the 3 bit of the
BIN code of D20 103 102 101 100 [Link]
BCD value of
D10 exceeds
Converted into BID code 0~9,999, it will
automatically be error.

When M8168=ON:
BIN code of D10 BCD code is not
executed. 4 bits
are taken as one
BIN code of D20 unit for bit
moving.

4
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F14 CML Contrary moving

F
CML Contrary moving S· D·
14 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

CML S· D·
S· : data source
D· : destination address of data transmission
Content of S· is sent to D· contrarily (0→1, 1→0), if the content is the constant K, which is
converted into BIN value automatically.
For instance,

CML D10 K1Y000

X000

D10 1 0 1 0

Do not change 0 1 0 1
Y0 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X001 X001
OUT M0 OUT M0
X002 X002
OUT M1 OUT M1
X003 X003
OUT M2 OUT M2

X004 X004
OUT M3 OUT M3

The above figure is equal to

M8000
CML K1X001 K1M000

5
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F15 BMOV Batch moving

F
BMOV Batch moving S· D· n
15 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * * * *

Instruction format:

BMOV S· D· n

S·: start address of data source

D·: destination address of data moving
n: Length of moving block (n<=512)
The data of point n starting with specified device by the source starting address is transmitted to
device of point n starting with devices specified by goal address. (If it exceeds number of range of
the device, it will be transmitted to permissible scope).
See the following figure on the moving range. To avoid rewriting before moving, it is
automatically moving as per the sequence 1-3.

X000 D20 1 D19

BMOV D20 D19 K3 D21 2 D20
D22 3 D21

X000
D20 3 D21
BMOV D20 D21 K3
D21 2 D22
D22 1 D23

Set M8024 ON, when executing the instruction, it rotates contrarily with the moving
direction.

X000 M8024=ON
M8024 D5 1 D10
D6 2 D11
D7 3 D12
BMOV D5 D10 K3
M8024=OFF
X000
D5 1 D10
M8024
D6 2 D11
D7 3 D12

6
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F16 FMOV Multi-point moving

F
FMOV Multi-point moving S· D· n
16 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

FMOV S· D· n

The multi-point moving instruction for the same data

n: n<=512
Content of S· is sent to the device beginning with n specified by D·. Content of device at point n is
the same. When it is beyond range of the destination device, it will be moved to possible range.
Example:

X000
FMOV D1 D10 K3

Executing results: D1----------------->D10

D1----------------->D11
D1----------------->D12

Attentions
z The 16-bit instruction destination operand can not specify V and Z, the 32-bit instruction
destination operand can not specify V, and it can only specify Z. When Zn is specified, (Vn,
Zn) make up 32-bit data.

7
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F17 XCH Exchange

F
XCH Exchange D1· D2·
17 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D1· * * * * * * * * *
D2· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

XCH D1· D2·

D1·: Exchange data 1

D2·: Exchange data 2
Specified content of D1· and D2· can be exchanged.
The instruction is pulse instruction XCHP in general.
For instance,
X000
XCHP D10 D20

D10 100 10 D20

D20 10 100 D10

Please note that, when continuous executing instruction is used, data exchange is performed
during each scan cycle.
When M8160= ON, D1·, D2· are the same device, exchange the low 8-bit and high 8-bit, the same
for the 32-bit instruction.
When M8160= ON, D1·, D2· are different, the error mark is M8067 ON, D8067 writes error code,
the instruction will not execute.
When M8160= ON, the executing function is the same as the instruction F147(SWAP).

8
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F18 BCD BIN→BCD conversion

F
BCD BIN→BCD conversion S· D·
18 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

BCD S· D·

S·: data source

D·: Storage location
Function: data source S· executes conversion from BIN to BCD, which is stored in D·.
For 16-bit instruction, if the conversion result exceeds 0-9999, it is error.
For 32-bit instruction, if the conversion result exceeds 0~99999999, it is error.
In case of error, M8067= ON, D8067 writes error code, the instruction will not execute.

6 7 8 9

BCD → BIN F19

PLC

BIN → BCD F18

Arithmetic operation, increasing, decreasing and other instructions are executed in BIN in PLC.
When PLC reads data of external BCD digital switch, the conversion sending instruction
FNC19(BCD→BIN) is used; and when it outputs to BCD seven-section display, the conversion
sending instruction FNC18 (BIN→ BCD)is used.
When special instructions like FNC72(DSW), FNC74(SEGL), FNC75(ARWS) are used, it will
execute BCD/BIN conversion automatically.

9
 Sending and
6 Applied instruction interpretation comparison

F19 BIN BCD→BIN Conversion

F
BIN BCD→BIN Conversion S· D·
19 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

BIN S· D·

S·: Data source

D·: Storage location
Function: content of data source S· (BCD: 0~9999 or 0~99999999) is converted into BIN format,
and it is stored in D·.
If S· is not BCD code, error, M8067= ON, D8067 writes error code, and the instruction will not
execute.
z It is used when PLC reads setting value of BCD digital switch. When data source is not BCD,
it will be error.
z For the constant K is converted into binary system automatically, so it can not be the device
for the instruction.

10
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F20~F29 Arithmetic operation

Arithmetic operation
Function No. Memory view Name Page
20 ADD Addition computation 1
21 SUB Subtraction computation 2
22 MUL Multiple computation 3
23 DIV Division computation 4
24 INC Increasing computation 5
25 DEC Decreasing computation 5
26 WAND WAND computation 6
27 WOR WOR computation 6
28 WXOR WXOR computation 6
29 NEG NEG computation 7

0
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F20 ADD Addition computation

F
ADD Addition computation S1· S2· D·
20 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

ADD S1· S2· D·

S1· : Augend
S2· : Addend
D· : Sum
Symbol Zero M8020
bit Borrowing M8021
Carrying M8022

Function: S1· plus S2· with symbols, and the result is stored in D1.
If the computation result is 0, M8020 sets.
If the computation result is less than the minimum value, M8021is set.
If the computation result is more than the maximum value, M8022 is set.
Result of 16-bit computation is between -32,768 ~ +32,767.
Result of 32-bit computation is between-2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647.
z The two data sources are added in BIN and sent to the destination data zone, and the highest bit
of the data is the positive (0) or negative (1) symbol bit, therefore, algebraic addition shall apply.
(5+(-8)=-3)
z When the computation result is 0, the zero flag sign acts. When the computation result exceeds
32,767(16-bit computation) or 2,147,483,647(32-bit computation), the carrying flag sign will act.
(Refer to the next page). If the computation result is less than -32,768(16-bit computation) or
-2,147,483,648(32-bit computation), the negative flag sign will act. (Refer to the next page)
z For 32-bit computation, lower 16-bit element of Word element shall be specified and upper Word
of specified number is used. To avoid repeated number, even number is used for specifying
elements.
z Please specify the same number for the data source and destination data zone. If the continuous
executing instruction (ADD,D ADD) is used, plus of each scan time is changing, and please pay
attention to it.
X000
ADD P D1 K1 D1

z See the sequential control program in the above figure, when X000 is changed from OFF-ON, 1
is added on value of D1, which is similar with the following instruction INC P.

1
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F21 SUB Subtraction computation

F
SUB Subtraction computation S1· S2· D·
21 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

SUB S1· S2· D·

S1· : Minuend
S2· : Subtrahend
D· : Difference

Data in S1·and S2· are subtracted in BIN, and the result in D·.
For the highest bit of the data, 0 represents positive, 1 represents negative and algebraic subtraction is
executed.

Example:
X000
SUB D1 D2 D3

z When X000 is ON, content of minuend D1 minus content of subtrahend D2, and the difference is
stored in D3.
z Mark action, specifying method of 32-bit computation element, difference of the continuous
executing and pulse executing and etc. are the same with the instruction ADD in previous page.
z See the following on relation of actions and values.

Zero mark Zero mark Zero mark

-2、-1、0、-32,768 -1、0、1 32,767、0、1、2

Misposition The highest The highest

mark bit is 1 bit is 0 Carrying mark

Zero mark
Zero mark Zero mark

-2、-1、0、-2,147,483,648 -1、0、1 2,147,483,647、0、1、2

Zero mark
Mis-poistion
Carrying mark
mark

2
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F22 MUL Multiple computation

F
MUL Multiple computation S1· S2· D·
22 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

MUL S1· S2· D·

S1· : Multiplicand
S2· : Multiplicator
D· : Product
Data in S1· and S2· are multiplied in BIN, and the result is stored in D·.
For the highest bit symbol of data, 0 represents positive and 1 represents negative, and algebraic
multiplication is executed.

<16-bit computation >

X000
MUL D0 D2 D4

z The product computed from specified content of the data element is stored in specified element
zone (the lower side), meanwhile, it occupies the upper element to make up 32-bit data. See the
above figure, when D0)=8,(D2)=9, (D5,D4)=72.
z For the highest bit of the result, 0 for positive and 1 for negative.
z When D· is element, bit specifying for K1~K8 is required. When K4 is specified, low 16-bit of
the product can be obtained.

<32-bit computation >

X000
D MUL D0 D2 D4

z See the figure below: (D1,D0)=8,(D3,D2)=9, (D7,D6,D5,D4)=72

z For 32-bit computation, if the result storage element is bit, the result is only lower position
32-bit and there is no upper position 32-bit and the Word element can be used for computation.
z When Word element is used, the computation result is stored in 64-bit, therefore, when Word
element is used, the computation result is stored in 64-bit data and the result can not be viewed.
z D· can not specify Z element.

3
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F23 DIV Division computation

F
DIV Division computation S1· S2· D·
23 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

DIV S1· S2· D·

S1· : Dividend
S2· : Divisor
D· : Quotient
Data in S1· and S2· are divided by in, with result stored in D·.
For the highest bit symbol of the data, 0 represents positive, 1 represents negative and algebraic
division is carried out.
<16-bit computation >
X000
DIV D0 D2 D4

z See the figure above: D0 is the dividend, D2 is divisor, D4 stores the quotient by the
computation and D5 stores the residual by the computation.

<32-bit computation >

X000
D DIV D0 D2 D4

z See the figure below, (D1,D0) are dividends, (D3,D2_are divisors,(D5,D4)store the quotient by
the computation and (D7,D6) store the residual by the computation.
z D· can not specify Z element.

Note:
z When the divisor is 0, it may cause error and the instruction will not be executed D8067=6706.
z When D· is specified as bit element, residual can not be obtained.
z The uppermost of the quotient and residual is the symbol for positive (0) and negative (0). When
the quotient is negative, any of the dividend and divisor is negative; if the residual is negative,
the dividend is negative.

4
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F24 INC Increasing computation

F
INC Increasing computation D·
24 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
Instruction format:

INC D·

z The instruction is of pulse instruction in general. Otherwise, when the instruction is executed, 1 is
added on each scan cycle D·, so please pay attention to it.
z For 16-bit computation, if 1 is added on +32,767, it becomes -32,768, and the mark does not act.
For 32-bit computation, if 1 is added on +2,147,483,647, it becomes -2,147,483,648, and the
mark does not act.

F25 DEC Decreasing computation

F
DEC Decreasing computation D·
25 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
Instruction format:

DEC D·

z The instruction is of pulse instruction in general. Otherwise, when the instruction is executed, 1 is
subtracted from each scan cycle D·, please pay attention to it.
z For 16-bit computation, if 1 is subtracted from -32,768, it becomes +32,767, the mark does not
act.
For 32-bit computation, if 1 is subtracted from -2,147,483,648, it becomes +2,147,483,647, the
mark does not act.
<Application case>
X010
MOV P K0 Z0

M1

X011
BCD P C 0Z0 K4Y000

INC P Z0

CMP K10 Z0 M0

z When current values of the counters C0~C9 are converted for BCD, it is output to K4Y000.
z Resetting input X010 is executed in advance to clear Z0.
z When X011 is ON one time, it outputs current values of C0, C1…C9.

5
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F26 AND WAND computation

F
WAND WAND computation S1· S2· D·
26 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

WAND S1· S2· D·

F27 OR WOR computation

F
WOR WOR computation S1· S2· D·
27 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

WOR S1· S2· D·

F28 XOR WXOR computation

F W
WXOR WXOR computation S1· S2· D·
28 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

WXOR S1· S2· D·

S1· : Data source 1

S2· : Data source 2
D· : Computation result

6
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F29 NEG NEG computation

F
NEG NEG computation D·
29 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

NEG D·

z Reverse each bit of the content specified by D·, 1 is added on them, and the result is stored in D·.
z The instruction is of pulse instruction. The continuous executing instruction will execute the
instruction after each scan cycle and please pay attention to it.
z When the instruction is used, the corresponding absolute value of negative BIN value shall be
obtained.
Note: after computation is computed for -32,768, it is-32,768.

Absolute value processing of negative value of applied loop 1

M8000
BON D10 M0 K15
M0
NEG P D10

When 15th of D10 is 1, M0 is set ON.

When M0 is ON, complement code for D10.

Absolute value processing of subtraction of applied loop 2

X000
CMP D10 D20 M10

M10
SUB D10 D20 D30
M11

M12
SUB D20 D10 D30

Even complement code is not used for the above loop, D30 represents absolute value of the difference
in subtraction.

7
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F30~F39 Rotating and shifting

Rotating and shifting

Function No. Memory view Name Page
30 ROR Cyclic shifting right 1
31 ROL Cyclic shifting left 1
32 RCR Cyclic shifting right with
3
carrying
33 RCL Cyclic shifting left with
3
carrying
34 SFTR Bit moving right 5
35 SFTL Bit moving left 5
36 WSFR Word shifting right 7
37 WSFL Word shifting left 7
38 SFWR Shift write 9
39 SFRD Shift read 10

0
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F 30 ROR Cyclic shifting right

F
ROR Cyclic shifting right D· n
30 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

ROR D· n

F31 ROL Cyclic shifting left

F
ROL Cyclic shifting left D· n
31 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *
Instruction format:

ROL D· n

16-bit instruction n≤16; 32-bit instruction n≤32

The instruction for each bit of 16-bit or 32-bit data for left and right gyrations
Left gyration Right gyration

X000 X000
ROL P D0 K4 ROR P D0 K4

Left gyration Right gyration

Upper Lower Upper Lower
position position position position

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
※ ※

M8022
M8022
Carry
Carry

Upper After one execution Lower Upper After one execution Lower
position position position position
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
※ ※

1 M8022
M8022 0
※ ※

Instruction interpretation: when X000 is Instruction interpretation: when X000 is

Changed from OFF to ON, K4-bit left gyration is changed from OFF to ON, K4-bit right gyration is
executed and the last bit is stored in the carrying executed and the last bit is stored in the carrying
flag sign M8022. flag sign M8022.

1
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

z The continuous executing instruction will gyrate after each scan cycle and please pay attention to
it.
z It is the same for the 32-bit instruction.
z When bit is used to specify the element, only K4 (16-bit instruction) and K8 (32-bit instruction)
are effective (Such as K4Y010 and K8M0)

2
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F32 RCR Cyclic shifting right with carrying

F
RCR Cyclic shifting right with carrying D· n
32 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

RCR D· n

F33 RCL Cyclic shifting left with carrying

F
RCL Cyclic shifting left with carrying D· n
33 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

RCL D· n

16-bit instruction n≤16; 32-bit instruction n≤32

The left or right gyration instruction with carrying symbol M8022 for 16-bit or 32-bit data shall be
used.
Left gyration with carrying Right gyration with carrying

X000 X000
RCL P D0 K4 RCR P D0 K4

Left gyration Right gyration

Upper Lower Upper Lower
position position position position
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
※ ※
M8022 M8022
Carry Carry
M8022=OFF M8022=ON

After one execution

Upper Lower Upper After one execution Lower
position position position position
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 M8022 M8022 0
※ ※

3
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

Instruction interpretation: when X000 is changed from OFF to ON, K4 with carrying symbol M8022
will gyrate to the left (right).
z The continuous executing instruction will gyrate after each scan cycle and please pay attention to
it.
z It is the same for the 32-bit instruction.
z When the bit is used to specify the element, only K4 (16-bit instruction)and K8 (32-bit
instruction) are valid.(such as K4Y010, K8M0)

4
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F34 SFTR Bit moving right

F
SFTR Bit moving right S· D· n1 n2
34 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D· * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *

Instruction format:

SFTR S· D· n1 n2

F35 SFTL Bit moving left

F
SFTL Bit moving left S· D· n1 n2
35 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D· * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *

Instruction format:

SFTL S· D· n1 n2

S· : Start number of shift device

D· : Start number of device to be shift
n1: Data length to be shifted, n1=1~1024
n2: Bit quantity for one shifting, n2=1~n1
z Data tandem with n1 word element (length of shifting buffer) started with D·, it moves right with
n2 shifting number and number started with S· is moved to D· to fill the empty element with n2
word element.
z The instruction is of pulse instruction in general, when continuous executing instruction is used,
it will execute for each scan cycle and pay attention to it.

5
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

Bit shifting right

X000 ①M3~M0→Overflow
SFTR P X000 M0 K16 K4 ②M7~M4→M3~M0
③M11~M8→M7~M4
④M15~M12→M11~M8
X003 X002 X001 X000 N2 shifting right ⑤X003~X000→M15~M12

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

5

4 3 2 1

Bit shifting left

X000 ①M15~M12→Overflow
SFTL P X000 M0 K16 K4 ②M11~M8→M15~M12
③M7~M4→M11~M8
④M3~M0→M7~M4
⑤X003~X000→M3~M0

N2 shifting left X003 X002 X001 X000

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

5

1 2 3 4

Condition step for 1-bit data

X000 M8046
M0
M8046 X000
SFTL M0 S0 K8 K1
S0 X001

S1 X002

S7 X007

M000
MOV K2S0 K2Y000

M8047

END

Start data for data input

1-bit of M0 taken as start input
Make 8-character length shifting register of S0~S7
X000

X001
Even X000 is ON, Y000 will not act

X007

Y000

Y001

Y007

6
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F36 WSFR Word shifting right

F
WSFR Word shifting right S· D· n1 n2
36 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *

Instruction format:

WSFR S· D· n1 n2

F37 WSFL Word shifting left

F
WSFL Word shifting left S· D· n1 n2
37 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *

Instruction format:

WSFL S· D· n1 n2

S· : Start number of shifting device

D· : Start number of device to be shifted
n1: Data length to be shifted with word as unit, n1=1~512
n2: Word element for one shift, n2=1~n1

z Data tandem with n1 word element (length of shifting buffer) started with D·, it moves right (left)
with n2 shifting number and number started with S· is moved to D· to fill the empty element with
n2 word element.
z The instruction is of pulse instruction in general.
z When S·/ D· are specified as bit combined device, the same bit specifying is required.

7
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

Word shifting right

X000 ①D13~D10→Overflow
WSFR P D0 D10 K16 K4 ②D17~D14→D13~D10
③D21~D18→D17~D14
④D25~D22→D21~D18
D3 D2 D1 D0 N2 shifting right ⑤D3~D0→D25~D22

D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
5

4 3 2 1

Word shifting left

X000 ①D25~D22→Overflow
WSFL P D0 D10 K16 K4 ②D21~D18→D25~D22
③D17~D14→D21~D18
④D13~D10→D17~D14
⑤D3~D0→D13~D10
N2 character shifting left D3 D2 D1 D0

D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 5

1 2 3 4

X000
WSFR K1X00
K1Y000 K4 K2
P 0

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

3 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

2 1

The same bit specifying shall be done for the bit elements.

8
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F38 SFWR Shift write

F
SFWR Shift write S· D· n
38 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

SFWR S· D· n

S· : Source device for shifting writing

D· : Start device for writing destination data tandem
n: Data length to be written, n=2~512 (Actual data length to be written is n-1, the start device D· is
taken as the pointer for writing points).

X000
SFWR D0 D1 K10

z To control first in first out, the instruction shall be written.

z D shall be reset to 0 in advance.
z When the drive X000 is changed from OFF to ON, content of D0 is written into D2 and content
of D1 is changed to 1. When X000 is changed from OFF to ON, content of D0 is stored in D3
and content of D1 is changed to 2. (When continuous executing instruction is used, it will be
saved after one scan cycle).
z Content of the pointer D1 is taken as current points of written data. When content of D1 exceeds
n-1, it stops executing and the carrying mark M8022 works.

9
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F39 SFRD Shift read

F
SFRD Shift read S· D· n
39 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

SFRD S· D· n

S· : Tandem start device of shifting read data

D· : Stored destination device for data tandem read
n: Data length for shifting read, n=2~512 (Actual length to be read is n-1, the read start device is taken
as pointer for judging stopping instruction execution).
z To control the data first in first out, read the instruction in advance.
X000
SFRD P D1 D20 K10

D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D20

z When the drive X000 is ON from ON, content of D2 will be read to D20. At the same time, 1 is
subtracted from content of the pointer D1. Data at the left side moves one bit to the right side
(content of D10 is not changed). When X000 is ON from OFF, content of D2 is read to D20 and
1 is subtracted fro content of D1. (When continuous executing instruction is used, each scan
cycle will execute one reading and shifting).
z When content of the pointer D1 is 0, the instruction stops executing, and the zero point mark
M8020 acts.
Shifting reading and writing case for first in and first out control
The product number is logging while warehousing. To ensure first in first out, the case is stated below:
The product is 4-bit number of hexadecimal system and the maximum number is below 99 points.
X020
MOV P K4X000 D256

SFWR P D256 D257 K100

X021
SFRD D257 D357 K100

M8000
MOV D357 K4Y000

X000~017 are taken as input of product numbers, and moved to D256.

D257 is the index and D258~D356 are the data buffer for 99-point storage product numbers.
As for the numbers out of the warehouse, it is sent to D357.
The product number is represented with 4-bit of hexadecimal and moved to Y000~Y017.

10
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F40~F49 Data processing

Data processing
Function No. Memory view Name Page
40 ZRST Full reset 1
41 DECO Decoder 2
42 ENCO Encoder 3
43 SUM ON bit quantity 4
44 BON ON Bit judging 5
45 MEAN Mean 6
46 ANS Warning coil setting 7
47 ANR Warning coil resetting 8
48 SQR BIN Square root computation 9
49 FLT BIN Integral→ Binary floating-point 10

0
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F40 ZRST Full reset

F
ZRST Full reset D1· D2·
40 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D1· * * * * * * *
D2· * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

ZRST D1· D2·

D1·: Start device for all clearing

D2·: End device for all clearing, D1· number≤D2· number, and devices of the same type must be
specified, otherwise, it may lead to instruction error, D8067=6705.

X000
ZRSTP M100 M200

When X000 is from OFF to ON, M100 to M200 are fully cleared.

z When computation element number of D1·> computation element number of D2·, only the
computation element specified by D·1 can be cleared.
z The instruction is executed with 16-bit, however, D1·/D2· can specify 32-bit counter, which can
not be specified in a mixed way. For example, D1· is 16-bit counter, and D2· is 32-bit counter.
z The instruction is of pulse instruction in general.

As independent resetting instruction for the device, as for bit elements Y, M and S and word elements
T, C and D, the instruction RST can be used. As the instruction F16 FMOV for writing the constant
K0 in batches, it can be written into devices KnY,KnM,KnS,T,C,D.
X000 Reset M0
RST M0

Reset current value of T0

RST T0

RST D0 Rest D0
X000
FMOV K0 D0 K100
Write D0~D99 into K0

1
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F41 DECO Decoder

F
DECO Decoder S· D· n
41 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

DECO S· D· n

S· : Decoding source device

D· : Device for storing decoding results, when D· is bit device, n=1~8; when D is bit device, n=1~4.
n: Decoding bit length, n=1~8, when n=0, it is not processed and it will lead to error out of 0~8.

Low n bit of the source device is taken for decoding and result of 2n bit length is stored in D·.
The instruction is of pulse instruction in general.
X004
DECO X000 M0 K3

X002 X001 X000

0 1 1

M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
The data source is 1+2=3, the M3 is set 1, and other bits are reset.
D· is bit element, when n=8, 28=256 points.
D· is word element, when n=4, 28=16 points; when n<4, high bit of D· is used for zero extension.

2
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F42 ENCO Encoder

F
ENCO Encoder S· D· n
42 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

ENCO S· D· n

S· : code source device

D· : Device for storing code results
n: Coding bit length, when S· is bit device, n=1~8; when S· is word device, n=1~4.

2 exp n bit length of the source device S· is used for coding and the result is stored in D·.
The instruction is pulse instruction in general.
X000
ENCO M0 D0 K3

M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

b15 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

When there are several bits in the data source are 1, 1 at low bit will not be processed. When the data
sources are 0, it is error.
S· is bit element, when n =8, 28 =256 points.
S· is word element, when n =4, 24 =16 points.

3
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F43 SUM ON bit quantity

F
SUM ON bit quantity S· D·
43 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

SUM S· D·

S· : Source device
D· : Destination device for storing counting values

X000
SUM D0 D2

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 7
D0 D2

z If 16 bits in D0 are 0, the zero mark M8020 will act.

z When 32-bit instruction is used, D· still occupies 2 buffers. See the figure above, number of 1 of
32-bit of (D1,D0)is written into D2 and D3 becomes 0.

4
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F44 BON ON Bit judging

F
BON ON Bit judging S· D· n
44 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

BON S· D· n

S· : Source device
D· : Device for storing judging results
n: When specify judging bit, n=0~15 (16-bit instruction), n=0~31 (32-bit instruction).

When nth bit of S· is 1, set D· at 1; for 0, set D· at 0.

Example:
X000
BON D10 M0 K15

b15 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 M0=OFF
D10

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 M0=ON
D10

When 16-bit computation is executed, n=0~15; for 32-bit computation, n=0~31.

5
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F45 MEAN Mean

F
MEAN Mean S· D· n
45 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

MEAN S· D· n

S· : Source device
D· : Destination device for storing the mean
n: Specify number for mean, n=1~64

X000
MEAN D100 D150 K5

（D100+D101+D102+D103+D104）/ 5 D150

z Mean (the algebraic sum is divided by n) of point n is stored in the destination address and the
residual is ignored. If it exceeds the device number, minimum value of n is obtained in possible
range.
z If n is out of 1~64, it may lead to error.
When range specified by S· exceeds n, the instruction will calculate the mean in effective range.

Example:

X000
MEAN D8510 D0 K3

（D8510+D8511）/ 2 D0

6
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F46 ANS Warning coil setting

F
ANS Warning coil setting S· m D·
46
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· *
m * *
D· *

Instruction format:

ANS S· m D·

S· : Detecting alarm timer, T0~T199 can be used only.

m : Timing time, specify m=1~32,767 (Unit 100ms).
D· : Alarm point device, S900~S999 is available for D.
※ 1: For TP03SR machine type, S· only supports T0~39 and T196~T199.
It is the convenient instruction for driving signal alarm period.
X000
ANS T0 K10 S900

z If X000 is active for 1 second, S900 is set. Even X000 is OFF (the timer is reset), S900 keeps
acting.
If it is less than 1 second, X000 or X001 is OFF, the timer resets.
z Preset M8049 (available signal alarm) ON, minimum number of the signal alarm S900~S999 ON
is stored in D8049. In addition, if any of S900~S999, M8048 (the alarm acts) is ON.

7
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F47 ANR Warning coil resetting

F No corresponding
ANR Warning coil resetting
47 D P devices
Instruction format:
X000
ANR

If X000 is active, the acting points of the signal alarm S900~S999 are reset.
If there are several alarm points simultaneously, the alarm point with minimum number will be reset.
At this time, if the effective mark M8049 of the signal alarm is ON, content of the register D8049 will
be updated timely and the minimum number of the alarm points will be left.
If X003 is active a second time, state of the next number will be reset.
If the instruction ANRP is used, it is reset in each scan cycle according to the sequence and pay
attention to it.
The following figure describes the external failure diagnosis circuit. The special data buffer D8049 is
used to monitor the minimum number of state numbers of S900~S999. In case of several failures, after
the failure with minimum number is released, the next failure number is displayed.
M8000
M0
Y005 X000
ANS T0 K10 S900

X001 X002
ANS T1 K20 S901

X003 X004
ANS T2 K100 S902

X005
Y005

M8048
Y006

X007
ANR P

END

z When the special auxiliary relay M8049 acts, monitoring can be performed.
z When the forward output Y005 is driven, the forward is detecting. If X000 fails to act within 1
second, S900 acts.
z In case of abnormality of DOG, if the upper limits X001 and X002 fail to act simultaneously
over 2 seconds, S901 acts.
z When T2 is less than 10 seconds and the continuous operation input point X003 is ON, during 1
cycle, if the action switch X004 does not act, S902 acts.
z When there is ON between S900~S999, the special auxiliary relay M8048 acts, the failure
represents the output Y006 acts.
z Before acting of the external failure diagnosis program, the state clearing key X007 is set OFF;
when X007 is ON, the minimum number will be cleared in sequence.
<Alarm coil effective M8049>
When M8049 is driven, minimum number of acting state of S900~S999 is stored in D8049.
<Alarm coil acting M8048>
When M8049 is driven, in case of acting between S900~S999, M8048 will act.

8
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F48 SQR BIN Square root computation

F
SQR BIN Square root computation S· D·
48 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

SQR S· D·

S· : Data source for square root

D· : Destination device for storing results
Square root is executed for data in S· and the data is stored in the device specified by D·.
Example:
X000
SQR D0 D1

When X000 is ON, after square root is executed for data in D0, the result is stored in D1.
z S· is valid for non-negative. If it is negative, it may lead to error, the mark M8067 is ON, and the
instruction will not be executed.
z The computation result D· is integral, the decimal is ignored, and the borrowing mark signal
M8021 is ON.
z When the computation result is 0, the zero mark M8020 is ON.

9
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

F49 FLT BIN Integral→ Binary floating-point conversion

F BIN Integral→ Binary
FLT S· D·
49 D P floating-point conversion
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

FLT S· D·

S· : Data source for conversion from BIN integral→ Binary floating-point numbers 2
D· : Destination device for storing results

Example:
X000
FLT D0 D2

X001
DFLT D0 D2

z Conversion instruction for BIN integral and binary floating-point values

The constants K and H are automatically converted, and the instruction FLT can not be used.
z Reverse conversion instruction for the instruction is FNC129 (INT).

See the following sequential control on the floating-point computation case.

10
6 Applied instruction interpretation Data processing

(D0) ÷ ( X017~X010 ) ×K34.5

D11 ，D10
16- bit BIN BCD 2 - bit
6

7
1 2 5 4 ( D13, D12）
Decimal floating monitoring
8
D21 ，D20 （D22）BIN (D27,D26 ） (D15,D14 ）
Binary 32- bit BIN integral
3 floating
(D25,D24 )
Binary
floating
(D29,D28 ）
Binary
floating

M8000
1
FLT D0 D20

2 BIN K2X010 D22

3 FLT D22 D24

4 D EDIV K345 K10 D26

5 D EDIV D20 D24 D28

6 D EMUL D28 D26 D10

7 D EBCD D10 D12

8 D INT D10 D14

11
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F50~F59 High speed counting processing

High speed counting processing

Function No. Memory view Name Page
50 REF Refreshing of input and output 1
52 MTR Matrix input 2
53 HSCS Comparison setting 4
54 HSCR Comparison resetting 6
55 HSZ Inter-zone comparison 7
56 SPD pulse density 8
57 PLSY pulse output 9
58 PWM Pulse width modulating 11
59 PLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration 12

0
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F50 REF Refreshing of input and output

F
REF Refreshing of input and output D· n
50 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * *
n * *
Instruction format:

REF D· n

D· ：Start device number for input and output refreshing

n： Refreshing points
For X, X0~X17 can be refreshed, 16 points input in total
For Y, Y0~Y7 can be refreshed, 8 points output in total
※ 1：For TP03-14SR-A :
X can only refresh X0~X7, 8 points input in total
Y can only refresh Y0~Y5，8 points output in total, when the refreshing point n is equal to 8,
Y0~Y5 can be refreshed.
※ 2：For TP03-20SR-A
X can only refresh X0~X13, 12 points in total, when the refreshing point n is equal to 16, and
refreshing starting from X0, and X0~X13 can be refreshed only. When the refreshing point n
is equal to 8, the refreshing can be started from X10, and X10-X13 can be refreshed actually.
Y can only refresh Y0~Y7, 8 points output in total.
PLC employs input and output refreshing. The input terminal information is stored in input image
storage zone before step 0 computation. After the output terminal executes the instruction END, it
is output through the latching storage device from the output image storage zone. However, during
computation, if latest input information and immediate output computation are expected, the input
and output refreshing instruction can be used.
Example 1: input refreshing:
X000
REF X010 K8 Refreshing, X010~X017, 8 points in total

Example 2: output refreshing:

X000
REF Y000 K8 Refreshing, Y000~Y007, 8 points in total

z When specifying the start device number D·, set the lowest bit number 0, like X000, X010,
Y000 and etc.
z The refreshing point n shall be 8 or 16 points, otherwise, it may lead to error.
z In general, the REF instruction can be used among the instructions FOR~NEXT and the
instruction CJ.
z In the interruption processing with input and output actions, latest input information and
timely output computation can be obtained by executing the instruction.

1
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F52 MTR Matrix input

F
MTR Matrix input S· D1· D2· n
52
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· *
D1· *
D2· * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

MTR S· D1· D2· n

S· ：Start device for matrix scan input, the rightmost number shall be 0, such as X000, X010 and
etc. and occupies continuous 8 points.
D1· ：Start device for matrix scan output, the rightmost number shall be 0.
D2· ：Start device for matrix scan value storage, the rightmost number shall be 0.
n：row of matrix scan, n=2~8 is valid.
The instruction uses 8 points input and n points output, and reads n rows of 8 point input signal
instruction.
Example:
X010
MTR X040 Y040 M10 K3

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Diode ○
M20
○
M21
○
M22
○
M23
○
M24
○
M25
○
M26
○
M27

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
X4 1 X4 2 X4 3 X4 4 X4 5 X4 6 X4 7

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

COM X4 0 X4 1 X4 2 X4 3 X4 4 X4 5 X4 6 X4 7

COM Y4 0 Y4 1 Y4 2 Y4 3 Y4 4 Y4 5 Y4 6 Y4 7

2
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

M0

Input of first row

Y020 1 4

Input of second row

Y021 2 5

Input of third row

Y022 3 6

20ms

M8029

z Start with specified input S·, occupying 8 points input.

z Start with specified output D1·, occupying 3 points output.
z The figure is n=3 points outputs Y040, Y041 and Y042 repeatedly ON. Each repeat will
obtain the first row, second row and third row inputs, which are stored in M10~M17,
M20~M27 and M30~M37.
z The output is interrupted with an interval of 20ms for instant input and output processing.
Input numbers for the instruction MTR
1. Input number of the instruction MTR shall be used after X020. (16 点基本形为 X010 以后)
2. When the instruction MTR is used, the transistor output shall be connected to the resistor
(3.3K/0.5W).

Matrix
loop

COM 24V X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007

Transistor output
PLC
COM Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007

3.3KΩ/0.5W

3
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F53 HSCS Comparison setting

F
HSCS Comparison setting S1· S2· D·
53 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

DHSCS S1· S2· D·

S1· ：Comparison setting

S2· ：Number of high speed counter, high speed counters C235~C249，C251~C254 must be
specified.
D· ：Comparison results, and D· can specify interruption indicator I010~I060

Example:
M8000 K100
C235
C235
Action of Y001 is affected by
Y001 scan cycle

M8000 K2,147,483,647
C235
Y 001 sets immediately
HSCS K100 C235 Y001

z The high speed counter works according to input OFF→ON in interruption mode. When
current value of the counter is equal to the setting value, output contact-joint of the counter
works immediately. If the instruction FNC53 is not used, the external output has something to
do with the sequential control, so it is affected by scan cycle and it outputs after the END
processing.
z The instruction FNC53 can be used for interrupting processing comparison and external
output, therefore, when current value of C235 is becoming 99→100 or 101→100, Y001 sets
immediately.

4
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

Attentions
z The instruction is 32-bit special instruction, which must be input as the instruction DHSCS.
z These instructions can compare results and actions in case of pulse input, therefore, even
current value is changed by sending instruction, if there is no counting input, the comparison
output will not change.
z F53, F54, F55 and other instructions can be used repeatedly, however, number of
simultaneous driving of the instructions must be less than 6.
z If the instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ and etc. are used, maximum permissible
frequency of high speed controller of the PLC will be affected greatly.

Counting interruption

Program step
0 EI

M8000
K2,147,483,647
C235

D HSCS K100 C235 I010

Interruption indicator
I010
FEND

Interrupting routine program

IRET

z D· of the instruction DHSCS can be specified as the interruption indicator I010~I060. (The
number can not be used repeatedly)
z When current value of the high speed counter specified by S2· is changed into specified value
of S1·, interruption program of specified mark by D· is executed.
z When special auxiliary relay M8059=ON, interruptions of I010~I060 are inhibited.

Regarding details of interruption processing, please refer to FNC03（IRET）~FNC05（DI）.

5
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F54 HSCR Comparison resetting

F
HSCR Comparison resetting S1· S2· D·
54 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· *
D· * * * *

Instruction format:

DHSCR S1· S2· D·

S1· ：Comparison value
S2· ：Number of high speed counter, the high speed counters C235~C249，C251~C254 must be
specified.
D· ： Comparison results, D· can specify number of the high speed counter with S2·.

Example
M8000
K2,147,483,647
C235

D HSCR K200 C235 Y001

z If the instruction F54 is used, for comparison and external output employ interruption
processing, current values of C235 is becoming 199→200 or 201→200, which is not affected
by scan cycle, Y001 immediately resets. Regarding effect of the scan cycle, please refer to
the above FNC53.
Example of automatic reset loop
M8000
C235 K300

D HSCR K400 C235 C235

400
C235 300
Current
value

C23 5 Output contact-

joint

z When current value of C235 becomes 400, C235 resets immediately, the current value is 0
and the output contact does not work.
z If the instruction is 32-bit instruction, it must be used as input of the instruction DHSCR.
Please refer to Attentions in FNC53 for other attentions.

6
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F55 HSZ Inter-zone comparison

F
HSZ Inter-zone comparison S1· S2· S· D·
55 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * *
S· *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

DHSZ S1· S2· S· D·

S1· ：Lower limit value of zone comparison

S2· ：Upper limit value of zone comparison, S1·≦S2·
S· ：Number of high speed counter, high speed counter C235~C249，C251~C254 must be
specified
D· ：Comparison results, occupying continuous 3 devices.

For instance,

M8000
K2,147,483,647
C251

DHSZ K1000 K2000 C251 Y000

Actions of comparison output:

K1000＞C251Current value Y000 ON
K1000≦C251Current value≦K2000 Y001 ON
K1000＜C251Current value Y002 ON

z Content of S1· and S2· is S1·≦S2·

z If the instruction FNC55 is used, interruption processing is executed for comparison and
external output, which is not affected by scan cycle.
z When the instruction is enabled, output in the first scan cycle is output according to
comparison result of current value of S· and S1· and S2·.
z If the instruction is 32-bit instruction, it must be used as input of the instruction DHSCR.
Please refer to Attentions in FNC53 for other attentions.

7
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F56 SPD pulse density

F
SPD pulse density S1· S2· D·
56
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * *
Number of instruction: 1 instruction for each input (decorated by index register)
Instruction format:

SPD S1· S2· D·

S1· ：External pulse input terminal, TP03 M/H machine type S1· can only specify X0~X5，
TP03SR machine type can only specify X0~X3
S2· ：Time of receiving pulse (the unit is ms)
D· ： Result location, occupying continuous 3 devices.
Example:
X010
SPD X000 K100 D0

X010

X000

D1: Current D0: Measuring

value value

100ms 100ms

100

D2: Time leftms

z Input pulse specified by S1· counts in specified time (ms) by S2·, and the result is stored in
D· specified device.
z Through repeated operation, pulse density (the proportional value with rotating speed) in
D· is obtained. D· occupies 3 points of devices.
z In the figure, when X010 is ON, D1 counts OFF－>ON of X000. After 100ms, the results are
stored in D0. Then D1 resets, it counts actions of X000 a second time.
z D2 is used to measure time left.
z The specified input X000~X005 herein can not be used repeatedly with the high speed
counter and interruption input.
z Maximum frequency of ON/OFF of input X000-X005 has the same processing with 1-phase
high speed counting. When it is used high speed counting, instructions FNC57（PLSY）and
FNC59（PLSR）, sum of the processing frequency shall be less than the specified frequency.

8
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F 57 PLSY pulse output

F
PLSY pulse output S1· S2· D·
57 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· *

Instruction format:

PLSY S1· S2· D·

S1· ：Pulse output frequency

16-bit instruction: 1~32,767Hz
32-bit instruction: 1~100,000Hz
S2· ：Pulse output number
16-bit instruction: 1~32,767
32-bit instruction: 1~2,147,483,647
D· ：Pulse output device, specifying Y000 and Y001（Controller with transistor output shall be
used）
※ 1：TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:

X000
PLSY K100 K1000 Y000

Pulsar

Y000
Frequency（K1000）

z Specified frequency is used to generate fixed pulse frequency. During the instruction
executing, if content of the word device specified by S1· is changed, the output frequency
will vary.
z When value of S2· is specified 0, there is no restriction on created pulse. During the
instruction executing, if specified word device by S2· is changed, it will execute the changed
content from the next instruction drive.
z After X010 is OFF, the output stops; when it is ON a second time, it acts from the initial state,
when it makes continuous beeper, X010 is OFF, and Y000 is also OFF.
z Duty ratio of the pulse is 0.5. The output control is not affected by scan cycle and interruption
processing is employed.

9
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

z After setting pulse finishes, the finish symbol M8029 acts.

z Controller with transistor output shall be employed.
z When programming 2 FNC57 (PLSY) instructions or 2 FNC59 (PLSR) instructions,
independent pulse output can be done for Y000 and Y001.
z When programming 1 FNC57 (PLSY) instruction and 1 FNC59 (PLSR) instruction,
independent pulse output can be done for Y000 and Y001.

<Attentions>
1. Do not drive the pulse output instruction using the same output relay (Y000 or Y001)
simultaneously. If it is driven simultaneously, it leads to use of dual-coil and it can not operate
with normal performance.
2. After drive contact-point of the pulse output instruction is OFF, a second drive shall be
executed after the following conditions are established.
Conditions: after pulse output monitor Y000: [M8147] and Y001:[M8148] ) of the previous drive
is OFF, it can be driven after one calculation performance cycle.
For additional drive of the pulse output instruction required more than 1 calculation performance
for OFF, if the drive is earlier than the conditions, the initial instruction performance may cause
normal calculation performance, when it is driven by the 2nd instruction, it starts pulse output.

Vir
Lo
Po
ad
tua
l PLC
resi
we resi
sto
r sto
r
sup r
ply

100mA

z It can not be repeated with specified output number by the instruction FNC58 (PWM).
z As for specified output numbers by the instruction FNC58 (PWM), it can not be repeated.

10
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F58 PWM Pulse width modulating

F
PWM Pulse width modulating S1· S2· D·
58
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· *

Instruction format:

PWM S1· S2· D·

S1· ：Pulse output width, t=0~3000ms

S2· ：Pulse output cycle, T= 1~3000ms, but S1·≤S2·
D· ：Pulse output device, only specifying Y000 and Y001 (Please use controller with transistor
output)
※ 1：TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:
X010
PWM D10 K50 Y000

Y000
T

z The output ON/OFF can execute interruption processing.

z In the above case, when content of D10 exceeds 50, it may be error.
z When X010 is OFF, Y000 is OFF.

Attentions：
z Transistor output shall be used for PLC. For high frequency pulse output, as mentioned
above, please offer load current. （FNC57（PLSY））
z Specified output number by FNC57（PLSY）or FNC59（PLSR）can not be used repeatedly.

11
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

F59 PLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration

F Pulse output with acceleration and
PLSR S1· S2· S3· D·
59 D deceleration
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S3· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· *

Instruction format:

PLSR S1· S2· S3· D·

S1· ：Maximum frequency of pulse output

S2· ：Total quantity of output pulse
S3· ：Time of acceleration and deceleration ms
D· ：Pulse output device, only specifying Y000 and Y001(Please use controller with transistor
output)
※ 1：TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:
X010
PLSR K500 D0 K3600 Y000
Time of
Maximu Total pulse
acceleration Output
m output
and number (Y000
frequency quantity
deceleration or Y001)
(HZ) (PLS)
(ms)

z Pulse output instruction with functions of acceleration and deceleration with fixed sizes.
For specified maximum frequency, fixed acceleration is executed; after it reaches specified
output pulse quantity, fixed deceleration is executed.

S1·Maximum frequency: 10~100,000Hz

10 1
9 2
Output: Y000 or Y001 8 3 1 speed variation is
7 4 1/10 of S1·in
6 maximum
5
S2·Total output pulse quantity
5 10-level 10-level 6
4 transmission transmission 7
3 8
16-bit instruction:110~32,767PLS
2 32-bit instruction: 110~2,147,483,647PLS
9
1 10
Time s
S3· acceleration time S3· Deceleration time
Less than 5000ms Less than 5000ms

12
 High speed counting
6 Applied instruction interpretation processing

z Setting content of the operands:

S1· maximum frequency
Range of setting: 10~100,000（Hz）
The frequency is set with multiple of 10.
1/10 of specified value of maximum frequency can be set as one speed variation
(frequency) during deceleration, therefore, please set the step motor in specified range.
S2· Total output pulse quantity
Range of setting: 16-bit computation: 110~32,767（PLS）
32-bit computation: 110~2147483647（PLS）
When it is less than 110, the pulse can not output normally.
When the instruction DPLSR is used, (D1 and D0) are used as 32-bit setting value.
S3· Time of acceleration and deceleration
Range of setting: less than 5000(ms), please comply with conditions of①~③.
Time of acceleration and deceleration shall act with the same values.
①Maximum time of scan time of possible PLC of acceleration and deceleration must be
over 10 times, when it is less than 10 times, time sequence of acceleration and
deceleration is uncertain.

②Formula of minimum time for acceleration and deceleration

90000
S3 ≥ ×5
S1
③Formula of maximum time for acceleration and deceleration

S2
S3 ≤ × 818
S1
D· Pulse output numbers:
· Only specify Y000 or Y001.
· The output is transistor output.
z Output frequency of the instruction is 10~100,000Hz, when maximum speed and variable
speed of acceleration and deceleration exceed the scope, it is lowered or carried in the range
automatically.
z The output control is not affected by scan cycle for interruption processing.
z When X010 is OFF, output is interrupted. When it is set ON a second time, it acts from the
initial position.
z During the instruction executing, even the operand is rewritten, the operation will not change.
The content of change will take effect in the next instruction drive.
z When setting pulse output finishes, the finishing mark M8029 is set ON.

13
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F60~F69 Convenient instructions

Convenient instructions
Function No. Memory view Name Page
F60 IST State initialization 1
F61 SER Data searching 6
F62 ABSD Control mode of cam control 8
F63 INCD Cam control increment mode 10
F64 TTMR Demonstrating teaching timer 12
F65 STMR Special timer 13
F66 ALT ON/OFF Alternative output 14
F67 RAMP Slope signal 16
F68 ROTC Rotating working bench control 18
F69 SORT Data sort 19

0
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F60 IST State initialization

F
IST State initialization S· D1· D2·
60
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * *
D1· *
D2· *

Instruction format:

IST S· D1· D2·

S· ： Start input of operation mode

D1· ：Minimum serial number for state step point under automatic mode
D2· ：Maximum serial number for state step point under automatic mode
D1·/D2·Specified range of computation element: S20~S1023, and D2>D1.
The instruction IST is a specified convenient instruction for initializing state of step ladder control
flow. For coordinating special relay, it forms convenient automatic control.

Example:

X000
IST X030 S20 S20
RUN
mnitoring

X030：Manual operation X034：Continuous operation

X031：Origin return X035：Origin return starts
X032：Step X036：Automatic start
X033：One cycle X037：Stop

When driving the instruction, the special relays will switch automatically, if the drive input is OFF,
it will not change.
M8040：Transfer prohibited S0：Initial state for manual operation
M8041：Transfer start S1：Initial state for origin return
M8042：Start pulse S2：Initial state for automatic operation
M8047：STL

If the instruction is used, S10~S19 are used for origin return. Therefore, during programming, do
not take these states as common states. In addition, when S0~S9 are taken as step points, S0~S2
are for the above manual operation, origin return and automatic operation. In the program, the step
point circuits for the 3 states must be written, and S3~S9 can be used freely.
The instruction shall be programmed in priority than the states S0~S2.

1
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

To avoid the above X030~X034 are ON simultaneously, rotating switch must be used.
When origin return finishes（M8043）and there is no action, manual operation (X030) shall prevail.
If the origin returns （X031）and switches among（X032，X033，X034）, all the inputs and outputs
are OFF. The automatic operation can be driven a second time after origin return finishes.

Special auxiliary relay for the instruction IST

The auxiliary relay for the instruction IST can be divided into automatic operation as per its state
and program control for operation preparation and control purpose.
Automatic control for the instruction IST
Transfer prohibited M8040
When the auxiliary relay works, all the state transfers are prohibited.
Schlep: M8040 works frequently.
Recovery, one cycle, it keeps operation from pressing the stop button and pressing the start button.
Single step: M8040 works frequently. After pressing the start button, it becomes inactive and starts
sending.
Other: for switching from PLC STOP→RUN, press the start button to release.

Transfer starts: M8041

The auxiliary relay for the sending conditions from the initial state S2 to the next state
Manual and recovery: do not act.
One single step and cycle: it acts when pressing the start button.
When pressing the start button continuously, it keeps acting; when pressing the stop button, it is
released.

Start pulse: M8042

It acts instantly only pressing the start button.
Origin finishes M8043
In recovery mode, after the machine returns to the origin, the user makes the special relay with
program.
Origin conditions M8044
Test origin conditions of the machine, and the special relay is driven. The full modes become
effective signals.
All the output resets prohibited M8045
During switching among manual, recovering and automatic mode, if the machine is not at the
origin location, all the outputs and action states shall reset. If M8045 is driven, only the action
states need to reset.
STL monitoring effective M8047
After driving M8047, the state numbers S0~S899 in acting are stored in the special auxiliary
relays D8040~D8047 from small to big. Therefore, it monitors 8 action state numbers. Besides, if
any of the states acts, the special auxiliary relay M8046 will act.

2
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

Distribution of mode selection input

If the instruction IST is used, input of the modes is described in the following distributed
continuous input numbers. When discontinuous number and part of them are ignored, the
following auxiliary relays can be used to specify the input initial element numbers.

X030：Individual operation
X031：Origin return
X032：Step
X033：One operation
X034：Continuous operation
X035：Origin return starts
X036：Automatic start
X037：Stop
X030~X034 do not act simultaneously (Selection switch is utilized)

Input is discontinuous number

Example: X030：individual operation
X035：Origin return
X033：Step
X040：One operation
X032：Continuous operation
X034：Origin return starts
X026：Automatic start
X041：Stop

X030
M0
X035
M1
X033
M2
X040
M3
X032
M4
X034
M5
X026
M6
X041
M7

3
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

Only continuous/origin return mode

Example: X030：Origin return
X031：Continuous operation
X032：Automatic switch and origin return start
X033：Stop

M8000
M0
X030
M1
M800
M2

M3
X031
M4
X032
M5

M6
X033
M7

Only continuous/individual mode

Example: X030：individual operation
X031：Continuous operation
X032：Automatic switch
X033：Stop
X030
M0
M8000
M1
M800
M2

M3
X031
M4
M8000
M5
X032
M6
X033
M7

4
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

In this case, M0 is taken as mode specified start input.

M8000
IST M0 S20 S29

The auxiliary relay for the instruction IST is divided into self-generated action and program for
operation preparation and control purpose.

Automatic control for the instruction IST

<Transition prohibited M8040>
When the auxiliary relay acts, all the state transitions are prohibited.
Individual: M8040 acts frequently.
One recovery: it keeps acting from pressing the stop button to the start button.
Individual: M8040 acts frequently, when the start button is pressed, it does not act, and transition
is performed.
Other: it keeps acting during switching from STOP—RUN of the PLC. When the button is pressed,
it is released. For transition prohibited state, output in the state continues holding.
<Transition start M8041>
The auxiliary relay for the initial state S2 transitioned to the next state
Individual and recovery: do not act.
Step, one time: it acts when pressing the start button.
Continuous: after pressing the start button, it keeps acting; after pressing the stop button, it is
released.
<Start pulse M8042>
When the starting button is pressed, it acts instantaneously.
Regarding the control, refer to the next page.
For sequential control program
<Recovery finishing M8043>
After the recovery mode finishes at the origin, the user shall make the special auxiliary relay act
with program.
<Origin conditions M8044>
The mechanical origin conditions are detected to drive the special auxiliary relay and the full
mode is effective signal.
<All outputs cleared and prohibited M8045>
During switching of individual, recovery and automatic mode, when the machine is not at the
origin, all the outputs and action states are cleared. When M8045 is driven, only the action states
are cleared.
<STL monitoring effective M8047>
When M8047 is driven, the current state numbers (S0~S899) will be sequenced with smaller
numbers, which are stored in D8040~D8047 and monitor 8 action states. In case of any action of
the states, the special auxiliary relay M8046 will act.
The following out of the PLC circuit is control content of the fixed circuit, which shall be
coordinated with other programs.

5
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F61 SER Data searching

F
SER Data searching S1· S2· D· n
61 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * * * *

Instruction format:

SER S1· S2· D· n

S1· ：Start element number for data searching zone

S2· ：Data content searched by the instruction
D· ：Start device for storing checking list, occupying continuous 5 points
n ： Length of data zone to be compared, n=1~256 （ 16-bit instruction ）， n=1~128 （ 32-bit
instruction）.

The instruction is used for searching the same data, maximum value and minimum value in the
data sheet.
Example:

X000
SER D100 D0 D50 K10

Structure and data case of search list:

Searched Case of Comparison Data
Maximum Sum Minimum
element searched data data location
D100 D100=K100 0
D101 D101=K111 1
D102 D102=K100 2 Same
D103 D103=K98 3
D104 D104=K23 4 Minimum
D0=K100
D105 D105=K66 5
D106 D106=K100 6 Same
D107 D107=K95 7
D108 D108=K210 8 Maximum
D109 D109=K88 9

6
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

Check result sheet

Element
Content Remark
No.
D50 3 Number of the same data
D51 0 Location of the same data (Initial)
D52 6 Location of the same data (Final)
D53 4 Final location of minimum
D54 8 Final location of maximum

z It is algebraic comparison, namely, comparison with positive or negative symbols.

z When there are several maximum and minimum values, the back location shall display.
z When the 32-bit instruction is used, 32-bit shall be taken as unit storage and check results.
z In the 5-bit started with D·, see the table above, locations of the same data, minimum vale
and maximum value are stored. When the same data do not exist, D50~D52=0 in the above
case.

Note: WhenS1·，S2· and range of D· exceed the boundary, it may lead to error.

7
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F62 ABSD Control mode of cam control

F
ABSD Control mode of cam control S1· S2· D· n
62 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * *
S2· *
D· * * *
n * *
Note: when the instruction is 16-bit instruction, △=4; when it is 32-bit instruction,△=8.
Times for use of the instruction: one time (decorated by the index).

Instruction format:

ABSD S1· S2· D· n

S1· ： Comparison start device. When the computation elements specify KnX, KnY, KnM,
KnS, 16-bit instruction shall specify K4; 32-bit instruction shall specify K8 and numbers
of X, Y, M and S shall be multiple of 16.
S2· ： Counter number. 16-bit instruction shall specify C0~C199, and 32-bit instruction shall
specify C200~C255.
D· ： Start number of comparison result output
n：Number of groups for multi-section comparison, n =1~64
※ 1：For S2·counter number of TP03SR machine type, 16-bit instruction shall specify C0~C99,
and 32-bit instruction shall specify C220~C255.
The instruction is used to generate several output waves for current values of the counter. Take the
working bench rotating one cycle to control the auxiliary relay M0~M3 ON/OFF as example to
describe in detail.
Example:
X000
ABSD D300 C0 M0 K4
C0 X001
RST C0
X001
C0 K360

Rotating angle signal for 1

pulse for 1 degree

8
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

The following data is written into D300~D307 by using sending instructions in advance.
Rising point Falling point Object output
D300= 40 D301=104 M0
D302=100 D303=200 M1
D304=160 D305= 60 M2
D306=240 D307=280 M3

When X000 is ON, there are the following changes for M0~M3. Rising point/fall point may vary
according to change of data of D300~D307.

40 140
M 0
100 200
M 1
60 160
M 2
240 280
M 3

z The value n determines number of points for output object.

z When X000 is OFF, the wave output remains the same.
z When the instruction DABSD is used, S2·can specify high speed counter. However, the
output wave may be delayed affected by the scan cycle. When high speed response is
required, please use the instruction HSZ for comparing the performance.

9
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F63 INCD Cam control increment mode

F
INCD Cam control increment mode S1· S2· D· n
63
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * *
S2· *
D· * * *
n * *

Note: the instruction is 16-bit instruction,△=4

Instruction format:

INCD S1· S2· D· n

S1· ：Comparison start element, when KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are specified, K4 shall be
specified and number of X, Y, M and S shall be multiple of 16.
S2· ：Number of the counter, the 16-bit instruction shall specify C0~C198, occupying counters
with 2 continuous numbers.
D· ：Start number of comparison results
n：Number of groups for multi-section comparison n=1~64
※ 1：For S2· counter number of TP03SR machine type, 16-bit shall specify C0~C98, occupying
counters with 2 continuous numbers.
The instruction is used for several output waves generated by a couple of counters.
Example:

X000
INCD D300 C0 M0 K4

M8013
C0 K9999

According to the time sequence sheet, take the control n=4 points for M0-M3 for interpretation.
z The following data is written into S1·by the sending instructions in advance.
D300=20
D301=30
D302=10
D303=40

10
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

X000

30 40 30
C0 20 20
10

3
C1 2
1 1
0 0 0
M1

M2

M3

M4

M8029 Finishing mark

z When the counter C0 reaches setting values of D300~D303, it resets according to the
sequence.
z The working counter C1 counts times of resetting.
z Current values of corresponding counters C1, M0-M3 works according to the sequence.
z When the output actions specified by n finish, the mark M8029 acts, it returns and starts the
same actions.
z When X000 is OFF, C0 and C1 are cleared, M0~M3 is OFF. When X000 is set ON a second
time, it works from initial state.

11
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F64 TTMR Demonstrating teaching timer

F
TTMR Demonstrating teaching timer D· n
64
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * *
n * *

Instruction format:

TTMR D· n

D· ：Element number for the storage button switch ON, D·occupies devices with 2 continuous
numbers
n：Setting of multiple, n=0~2

For example:
X010
TTMR D300 K0

X010

D301
D301
D300

D300

t0 t0

z Pressing time of the button X010 measured by D301 multiply by ratio specified by n and the
result is stored in D300. Setting time of the timer can be adjusted by the button.
z Pressing time of the button X010 isτ0 second, according to value of n, actual D300 is state
below:

n D300
K0 τ0
K1 10τ0
K2 100τ0

z When X010 is OFF, D301 resets and D300 does not change.

12
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F65 STMR Special timer

F
STMR Special timer S· m D·
65
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· *
m * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

STMR S· m D·

S· ：Number of the timer, range of specifying: T0~T199

m：Setting value of the timer, unit 100ms, range: 1~32767
D· ： Start number of the output element, occupying 4 continuous number devices
※ 1：For S·counter number of TP03SR machine type, the range of setting: T0~T39，T196~T199
The instruction is for the delay timer, single triggering timer and twinkling timer.
Example:
X000
STMR T10 K100 M0

X000
M 0 10S 10S

M 1 10S 10S
M 2 10S

M 3

z Specified value of m is the setting value of the specified timer, and it is 10 seconds in the
case.
z M0 is a delayed timer.
z M1is a single-triggering timer after inputting ON→OFF.
z M2 and M3 are used for twinkling.
z When X000 is OFF, after setting the time, M0, M1 and M3 are OFF and T10 resets.
z Timer used here can not be used repeatedly in other general circuits.

13
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F66 ALT ON/OFF Alternative output

F
ALT ON/OFF Alternative output D·
66 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * *

Instruction format:

ALT D·

D· ： Destination element

Example 1:

X000
ALTP M0

X000

M 0

z When the drive input changes from OFF→ON each time, M0 is in reverse direction.
When continuous executing instruction is used, each computation cycle performs reverse
actions, please pay attention to it.
z M0 in the above figure is taken as input, when the instruction ALTP is used for driving M1,
multi-level frequency dividing output can be obtained.

M0
ALTP M1

X000

M 0

M 1

14
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

Application of repeated actions:

Start/stop from 1 input
X000
ALT P M0

M0
Y000 Stop

M0
Y001 Start

z When pressing the button X000, the start output Y001 acts.
z When pressing the button X000, the stop output Y000 acts.

Twinkling action
X006 T2 K50
T2

X006 T2
ALT Y007

X006
5S 5S
T2

Y007

z When the input X006 is ON, contact-joint of the timer T2 acts instantaneously with an
interval of 5 seconds.
z When contact joint of T2 is ON each time, the output is ON/OFF alternatively.

15
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F67 RAMP Slope signal

F
RAMP Slope signal S1· S2· D· n
67
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * *
S2· * *
D· * *
n * *

Instruction format:

RAMP S1· S2· D· n

S1· ：Element of initialized value of slope signal

S2· ：Element of destination value
D· ： Process value
n：times of signal, n=1~32767

Example:
X000
RAMP D1 D2 D3 K1000

z Write preset initial value and destination value into D1 and D2. If X000 is ON, content of D3
changes slowly from D1 to D2. Time of moving is the scan time of n times.
D 2 D 1
(D3)
Times of scan stored in D4
D 1 (D3) D 2

n scan time n scan time

D1 < D2 D1 > D2

z The set scan time (a little longer than the actual scan time) is written into D8039, which is
driven. The PLC is constant scan operation mode, if the value is 20ms, in the above case,
after 20 seconds, D3 is changed from D1 to D2.
z During operation, if X000 is OFF, it becomes interrupted. When X000 is set ON a second
time, D4 is cleared and it starts from D1.
z After executing, the mark M8029 is ON, value of D3 is back to D1.
z If the instruction combines the analog output, it outputs buffering start/stop instruction.
z X000 runs when it is ON, D4 is cleared in advance (D4 is for holding in case of power
failure).
Actions of mode mark

16
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

In PLC, it acts according to the mode mark M8026, and content of D3 changes as follows:

M 8026 M 8026
Drive Drive
=ON instruction = OFF instruction
X000 X000

（D2 ） （D2 ）

（D3 ） （D3 ）
（D1 ） （D1 ）
M 8029 M 8029

17
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F68 ROTC Rotating working bench control

F
ROTC Rotating working bench control S· m1 m2 D·
68
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

ROTC S· m1 m2 D·

S：Register used in counting, use 3 consecutive devices.

m1：Number of encoder pulses per table revolution, m1=2~32,767.
m2：Distance to be traveled at low speed (in encoder pulses), m2=0~32,767（m1 ≥m2）.
D：Start element for signal output, uses 8 consecutive devices.
Example:
X010
ROTC D200 K10 K2 M0

The ROTC instruction is used to aid the tracking and positional movement of the rotary table as it
moves to a specified destination.
z The ROTC instruction uses a built in 2-phase counter to detect both movement direction and
distance traveled. Devices M0and M1 are used to input the phase pulses, while device M2is
used to input the ‘zero position’ on the rotary table.
z D200 : Current position at the ‘zero point’ read only. D201 : Destination position (selected
Station to be moved to) relative to the ‘zero point’ - User defined.D202: Start position
selected station to be moved) relative to the ‘zero point’ -User defined.
z M0: A-phase counter signal - input
M1: B-phase counter signal - input
M2: Zero point detection - input
M3: High speed forward - output
M4: Low speed forward - output
M5: Stop - output
M6: Low speed reverse - output
M7: High speed reverse - output
Devices M3 to M7are automatically set by the ROTC instruction during its operation .These
are used as flags to indicate the operation which should be carried out next.

18
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

F69 SORT Data sort

F
SORT Data sort S· m1 m2 D· n
69
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D· * *
n * * * *
Instruction format:
X000
SORT S· m1 m2 D· n

S· ：Start element of original data zone

m1：Number of groups of data，m1=1~32
m2：Number of rows of figure, m2=1~6
D· ：Start element for storing sorting result data zone
n：Reference number of data sort n=1~m2
Example:
X020
SORT D100 K5 K4 D200 D0

When X020 is ON, the data starts sorting. After finishing, the mark M8029 ON stops operation.
During operation, do not change the operand and data content. When it is operated a second time,
set X020 OFF one time.
Working bench structure and data case
Number of row m2

Row 1 2 3 4
Line ID Height Weight Age

1 D100 D105 D110 D115

1 150 45 20
2 D101 D106 D111 D116
Number of data m1

2 180 50 40
3 D102 D107 D112 D117
3 160 70 30
4 D103 D108 D113 D118
4 100 20 8
5 D104 D109 D114 D119
5 150 50 45

19
 Convenient
6 Applied instruction interpretation instructions

z Start data register of the working bench is specified by S·.

z Input ID and other continuous numbers in the 1st line to identify the original line number.

For executing the instruction D0=K2

Row No. 1 2 3 4
.
Line No ID Height Weight Age

1 D200 D205 D210 D215

4 100 20 8
2 D201 D206 D211 D216
1 150 45 20
3 D202 D207 D212 D217
5 150 50 45
4 D203 D208 D213 D218
3 160 70 30
5 D204 D209 D214 D219
2 180 50 40

For executing the instruction D0=K3

Row No. 1 2 3 4
Line NO . ID Height Weight Age

1 D200 D205 D210 D215

4 100 20 8
2 D201 D206 D211 D216
1 150 45 20
3 D202 D207 D212 D217
2 180 50 40
4 D203 D208 D213 D218
5 150 50 45
5 D204 D209 D214 D219
3 160 70 30

z Data of the computation result starts with the element specified by D·, occupying m1×m2
data registers. When S· and D· are the same elements, before operation finishing, do not
change content of S·.
z Executing of the instruction needs m1 scan cycles, after data sorting finishes, the mark
M8029 acts.

20
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F70~F79 Peripheral equipment IO Instructions

Peripheral equipment IO instructions

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F70 TKY Decimal key input 1
F71 HKY Hexadecimal key input 2
F72 DSW Digit switch input 4
F73 SEGD 7-section decoding 6
F74 SEGL 7-section code display 8
F75 ARWS Direction switch 11
F76 ASC ASCII code conversion 13
F77 PR ASC II code printing 14

0
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F70 TKY Decimal key input

F
TKY Decimal key input S· D1· D2·
70 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D1· * * * * * * * * *
D2· * * *
Times of use of the instruction: 1 time (Decorated by index register)
Instruction format:

TKY S· D1· D2·

S· : Start device for key input, occupying continuous 10 points

D1· : Storage location for key input values
D2· : Key output signal
For example
X030
TKY X000 D0 M10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

COM X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011

PLC

z Input the decimal key according to the sequence①②③④ in the figure above, and content
of D0 is changed to 2,130. Maximum value of the input is 9,999, and overflow will occur if
it exceed (content of D0 is stored in binary system).
z When the instruction D TKY is used, D1and D0 buffers are used. When the value exceeds
99,999,999, overflow will occur.
z Start from pressing X002 to other keys, M12 keeps ON and other keys are the same.
z If corresponding X000~X011 act, M10~M19 will act.
z When pressing any button, during pressing, if M20 is detected, it will be ON. When several
keys are pressed, the earlier pressed shall prevail.
z When the input X030 is OFF, content of D0 will change, and M10~M2 are OFF.
X000 ④

X001 ②

X002 ①

X003 ③

M10

M11

M12

M13

Key sensing output

M20 ① ② ③ ④

1
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F71 HKY Hexadecimal key input

F
HKY Hexadecimal key input S· D1· D2· D3·
71 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· *
D1· *
D2· * * * * * *
D3· * * *

Time of use of the instruction: 1 time (Decorated by the index register)

Instruction format:

HKY S· D1· D2· D3·

S· :Start device for key input, occupying continuous 4 points

D1· :Start device for key scan output, occupying continuous 4 points
D2· :Location for storing key input values
D3· :Key output signal
The instruction is used for writing numerical value and input functions with hexadecimal key.
Example:
X000
HKY X010 Y010 D0 M0

Digit keys

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BCD

overflow 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 HKY

D 0（BIN）

z When the digit key is pressed each time, values with upper limit 9,999 is stored in D0, if it
exceeds the value, overflow will occur.
z When the instruction DHKY is used, D1 and D0 are valid between 0~99999999.
z When several keys are operated, the earlier pressed shall prevail.
z After one cycle scan for Y010~Y013, the finishing mark M8029 acts.

2
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

Function keys
F E D C B A

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
z When the key A is pressed, M0 keeps ON; when D is pressed, M0 is OFF and M3 keeps ON.
z When several keys are operated, the earlier pressed shall prevail.

Output of key testing

z When any key of A~F is pressed, it works only M6 is pressed.
z When any key of 0~9 is pressed, it works only M7 is pressed.
z When the drive input X000 is OFF, D0 does not change, and M0~M7 are OFF.

External circuit
C D E F

8 9 A B

4 5 6 7

0 1 2 3

COM X10 X11 X12 X13

COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13

Functions of the mark M8167:

When M8167=ON, the instruction HKY can input hexadecimal number of 0~F;
When M8167=OFF, the instruction HKY can be used as function key.
Additional interpretation:
When the instruction is executed, one input value of the key can be seized effectively after 8 scan
cycles. Long or short scan cycle may lead to non-conformity of the key, therefore, the following
skills can be used to overcome the difficulties.
1 If the scan cycle is too short, it may lead to untimely response of I/O and input value of the key,
at this time, the scan time shall be fixed.
2 If the scan cycle is too long, it may cause longer response of the key, the instruction is written
into the interruption subprogram to be executed the instruction at specified time.

3
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F72 DSW Digit switch input

F
DSW Digit switch input S· D1· D2· n
72
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· *
D1· *
D2· * * * * * *
n * *

Times of use of the instruction: 2 times（Decorated by the index register）

Instruction format:

DSW S· D1· D2· n

S· : Start device for scan input of finger-dialing switch

D1· : Start device for scan output of finger-dialing switch
D2· : Location of setting value of finger-dialing switch
n: Number of groups connected by the finger-dialing switch, n=1~2

The instruction is used for read of BCD code set by the digit switch for 1(n=1) or 2 (n=2) groups
of 4-bit numbers, when the input is not BCD code, it may lead to error.
Example:

X000
DSW X020 Y020 D0 K1

2nd group
BCD digit switch 1 2 3
0
10 10 10 10
Diode

1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
COM X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27
1st group of input 2nd group of input

COM Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23

0 1 2
10 10 10 103

4
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

Note: when the input is not BCD code, it may be error.

The 1st group of input: the 4-bit BCD code digit switch connecting X020~X023 reads according to
the sequence of Y020~Y023 and stored in D0.
The 2nd group of input: the 4-bit BCD code digit switch connecting X024~X027 reads according
to the sequence of Y020~Y023 and stored in D1.(Valid when n=2)

X000 Cycle action

Y020 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

Y021 0.1s
Interrupt
Y022 0.1s
Y023 0.1s
M8029 Executing finishing

z When X000 is ON, Y010~Y013 work according to the sequence（100ms）. After one cycle,
the finishing mark M8029 acts.
z When DSW values need continuous input, PLC with transistor output shall be used.
Additional interpretation:
When PLC is used as relay output, the following method can be used:
1 When X000=ON, the instruction DSW is executed; when X000 is OFF, M10 will continue to
keep ON and it will be OFF until the scan terminal of DSW instruction finishes one cycle.
2 The condition contact-point X000 uses button switch, when it is used one time, M10 will be
OFF after the scan terminal specified by the instruction DSW finishes one cycle output, the
instruction stops output and the finger-dialing switch data will be fully read. Therefore, under the
circumstances, even the scan terminal uses relay output, service life of the relay will not be
shortened.

X000
SET M10

M10
DSW X020 Y020 D20 K2

M1029
RST M10

5
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F73 SEGD 7-section decoding

F
SEGD 7-section decoding S· D·
73 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

SEGD S· D·

S· :Source device of decoding

D· :Output device after decoding

0-F (hexadecimal system number) of specified by low 4-bit of S· is decoded into D· of data in the
7-section code. High 8-bit of D· does not change.
M8273 specifies logic relation of output display.
When M8273=OFF,
See the Seven-section Code Sheet
Source 7-section Pre-setting Number
Hexadecimal Bit combined B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 represented
system combination number
number format
0 0000 B0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 0001 B5 B6 B1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
2 0010 B4 B2 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 2
3 0011 B3 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 3
4 0100 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 4
5 0101 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 5
6 0110 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 6
7 0111 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 7
8 1000 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
9 1001 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 9
A 1010 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 A
B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 B
C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 C
D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 D
E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 E
F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 F

Start of bit element（such as Y000）

Or last bit of word element or B0

6
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

When M8273=ON,
See the following on the 7-section decoding sheet.
Source 7-section Pre-setting Number
Hexadecimal Bit combined B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 represented
system combined number
number format
0 0000 B0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0001 B5 B6 B1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
2 0010 B4 B2 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2
3 0011 B3 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 3
4 0100 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 4
5 0101 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 5
6 0110 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 6
7 0111 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 7
8 1000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8
9 1001 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 9
A 1010 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 A
B 1011 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 B
C 1100 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 C
D 1101 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 D
E 1110 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 E
F 1111 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 F

7
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F74 SEGL 7-section code display

F
SEGL 7-section code display S· D· n
74
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· *
n * *

Times of use of the instruction: 2 times（Decorated by the index register）

Instruction format:

SEGL S· D· n

S· : Source device to display seven-section code

D· : Start device for seven-section monitor scan output
n: Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal, n=0~7

The instruction is used for controlling 1 or 2 groups of 4-bit seven-section code with locking.
Example:

X000
SEGL D0 Y000 K0

COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 COM2 Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007 COM3 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013

103 10 2 101 100 103 10 2 101 100

1 1
V+ V+
2 2
4 4
8 8

Group I Group II

4-bit for one group, n=0~3

z Conversion result of D0 (binary system, after conversion in BCD, effective between 0~9,999),
they are output to (Y000~Y003).
z The strobe pulse signals (Y004~Y007)are used to lock the 4-bit for one group 7-section code
with locking.

8
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

4-bit for 2 groups, n=4~7

z D0 is output to (Y000~Y003), D1 is output to (Y010~Y013) and D1 and D0 execute BCD
conversion and it is effective between 0~9,999, otherwise, it will cause error.
z The strobe pulse signal (Y004~Y007)is shared by 2 groups.
z The instruction is used for 4-bit (1 or 2 groups) display, which requires 4 times of the
computation cycle. After 4-bit output finishes, the finishing mark M8029 acts.
z When drive input of the instruction is ON, it executes repeated actions. Of one series of
actions, when the drive input is OFF, it stops acting and restarts from the initial action.
z The instruction is simultaneously executed with the scan cycle of the PLC. To execute a
series of displays, the scan cycle of the PLC needs more than 10ms. When it is less than
10ms, constant scan mode shall be used and scan cycle more than 10ms shall be operated.
z ON voltage of transistor output of the PLC is about 1.5V, the 7-section code shall use the
corresponding output voltage.
z Setting of parameter n: it is used to set loop of positive or negative or the transistor, and the
seven-section monitor is one group or two groups of 4-bit fingers.

Logic of PLC

Full
loading
resistor
Logic 1

Lo
w
Ne
gati
ve
PLC

NPN transistor output loop: when the internal signal is 1, it outputs low level, and it is called
negative logic.

Pos
itiv
e
Hig Logic 1
h

Unloading
PLC
resistor

PNP transistor output loop: when internal signal is 1, it outputs high level, and it is called positive
logic.

9
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

Logic of 7-section monitor

Description Positive logic Negative logic
Data input High level converted into BCD Low level converted into BCD
data data
Strobe pulse signal High level keeps the data of Low level keeps the data of
locking locking

Selection of parameter n
Number of groups for
Group I Group II
7-section display
Logic between PLC
output terminal and
Same Different Same Different
monitor data input
terminal
Logic between PLC
output terminal and Same Different Same Different Same Different Same Different
monitor data scan signal
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

When logics of PLC transistor output and 7-section monitor are the same or not the same, it can be
matched with setting value of the parameter n.
Assume PLC output is negative logic, data input terminal of 7-section monitor is also negative
logic and strobe pulse signal of 7-section monitor is positive logic, if it is 4-bit for 1 group, n=1;
for 4-bit for 2 groups, n=5.

10
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F75 ARWS Direction switch

F
ARWS Direction switch S· D1· D2· n
75
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D1· * * * * * *
D2· *
n * *

Times of use of instructions: 1 time (decorated by index register)

Instruction format:

ARWS S· D1· D2· n

S· : Start device for key input, occupying continuous 4 points

D1· : Device with data input by arrow switch
D2· : Start device with seven-section monitor scan output, occupying 8 points and it is used to set
values by visual means.
n: the same as n in the instruction SEGL, with n=0~3
The instruction is used for inputting data by bit shifting and arrow keyboard switch for increasing
and decreasing the data.

Example:

X000
ARWS X020 D0 Y020 K0

Y24
Y25
Increasing
Y26
Y27
X021

103 10 2 101 100

Y20 1 Carrying X023 X022 Abdication
Y21 2
Y22 4
Y23 8
X020

ection decoding monitor for visual sett

Decreasing

11
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

z 16-bit binary BCD (effective converted into 0-9,999) is stored in D0, for convenience, BCD
code is used in the following interpretation.
z When the drive input X000 is ON, it is specified as 103-bit. When pressing the abdication key
each time, it changes as per 103-102-101-100-103. In addition, when pressing the carrying key
each time, it changes as per 103-100-101-102-103. The specified bit can display by LED
according to the strobe pulse signals (Y024~Y027).
z As for specified bit, once the added key D0 is pressed, it changes as per
0-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0-1; when the decreasing button is pressed, it changes as per
0-9-8-7-------1-0-9. The content is displayed by 7-section monitor.
See the above, while you are viewing the monitor, you can write the destination value into
D0.

Additional interpretation:
The output points Y20~Y27 specified by the instruction must use transistor output.
When the instruction is used, please fix the scan time or the instruction is inserted into the
interruption subprogram for executing.

12
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F76 ASC ASCII code conversion

F
ASC ASCII code conversion D·
76
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * *

Instruction format:

ASC S D·

S : 8 letters and fingers input by the computer

D· : Start address of ASCII code device after storing and conversion
Example:
X000
ASC ABCDEFGH D300

Executing result of the instruction: After the letters A-H is converted by ASCII, and it is moved to
D300~D303.
High 8-bit Low 8-bit
D300 42(B) 41(A)

D301 44(D) 43(C)

D302 46(F) 45(E)

D303 48(H) 47(G)

z The instruction is used for displaying error and other information on external monitor.
z After M8161 is set ON, when executing the instruction, low 8-bit is moved to D·, which
occupies the devices with the same quantity of the character moved and the high 8-bit is 0.

High8-bit Low 8-bit

D300 00 41 A
D301 00 42 B
D302 00 43 C
D303 00 44 D
D304 00 45 E
D305 00 46 F
D306 00 47 G
D307 00 48 H

13
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

F77 PR ASC II code printing

F
PR ASC II code printing S· D·
77
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *
D· *

Times of use of the instruction: 1 time (Decorated by the index register)

Instruction format:

PR S· D·

S· : Start element of ASCII code to be moved

D· : External output point of outputting ASCII code, occupying continuous 10 points.

The instruction is used for moving ASCII code data to Y.

Example:
X000
PR D300 Y000

z See the previous page, if ASCII data is stored in D300 ~D303, sequence of moving starts
with A and ends with H.
z The moving output is Y000 (Low bit) ~Y007 (high bit), and others include strobe pulse
signal Y010 and executing mark Y011.

A B C D H
Y000~Y007 data
T0 T0
T0: scan cycle (ms)
T0
Y010 strobe pulse signal

Y011 executing mark

z When the drive input X000 is executing, if it is OFF, the moving is stopped immediately.
When it is ON a second time, it acts from the initial state.
z When the instruction is executed with the scan cycle (T0 in the above figure), if the scan
cycle is short, please use constant scan mode; if it is long, please use timing interruption
mode.
z Transistor output must be used for the PLC.

14
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment I-O

16-character sequential output

FNC77 (PR) is the instruction for series connection output 8-bit parallel data in sequence. When
the special auxiliary relay M8027=OFF, it is 8-character series connection output; when
M8027=ON, it is 1-16 character series connection output. When moving the data, in case of 00H
(NUL), it stops executing the instruction and the data left will not be output.
Action of the instruction PR, when M8027=ON,

Drive input X000

Data Y007~Y000 Initial character Final character

T T T

Strobe pulse signal Y010

Executing mark Y011

Executing finishing mark M8029

T: Computation cycle or time of interruption

z When the instructions drive rising edge of X000, the instruction starts executing; in data
output, if the drive X000 is OFF, the output is not stopped.
z The drive X000 is ON continuously, after one cycle output, it stops output. However, the
mark 8029 will act until X000 is OFF.

15
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F80~F89 Peripheral equipment SER

Peripheral equipment SER

Function No. Memory view Name Page
80 RS Serial data transmission 1
81 PRUN Octal code bit sending 8
82 ASCI HEX converted into ASCII 9
83 HEX ASCII converted into HEX X 11
84 CCD Check code 13
85 VRRD Readout of the potential value 15
86 VRSC Scale of potential 17
87 MBUS MBUS computation 18
88 PID PID computation 27
89 EPSC Scale of extended card 34

0
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F80 RS Serial data transmission

F
RS Serial data transmission S m D n K
80
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S * *
m * * * *
D * *
n * * * *
K 0,1 0,1

Instruction symbol:

RS S m D n K

S: Address of data sent

m: Length of data sent (0~255)
D: Address of data received
n: Length of data received (0~255)
K: Serial port selection, constant 0~1
0: communication port of RS485; 1: communication port of extended card of RS485 or RS232.

The instruction is the communication port of extended cards of RS-232 and RS-485 to achieve
sending and receiving of serial non-protocol data.
z Data sending format of RS485 communication port can be set by the special buffer D8120.
During executing of the instruction RS, even settings of D8120 are changed, it is not accepted in
fact.
z Data sending format of communication port of extended cards of RS485 or RS232 can be set by
the special buffer D8320. During executing of the instruction RS, even settings of D8320 are
changed, it is not accepted in fact.
z In the environment not for information sending, point of information sending is set at “K0”. In
addition, in the environment not for information receiving, point of information receiving is set
at (K0).
z Although one program can use a large number of RS, MBUS, DTLK, RMIO and other
communication instruction, one communication instruction is driven at one serial port at the
same time, time of OFF shall be equal to or more than one scan cycle during switching.

Communication format
<Communication format (D8120), (D8320)>
In addition to non-sequential communication from the instruction FNC80 (RS), when the
communication formats D8120 and D8320 are for other communication instructions or calculator
connection, special data buffer can be used.

1
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

When the instruction FNC80 (RS) used, relevant setting for other communication instructions or
calculator connection will be unavailable, please comply with the format setting of attentions.
Bit number Name Content
0(Bit OFF) 1(Bit ON)
B0 Length of data 7 bit 8 bit
B1 Parity B2,B1
B2 (0,0): None
(0,1): (ODD)
(1,0): (EVEN)
B3 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit
B4 Communication B7,B6,B5,B4 B7,B6,B5,B4
B5 speed (0,1,1,1):9,600 (1,0,1,1):76,800
B6 (bps) (1,0,0,0):19,200 (1,1,0,0):128,000
B7 (1,0,0,1):38,400 (1,1,0,1):153,600
(1,0,1,0):57,600 (1,1,1,0):307,200
B8*1 Start character None Yes, initial value: STX(02H)
B9*1 Stop character None Yes, initial value: ETX(03H)
B10~B15*2 Unavailable

*1: content of the start character and stop character can be changed by the user. When calculator
connection is used, reset use shall apply.
*2:B10~B15 are the setting items for other communication instructions or calculator connection.
When the instruction FNC80 (RS) is used, it shall be used with “0”.

z Setting example of communication format

Length of data 8 bit
Parity None
Stop bit 2 bit
Transmission 19,200 bps
speed
Start character None
Stop character None
Communication RS485
port selection communication
port

Communication setting in the table above shall be set according to the following program or serial
communication of peripheral machines.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
D8120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
↓
D8120 89H

2
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

M8002
MOV H0089 D8120

Used special relay and data register:

a) When RS485 communication port is used:
1) Sending waiting (M8121): if there is sending request during data receiving, 1 is set, after
receiving and during data sending, it is cleared automatically.
2) Sending request (M8122): when M8122 is set by a pulse instruction under receiving waiting or
receiving finishing, the data of length (m) is started to send from S. When sending finishes,
M8122 resets automatically.
3) Receiving finishing (M8123): after receiving finishing, M8123 is ON, the data received is
transmitted to specified register, then reset to enter receiving waiting.
4) Timeout judging (M8129): during data receiving, receiving will not be restarted, and the
timeout output mark is ON, the receiving finishes; when M8123 is cleared, M8129 is
automatically cleared.
5) Communication format setting (D8120): refer to RS instruction communication format
described in previous text.
6) Number of residual data to be sent (D8122)
7) Number of data received (D8123)
8) Start character (D8124): it is for user to set the start character.
9) Stop character (D8125): it is for user to set the stop character.
10) Time of timeout judging (D8129): set the time for timeout judging (5~255)*10ms
b) When communication ports of extended card of RS485 or RS232 are used (see the above text on
definitions)
1) Sending waiting (M8321)
2) Sending request (M8322)
3) Receiving finishing (M8323)
4) Timeout judging (M8329)
5) Communication format setting (D8320)
6) Number of residual data to be sent (D8322)
7) Number of data received (D8323)
8) Start character (D8324)
9) Stop character (D8325)
10) Time of timeout judging (D8329)

Time sequence of sending and receiving

RS instruction does not stipulate first address and number of points of sent data from PLC, but also
stipulate storage first address and maximum number of points of received data. See the following on
sequence of sending and receiving data with RS instruction (RS485 communication port).

3
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

X010
RS D200 D0 D500 D1 K0
Address and Select serial
Address and number port
number of points
of points of sent data
发送请求
Sending request of data received

Write D0 (Number of points of

写入发送数据的内容
Write content of data to be sent
sending) and content of D200～
Pulse

SET M8122 Sending request, which reset after finishing,

do not reset with program
M8123
写入发送数据的内容
Write content of data to be sent Date received sent to
Receiving specified register
finishing

RST M8123 The receiving finishing symbol can not

reset in one continuous operated program

RS instruction drive
RS 指令驱动OFF ON
Sending
Data
数据1 1 Data 数据4
4
data

Sending request
M8122 ON OFF
Sending waiting
M8121 OFF ON

Receiving data
Data数据2
2 数据3
Data 3
Receiving
finishing M8123 OFF ON ON

Receiving waiting
Please use sequential control program for
state starts reset, it can not enter the next data before
reset

Sending request M8122

z The input condition X010 ON executes RS instruction, the controller enters receiving waiting.
z In case of receiving waiting or receiving finishing, M8122 is set ON by pulse signal, continuous
D0 data is sent from D200. When sending finishes, M8122 will RESET OFF automatically.

Receiving finishing M8123

z When receiving finishing mark M8123 ON, all the data received will be transferred to other
assembly for storing, and M8123 RESET is OFF.
z If M8123 RESET is OFF, it enters receiving waiting. The input condition X010 ON executes the
RS instruction, the controller enters receiving waiting.
z When setting (D1) = 0, execute the MBUS instruction, M8123 will not act or enter receiving
waiting. If after D1≧1, after M8123 ON is OFF, it enters receiving waiting.

4
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Judging of timeout M8129

z When data receiving is interrupted, if data receiving is not restarted from the time to specified
time by D8129, it is regarded as timeout and M8129 will be ON and becomes receiving
finishing.
M8129 will reset automatically with reset of M8123 program.
By using the function, receiving finishing can be finished without stop character.

Data receiving interrupts

Receiving
数据
Data

D8129*10ms
Timeout judging M8129 ON
Sequential control program for
reset

Receiving finishing M8123 ON

Time of judging timeout

z Set using time of the above timeout judging

When setting the time, the setting value is X10ms, virtual value 5~255. When D8129 setting exceeds
the range, it will become 50ms.
Take Time of timeout judging 50ms as example.
M8002
MOV K5 D8129

<Processing of 16-bit data> When M8161=OFF, (M8161 is shared by ASCI,HEX,CCD and other
instructions)

5
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Sending data
STX D200 Down D200 Up D201 Down D201 Up ETX
Start character ↑ Stop character
S．Specified start address No.
M specified number of byte to be sent
Receiving data
STX D500 D500 D501 D501 D502 D502 ETX
Down Up Down Up Down Up
Start ↑ Stop
character character
D．Specified start address No.

(1) Sending data and number of residual data to be sent

D200 Down

D201 Down
D200 UP

D201 Up
EXT
STX

Sending data

4
3
2
Number of residual data to 1
be sent D8122 0

(2) Receiving data and number of data received

D501 Down
D500 Down

D502 Down
D500 Up

D501 Up

D502 Up
EXT
STX

Receiving data

6
5 When receiving finishing symbol M8123 resets,
4
3 the data received will reset
Number of data received 2
D8123 1
0

<Processing of 8-bit data (extension function)>When M8161=ON, (M8161 is shared by ASCI, HEX,
CCD and other instructions)

6
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

M8000
M8161 ON 8-bit mode

RS D200 K4 D500 K10 K0

High 8-bit(Ignore) Low 8-bit

16-bit data ignores high 8-bit, only low 8-bit is valid

Sending data
STX D200 down D201 down D202 down D203 down ETX
Start character ↑ Stop character
S．specified start address No.
M specifies number of byte to be sent
Receiving data
STX D500 D501 D502 D503 D504 D505 down ETX
down down down down down
Start ↑ Stop
character character
S. Specified start address No.
It may not exceed maximum points specified by n, and the stop character
EXT or points n receiving represents receiving finishing.

（1）Sending data and number of residual data to be sent

D200 Down
D201 Down
D202 Down
D203 Down
EXT
STX

Sending data

4
3
Number of residual 2
data to be sent 1
D8122 0

（2）Receiving data and number of data received

D500 Down
D501 Down
D502 Down
D503 Down
D504 Down
D505 Down
EXT
STX

Receiving data

6
5 Receiving finishing symbol M8123 resets, the
4 data received also resets.
3
Number of data received 2
D8123 1
0

7
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F81 PRUN Octal code bit sending

F
PRUN Octal code bit sending S· D·
81 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

PRUN S· D·

S·: Sending source device, n of KnX, KnM is 1~8, and minimum bit of the specified device No. is 0.
D·: Sending destination device

The instruction is specified device number with octal code system and sends data.
Example 1:
X000
PRUN K4X10 K4M0

When instructions X10~X17→M0~M7，X20~X27→M10~M17 are executed, values of M8 and M9

will not be changed.

Example 2:
X000
PRUN K4M0 K4Y10

When instructions M0~M7→ Y10~Y17, M10~M17→ Y20~Y27 are executed, values of M8 and M9
will not be sent.

8
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F82 ASCI HEX converted into ASCII

F
ASCI HEX converted into ASCII S· D· n
82 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

ASCI S· D· n

S·: Convert source device

D·: Convert destination device
n: Bit to be converted, n=1~256

The instruction is used to convert HEX code into ASCII code, with 16-bit and 8-bit conversion modes.
For example:
X000
ASCI D100 D200 K4

Of them: D100=0ABCH
D101=1234H
D102=5678H.
ASCII: [0]=30H [1]=31H [2]=32H [3]=33H [4]=34H [5]=35H
[6]=36H [7]=37H [8]=38H [9]=39H [A]=41H [B]=42H
[C]=43H [D]=44H [E]=45H [F]=46H

16-bit conversion mode, when M8161＝OFF (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
z After figures of HEX of S· are converted into ASCII code, they are sent to high 8-bit and low
8-bit of D· of S·, figure of conversion is set with n.
z D· is classified into low 8-bit and high 8-bit, which are used to store ASCII data.

9
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Conversion results:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
D·
D200 Low [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
D200 High [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
D201 Low [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
D201 High [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
D202 Low [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
D202 High [C] [B] [A] [0]
D203 Low Do Not Change [C] [B] [A]
D203 High [C] [B]
D204 Low [C]

8-bit conversion mode, when M8161=ON, (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
z After figures of HEX of S· are converted into ASCII code, they are sent to low 8-bit of D· and
figures of conversion is set with n.
z High 8-bit of D· is 0.
16-bit data

0 Low 8-bit
Destination address
Conversion results:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
D·
D200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
D201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
D202 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
D203 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
D204 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
D205 [C] [B] [A] [0]
D206 Do Not Change [C] [B] [A]
D207 [C] [B]
D208 [C]
When BCD is output by printing and etc., BIN→BCD conversion instruction is used before the
instruction.

10
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F83 HEX ASCII converted into HEX

F
HEX ASCII converted into HEX S· D· n
83 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *
n * *

Instruction format:

HEX S· D· n

S·: Convert source device

D·: Convert destination device
n: bit of conversion, n=1~256

The instruction is used to convert ASCII code into HEX code, in 16-bit and 8-bit conversion modes.
For example:

X000
HEX D200 D100 K4

16-bit conversion mode, when M8161=OFF, M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions.
z After ASCII character data of high and low 8-bit of S· are converted into HEX data, it is sent to
D· every 4 bits. Bit of the conversion is set with n.
z In HEX instruction, when the stored S· data is not ASCII code, it may be computation error and
HEX conversion can not be executed. Especially M8161 is OFF, high 8-bit of S· needs to store
ASCII code, please pay attention.
Conversion results:
ASCII HEX D·
S· D102 D101 D100
code conversion n
Do not
D200 Low 30H 0 1 ···0H
change
D200 High 41H A 2 · is 0 ··0AH
D201 Low 42H B 3 ·0ABH
D201 High 43H C 4 0ABCH
D202 Low 31H 1 5 ···0H ABC1H
D202 High 32H 2 6 ··0AH BC12H
D203 Low 33H 3 7 ·0ABH C123H
D203 High 34H 4 8 0ABCH 1234H
D204 Low 35H 5 9 ···0H ABC1H 2345H

11
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

8-bit conversion mode, when M8161=ON, (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
z After ASCII character data of low 8-bit of S· is converted into HEX data, it is sent to D· every 4
bits. Bit of the conversion is set with n.

16-bit data

Ignore Low 8-bit

Source address

Conversion results:
ASCII HEX D·
S· D102 D101 D100
code conversion n
Do not
D200 30H 0 1 ···0H
change

D201 41H A 2 · is 0 ··0AH

D202 42H B 3 ·0ABH
D203 43H C 4 0ABCH
D204 31H 1 5 ···0H ABC1H
D205 32H 2 6 ··0AH BC12H
D206 33H 3 7 ·0ABH C123H
D207 34H 4 8 0ABCH 1234H
D208 35H 5 9 ···0H ABC1H 2345H

z When the input data is BCD code, after executing the instruction, conversion from BCD→ BIN
shall be executed.

12
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F84 CCD Check code

F
CCD Check code S· D· n
84 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * *
n * * * *

Instruction format:

CCD S· D· n

S·: Start device of information source

D·: Store destination results
n: number of data, n=1~256
It is the instruction for computing check code, in 8-bit and 16-bit conversion mode.
For example:
X000
CCD D100 D0 K10

16-bit conversion mode When M8161=OFF, (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
z Sum of specified high and low-bit data of point n as start by S· and horizontal check code are
stored in D· and D·+1 devices.
z It is used for check of communication code.
Conversion of the above program:
S· Data content
D100 Low K100=01100100
D100 High K111=01101111
D101 Low K100=01100100
D101 High K98=01100010
D102 Low K123=01111011
D102 High K66=01000010
D103 Low K100=01100100
D103 High K95=01011111
D104 Low K210=11010010
D104 High K88=01011000
Total K1091
Horizontal 10000101
check

13
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Horizontal check: if number of 1 is odds, it is 1; it is even, it is 0.

8-bit conversion mode, when M8161=ON (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
z Sum of specified data of point n (only low 8-bit) as start by S· and horizontal check code are
stored in D· and D·+1 devices.
z It is used for check of communication data.

16-bit data

Ignore Low 8-bit

Source address

The above program conversion is stated below:

S· Data content
D100 K100=01100100
D101 K111=01101111
D102 K100=01100100
D103 K98=01100010
D104 K123=01111011
D105 K66=01000010
D106 K100=01100100
D107 K95=01011111
D108 K210=11010010
D109 K88=01011000
Total K1091
Horizontal 10000101
check

14
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F85 VRRD Readout of the potential value

F
VRRD Readout of the potential value S· D·
85 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

VRRD S· D·

S·: number of potential

D·: device for storing scale of potential
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
※ 2: The instruction VRRD is used to read scale values of the extended card (TP03-6AV), and the
scale values are stored in D.

For example:
X000
VRRD K0 D0
X001
T0 D0

The case for analog timer

z Analog value of the potential No.0 is converted into decimal BIN value (0-1023), which is store
in D0 and used as setting value of the timer.
z When setting value of the timer needs digits over 1024, the instruction FNC22 (MUL) shall be
used. When the readout is taken as product, setting of the timer is done indirectly.

z The corresponding knobs VR0~VR7 and setting values of the instruction RRD are K0~K7. In the
following program, it is decorated with the index buffer (Z0=0~7), and K0Z0=K0~K7. See the
following chart:

15
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

M8000
0 RST Z0

8 cycles between FOR~

4 FOR K8 NEXT

Instruction action between FOR~NEXT

X000 Potential value Instructions from step 4 to step 16 cycle 8 times according
the instruction FOR, after 8 times of sending VR0－>
7 VRRD K0Z0 D200Z0 sent to the data
D200 VR1－ >D201…… VR7－>D207, it is executed
register
after step 17.

INC Z0

16 NEXT
X000
17 T0 D200

T0
21 Y000

X001
23 T1 D201

T1
27 Y001
Timing circuit:
For T0~ T7 are 100 ms timer, so
the corresponding setting value
of 0~1023 can achieve timing
from 0~102.3S.
X007
59 T7 D207

T7
63 Y007

65 END

16
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F86 VRSC Scale of potential

F
VRSC Scale of potential S· D·
86 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * * * * * * * * *
Instruction format:

VRSC S· D·

S·: Number of potential

D·: Location of storing scale of potential
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
※ 2: The instruction VRSC is used to read scale values of the extended card (TP03-6AV), and the
scale values are stored in D.
VRSC instruction is used to read 2 points of PLC host, numbered No.0, No.1 or 6 points of the
function card, scale value of potential numbered No.2-No.7 (scale value 0-10) and the scale value is
stored in D·.
For example:

X000
VRSC K1 D1

z Scale 0-10 of the potential No.1 is stored in D1 with BIN value.

z When the knob rotates the scale, it is converted into integral by round down.
Use of rotating switch

X000
VRSC K1 D1
X000
DECO D1 M0 K4
M0
When the scale is 0, ON

M1
When the scale is 1, ON

M10
When the scale is 10, ON

z According to the potential scale 0~10, 1 point of the auxiliary relays M0~M10 is ON.
z With the instruction F41 DECO, auxiliary relays M0~M15 are occupied.

17
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F87 MBUS computation

F
MBUS MBUS computation S m D n K
87
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S * *
m * * * *
D * *
n * * * *
K 0,1 0,1
Instruction symbol:

MBUS S m D n K

S: Address of data sent

m: Length of data sent (0~255)
D: Address of data received
n: Length of data received(0~255)
K: Serial port selection, constant 0~1
0: communication port of RS485; 1:communication port of extended card of RS485 or RS232.

The instructions are communication ports (optional for all the models) for RS485 or RS232 extended
cards, and RS485 communication port (only built-in for model H) to reach sending and receiving of
serial Modbus protocol data. The above two ports can realize MBUS instruction communication
simultaneously, and such function independently.
The instruction MBUS can be used as host station communication:
Stored instruction format of sent data register is HEX instruction code, including address, function
code and communication data. The MBUS instruction sends according to setting mode like RTU mode
plus CRC check code (2bytes); if it is ASCII mode, send plus start character (3AH), check code LRC
(2bytes) and stop character (0DH+0AH) and the instruction code is converted into ASCII format to
send to BUFF.
Stored instruction format in the received data register is address, function code and communication
data, and start character, stop character and check code are not stored.
z Sending format of RS485 communication port data can be set with the special data buffer D8120.
During executing of MBUS instruction, even settings of D8120 are changed, it will not be
accepted.
z Sending format of communication port data of RS485 or RS232 extended card can be set with
the special data buffer D8320. During executing of MBUS instruction, even settings of D8320
are changed, it will not be accepted.
z In the environment not for information sending, point of information sending is set at “K0”
z Although a large number of RS, MBUS, DTLK, RMIO and other communication instructions
can be set in one program, only one communication instruction at one serial port at the same

18
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

time is driven, and OFF time shall be equal to or more than one scan cycle when switching.
Communication specifications
<Communication formats “D8120”, “D8320”>
In addition to Modbus protocol communication from the instruction FNC87 (MBUS), when the
communication formats D8120 and D8320 are for other communication instructions or calculator
connection, special data buffer can be used.
When the instruction FNC87 (MBUS) used, relevant setting for other communication instructions or
calculator connection will be unavailable, please comply with the format setting of attentions.
Bit number Name Content
0(Bit OFF) 1(Bit ON)
B0 Length of data 7 bit 8 bit
B1 Parity B2,B1
B2 (0,0): None
(0,1): (ODD)
(1,0): (EVEN)
B3 Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit
B4 Communication B7,B6,B5,B4 B7,B6,B5,B4
B5 speed (0,1,1,1):9,600 (1,0,1,1):76,800
B6 (bps) (1,0,0,0):19,200 (1,1,0,0):128,000
B7 (1,0,0,1):38,400 (1,1,0,1):153,600
(1,0,1,0):57,600 (1,1,1,0):307,200
B8~B12 *1 Unavailable
B13 Modbus mode (0) : RTU mode (1) : ASCII mode
B14~B15*1 Unavailable
*1:B8~B12，B14，B15 are setting items for other communication instructions or calculator connection.
When the instruction FNC87(MBUS) is used, it must be used with “0”.

z Setting example of communication format

Length of data 8 bit
Parity None
Stop bit 2 bit
Transmission 38,400 bps
speed
Mode ASCII mode
Serial port RS485 expansion
selection communication card

Communication setting in the table above shall be set according to the following program or serial
communication of peripheral machines.
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
D8320 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
↓
D8320 2099H

19
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

M8002
MOV H2099 D8320

Used special relay and data register:

a) When RS485 communication port is used:
1) Sending waiting (M8121): if there is sending request during data receiving, 1 is set, after
receiving and during data sending, it is cleared automatically.
2) Sending request (M8122): when M8122 is set by a pulse instruction under receiving waiting or
receiving finishing, the data of length (m) is started to send from S. When sending finishes,
M8122 resets automatically.
3) Receiving finishing (M8123): after receiving finishing, M8123 is ON, the data received is
transmitted to specified register, then reset to enter receiving waiting.
4) Error indication (M8124): receiving error (error of CRC for RTU mode, error of LRC or stop
character for ASCII mode).
5) Timeout judging (M8129): during data receiving, receiving will not be restarted, and the
timeout output mark is ON, the receiving finishes; when M8123 is cleared, M8129 is
automatically cleared.
6) Communication format setting (D8120): refer to MBUS instruction communication format
described in previous text.
7) Number of residual data to be sent (D8122)
8) Number of data received (D8123)
9) Time of timeout judging (D8129): set the time for timeout judging (5~255)*10ms.

b) When communication ports of RS485 or RS232 extended card are used (refer to the above article
on definitions):
1) Sending waiting (M8321)
2) Sending request (M8322)
3) Receiving finishing (M8323)
4) Timeout judging (M8329)
5) Error indication (M8324)
6) Communication format setting (D8320)
7) Number of residual data to be sent (D8322)
8) Number of data received (D8323)
9) Time of timeout judging (D8329)

Time sequence of sending and receiving

MBUS instruction does not stipulate first address and number of points of sent data from PLC, but
also stipulates first address and maximum receiving point number of received data. See the following
figure on sequence of sending and receiving data with MBUS instruction (for example, RS485
extended communication card is selected).

20
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

X010
MBUS D200 D0 D500 D1 K1
Address and number Address and Select serial
of point of data to be number of points port
sent of data received
Sending request
发送请求
Write content of data to be sent Write content of D0 (Sending
写入发送数据的内容 point) and D200～.
Pulse

SET M8322 Sending request, it reset automatically after

finishing, and program reset is not allowed.
M8323
Write content of data to be sent
写入发送数据的内容 Data received sent to
Receiving specified register.
finishing

The receiving finishing symbol can not

RST M8323 reset in one continuous operated
program.

MBUS instruction
MBUS指令驱动 drive ON

Sending data 数据1

Data 1 Data 数据4
4

Sending request M8322 ON OFF

Sending waiting M8321
OFF ON

Receiving data
Data数据2
2 数据3
Data 3
Receiving finishing
M8323 OFF ON ON

Receiving waiting starts

Sequential control program for reset, the next
data can not be entered before reset.

Sending request M8322

z When input condition X010 ON executes the MBUS instruction, it enters receiving waiting.
z In case of receiving waiting or receiving finishing, M8322 is set ON by pulse signal, continuous
D0 data is sent from D200. When sending finishes, M8322 will RESET OFF automatically.

Receiving finishing M8323

z When receiving finishing mark M8323 ON, all the data received will be transferred to other
assembly for storing, and M8323 RESET is OFF.
z If M8323 RESET is OFF, it enters receiving waiting. The input condition X010 ON executes the
MBUS instruction, the controller enters receiving waiting.
z When setting (D1)=0, execute the MBUS instruction, M8323 will not act or enter receiving
waiting. If after D1≧1, after M8323 ON is OFF, it enters receiving waiting.

21
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Judging of timeout M8329

z When data receiving is interrupted, if the data receiving is not restarted from the time to setting
time by D8329, it is regarded as timeout and M8329 will be ON and become receiving finishing.
M8329 will reset automatically with reset of the program M8323.
With the function, data receiving (ASCII mode) can be finished without stop character.
Date received interrupted
Receiving
数据
Data

D8329*10ms
Judging of timeout M8329 ON

Sequential program for reset

Receiving finishing M8323 ON

Time of judging timeout

z Set using time of timeout judging.

When set the time, the setting value is X10ms, and the virtual value 5~255. When setting of D8329
exceeds the range, it becomes 50ms.
Take time of judging timeout 50ms as example.
M8002
MOV K5 D8329

<Processing of 16-bit data>When M8161=OFF, (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD and other
instructions)
M8000
M8161 OFF 16-bit mode

MBUS D200 K4 D500 K10 K1

High 8-bit Low 8-bit

16-bit data is divided into high and low

8-bit data for data sending and receiving.

22
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Sending data（ASCII mode is different from RTU mode）

STX D200 D200 up D201 D201 up Check code ETX
down down
Start character LRC（ASCII） Stop character
(3A） (0D0A)
RTU mode ↑ CRC（RTU） RTU mode
（None） （None）
S．Specified start address No.
M specified number of byte to be sent

Receiving data
STX D500 D500 D501 D501 D502 D502 Check code ETX
Down Up Down Up Down Up
Start LRC (ASCII) Stop character
character(3A) (0D0A)
RTU (None) ↑ CRC (RTU)
D．Specified start address No.
It may not exceed maximum points specified by n,
and the stop character EXT or points n receiving
represents receiving finishing.
(3) Sending data and number of residual data to be sent
Under RTU mode
D200 Down

D201 Down

RTU mode
CRC Down
D200 Up

D201 Up

CRC Up

Sending data

6
5
4
3
2
Number of residual data to 1
be sent D8322 0

Under ASCII mode

D500 Down
D500 Down

D501 Down
D501 Down

D502 Down
D502 Down

LRC Down

ASCII mode
D500 Up
D500 Up

D501 Up
D501 Up

D502 Up
D502 Up
LRC Up
3A

0D
0A

Sending data

17 16
15
14
Number of
residual data to 3 2
be sent D8322
1
0

23
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

(4) Receiving data and number of data received

Under RTU mode:

D500 Down

D501 Down

D502 Down

CRC Down
RTU mode

D500 Up

D501 Up

D502 Up

CRC Up
Receiving data

8
7
6
When the receiving finishing symbol M8323
5
4 resets, the data received also resets.
3
Number of data received 2
D8323 1
0
Under ASCII mode
D500 Down
D500 Down

D501 Down
D501 Down

D502 Down
D502 Down

LRC Down
ASCII mode
D500 Up
D500 Up

D501 Up
D501 Up

D502 Up
D502 Up
LRC Up

0D
0A
Receiving data

15 16 When receiving finishing

14 symbol M8323 resets, the data
received also resets.

Number of data
4
received
3
D8323 2
1
0
<Processing of 8-bit data (extension function)>When M8161=ON, (M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI,
HEX, CCD and other instructions)
M8000
M8161 ON 8-bit mode

MBUS D200 K4 D500 K10 K1

High 8-bit
Low 8-bit
(Ignore)

16-bit data ignores high 8-bit, and only low 8-bit is valid

Sending data（ASCII mode and RTU mode are different）

STX D200 D201 D202 D203 Check code ETX
Down Down Down Down
Start character LRC (ASCII) Stop character
(3A) (0D0A)
RTU mode ↑ CRC (RTU) RTU mode
(None) (None)
S．Specified start address No.
M specified number of bytes to be sent

24
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Receiving data
STX D500 D501 D502 D503 D504 D505 Check code ETX
Down Down Down Down Down Down
Start LRC (ASCII) Stop character
character(3A) (0D0A)
RTU(None) ↑ CRC (RTU)
D．Specified start address No.
It may not exceed maximum points specified by n,
and the stop character EXT or points n receiving
represents receiving finishing.
(1) Sending data and number of residual data to be sent
Under RTU mode
D200 Down
D201 Down
D202 Down
D203 Down

RTU mode
CRC Down
CRC Up

Sending data

6
5
4
3
Number of residual data to 2
be sent D8322
1
0
Under ASCII mode
D500 Down
D500 Down

D503 Down
D503 Down
D501 Down
D501 Down
D502 Down
D502 Down

D504 Down
D504 Down
D505 Down
D505 Down

LRC Down

ASCII mode
LRC Up
3A

0D
0A

Sending data

17 16
15
14
Number of
residual data to 3 2
be sent D8322
1
0
(2) Receiving data and number of data received
Under RTU mode:
D500 Down
D501 Down
D502 Down
D503 Down
D504 Down
D505 Down
CRC Down

RTU mode
CRC Up

Receiving data

8
7
6
When the receiving finishing symbol M8323
5
4 resets, the data received also resets.
3
Number of data received 2
D8323 1
0

25
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Under ASCII mode

D500 Down
D500 Down
D501 Down
D501 Down
D502 Down
D502 Down
D503 Down
D503 Down
D504 Down
D504 Down
D505 Down
D505 Down
ASCII Mode

LRC Down
LRC Up

0D
0A
Receiving data

15 16 When the receiving finishing

14 symbol M8323 resets, the
receiving data also resets.
4
Number of data 3
received D8323 2
1
0

26
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F88 PID computation

F
PID PID computation S1 S2 S3 D
88
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1 *
S2 *
S3 *
D *

Instruction symbol

PID S1 S2 S3 D

S1: Destination value (SV)

S2: Current value (PV)
S3: Parameters, S3~S3+6 set control parameters.
D: Output value (MV)
※ 1: For TP03H/M machine type, S3 only uses D0~D7975.
※ 2: For TP03SR machine type, S3 only uses D0~D487
S1: Set current value SV
S2: Set measuring value PV When executing the program, the computation results are stored in D.
S3~S3＋6:Set control parameter

The instruction is the special instruction for PID computation control, after the sampling time is up,
the scanning time can reach PID computation. After setting all the parameters, PID instruction starts
executing (before PID computation, parameter setting values for PID control must be written with
MOV and other instructions), the results are temporarily stored in D. Content of D specifies temporary
data storage without holding in case of power failure (if the register with holding in case of power
failure, the register shall reset when RUN is added at the beginning of the program).

M8002
RST D***

D*** ：It is the data register for

holding in case of
power failure

The program will occupy 25 data registers from S3 automatically, (the following page displays ACT
setting of control parameters, when BIT1, BIT2 and BIT 5 are 0, only 20 data registers are occupied
from S3).

27
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

Parameter setting
Setting values of parameters for control must be written with MOV and other instructions before PID
computation. In addition, when specifying data register in the zone for holding in case of power
failure, the setting values are held after OFF of the PLC. Therefore, it requires no re-writing.

S3 Sampling time (Ts) 1~32767[ms](No shorter than the scanning time)

S3+1 Direction of action (ACT) BIT0 0: positive action 1:Negative action
BIT1 0: No input variation alarm; 1: Input variation
alarm
BIT2 0:No output variation alarm; 1:Output variation
alarm
BIT3 Unavailable
BIT4 0:Auto turning function disable
1:Auto turning function enable
BIT5 0: no upper and lower limits of the output
values; 1: effective upper and lower limits of the
output values.
BIT6~BIT15 Unavailable
BIT5 and BIT2 will not be ON simultaneously.
S3+2 Input wave filtering constant (a) 0~99[%] No input wave filtering for 0
S3+3 Proportional gain (Kp) 1~32767[%]
S3+4 Integration time (TI) 1~32767[x100ms] 0 is integration action
S3+5 Differential gain (KD) 0~100[%] 0 is no differential grain
S3+6 Differential time(TD) 1~32767[x10ms] 0 is no differential action
S3+7~S3+19 When PID computation is executed, it is used for internal processing.
S3+20 Setting value of input variation 0~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit1=1, it is effective)
(increasing)
S3+21 Setting value of input variation 0~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit1=1, it is effective)
(decreasing)
S3+22 Setting value of output variation 0~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit2=1,bit5=0, it is effective)
(increasing)
Or setting value of upper limit –32768~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit2=1,bit5=0, it is
of the output effective)
S3+23 Setting value of input variation 0~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit2=1,bit5=0, it is effective)
(decreasing)
Or setting value of lower limit –32768~32767(S3+1<ACT> bit2=1,bit5=0, it is
of the output effective)

S3+24 Alarm output BIT0 input variation (increasing)

BIT1 input variation (decreasing)
BIT2 output variation (increasing)
BIT3 output variation (decreasing)
(S3+1<ACT> bit1=1 or bit= 1, it is effective)

28
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

However, S3+20~S3+24 in S3+1<ACT>, bit1=1，bit2=2 or bit5=1 is occupied.

Although PID instruction can be executed for many times (no restriction on times of the loop), S3 or
D used in the computation can not be used repeatedly.
PID instruction can be used in interruption of timer, sub-program, step charter and jump instruction.
Maximum error of sampling time T is between -(1 scan cycle+1ms) ~ +(1 scan cycle). When Ts is too
small, such variation may lead to problems. At this time, please execute with constant scan mode or
program in interruption of the timer.
If sampling time Ts≤1 computation cycle of PLC controller, the following computation abnormality
can occur (K6740), and Ts= computation cycle for PID computation. At this time, it is suggested that
PID instruction can be used in interruption (I6 口口~I8 口口) of the timer.
Input filter constant can be used to relieve variation of measuring values.
Increasing differential gain can be used to relieve dramatic variation of output values.
Direction of action (S3+1(ACT))

Direction of action [bit 0]

Direction of action of the system is specified with positive action and negative action.
Upper and lower limits settings of output values [bit5]
When settings of upper and lower limits of the output values are valid (S3+1(ACT) bit5=1), see the
following figure on the output values. Use of the settings can be used to inhibit increasing of the PID
control differential item. When the function is used, bit 2 of S3+1(ACT) is OFF.
Output value

No upper and lower limit of

output value

Output unavailable

S3+22
Upper limit of
output value

S3+23
Lower limit of
output value Upper and lower limits of
output value

Output unavailable

Time

Alarm setting (Input variation and output variation) [bit1,bit2]

Make bit 1 and bit 2 of S3+1(ACT) ON, the operator can detect the input variation and output
variation. The detection shall be executed according to values of S3+20~S3+23. If it exceeds the
setting input variation, the bit elements of alarm symbols will be ON after PID instruction is executed
(see the following figure).
However, when S3+21 and S3+23 are taken as alarm values, the setting values will be used as
negative values. In addition, when the output variation is used for alarm, bit 5 of S3+1(ACT) should
be OFF.

29
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

a) Variation
(Previous)- (Current) =Variation

b) Action of alarm symbols (S3+24)

i) Input variation (bit1=1)

Input variation

Increasing
side

Sampling
times
0

Decreasing
side

Alarm symbol
S3+24
bit0 ON OFF

S3+24
bit1 OFF

ii)Output variation (bit2=1)

Output variation

Increasing
side

Sampling
times
0

Decreasing
side

Alarm symbol
S3+24
bit2 ON OFF

S3+24
bit3 OFF ON

Mathematical method of 3 parameters of PID

To execute PID for better control, the optimum values of constants (parameters) for the control objects
must be used.

30
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

There will be the optimum values of 3 constants to be obtained for PID (proportional gain Kp,
integration time T1 and differential time TD).
Step response method is used for mathematical computation and the following is detailed description.

The step response method is to add 0-100% step output on the control system and judge features of
actions from input variation (maximum inclination R and unavailable time L) to obtain 3 constants of
PID.
Step 1 output can be obtained by 0-75% or 0-50%.
Features of actions

Output value
100%
Output value （MV）

0%
Time

Variation of
input value

1S Maximum
inclination(R)

Time S
Useless time L(S) 1S

<Action features and 3 constants >

Proportional grain Integration time Differential time
Kp（%） T1(×100ms) TD(×100ms)
Only proportional —— ——
1 Input values
control P ×
RL (MV )
PI control 33L ——
0.9 Input values
×
RL (MV )
PID control 20L 50L
1.2 Input values
×
RL (MV )

31
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

In case of error in setting values of the control parameters or PID computation, the computation error
M8067 in ON. According to the error content, the following data created in D8067.
Code Error Processing state Processing method
K6705 Operand of applied instruction is out of the PID instruction
object device computation stops
K6706 Range and data of device address No. of
operand of applied instruction are out of the
boundary
K6730 Sampling time TS is out of the object
boundary (Ts<0) Please confirm
K6732 Input wave filtering constant is out of the content of control
object boundary data
K6733 Proportional grain is out of the object
boundary
K6734 Integration time is out of the object
boundary
K6735 Differential grain is out of the object
boundary
K6736 Differential time is out of the object
boundary
K6740 Sampling time≤ Computation cycle PID instruction
K6742 Overflow of measuring value variation computation continues
K6743 Overflow of deviated value
K6744 Overflow of integration computation
K6745 Overflow of differential grain leads to
overflow of differential value
K6746 Overflow of differential computation values
K6747 Overflow of PID computation results
K6750 SV-PVnf<150,or system is unstable Auto turning stops
K6751 Large Overshoot of the Set Value Auto turning continues
K6752 Large fluctuations during Auto tuning Set Auto turning stops
Process

Key points:
Before executing PID computation, the correct measuring values shall be read into measuring value
PV of PID, especially PID computation is executed for input value of input module of analog value,
switching time shall be paid attention to.
Basic computation formula of PID instruction
PID computation is executed according to speed shape and differential shape of measuring values.
PID executes computation formula of positive action or negative action according specified direction
in S3.
In addition, values after S3 in computation, specify the used parameter content.

32
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

PID basic computation formula

Direction PID computation method
of action
Positive Ts
ΔMV = Kp{( EVn − EVn −1 ) + EV n+ Dn }
action T1
EVn = PVnf − SV

TD α D .TD
Dn = (−2 PVnf −1 + PVnf + PVnf − 2 ) + .Dn −1
Ts + α D .TD Ts + α D .TD

MVn = ∑ ΔMV

Reverse Ts
ΔMV = Kp{( EVn − EVn −1 ) + EV n+ Dn }
action T1
EVn = SV − PVnf

TD α D .TD
Dn = ( 2 PVnf −1 − PVnf − PVnf − 2 ) + .Dn −1
Ts + α D .TD Ts + α D .TD

MVn = ∑ ΔMVΔ

Mark interpretation
EVn: deviation of current sampling
EVn-1: deviation of one cycle
SV: destination value
PVnf: measuring value of current sampling (after wave filtering)
PVnf-1: measuring value one cycle before (after wave filtering)
PVnf-2: measuring value two cycles before (after wave filtering)
ΔMV: variation of the output
MVn : current operand
Dn : current differential quantity
Dn-1 : differential item one cycle before
Kp : proportional grain
Ts : sampling cycle
T1 : integration constant
TD : differential constant
αD: differential grain

PVnf is the value computed according to the read measuring value.

[Later measuring values PVnf]=PVn+L（PVnf-1-PVn）
PVn: measuring value of current sampling
L: wave filtering coefficient
PVnf-1:: measuring value one cycle before (after wave filtering)

33
 Peripheral equipment
6 Applied instruction interpretation SER

F89 EPSC Scale of extended card

F
EPSC Scale of extended card S1· S2· S3· D·
89 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S3· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

EPSC S1· S2· S3· D·

S1·: Channel No.(0~5)

S2·: Set minimum value of the scale
S3·: Set maximum value of the scale
D·: Store current scale value
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
※ 2: The instruction EPSC is used to read scale values of the extended card (TP03-2AI, TP03-2TI),
and the scale values are stored in D.

For example:
X000
EPSC K1 K0 K20 D1

z Read channel 1 of the extended card to store in D1, the minimal value is 0, the maximal value is
20.
z When the knob is rotating on the rotating scale, it become integral from 0-20 by rounding down.

34
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F110~F119，F120-F129，F130~F137 floating-point instructions

F110~F119，F120-F129，F130~F137 floating
Function No. Memory view Name Page
F110 ECMP Comparison of binary floating-point 1
number
F111 EZCP Comparison of binary floating-point 2
number zone
F112 EMOV Moving of binary floating-point 3
number
F118 EBCD Binary floating-point number→ 4
Decimal floating-point number
F119 EBIN Decimal floating-point number→ 5
Binary floating-point number
F120 EADD Binary floating-point number 6
addition computation
F121 ESUB Subtraction computation of binary 7
floating-point numbers
F122 EMUL Multiplication computation of binary 8
floating-point numbers
F123 EDIV Division computation of binary 9
floating-point number
F124 EXP Exponent arithmetic computation 10
F125 LOGE Natural logarithm computation 11
F126 LOG10 Common logarithm computation 12
F127 ESQR Square root of binary floating-point 13
number
F128 ENEG Binary floating-point numbers NEG 14
computation
F129 INT Binary floating-point → BIN integral 15
conversion
F130 SIN Computation of floating-point SIN 16
F131 COS Computation of floating-point COS 17
F132 TAN Computation of floating-point TAN 18
F133 ASIN Computation of floating-point ASIN 19
F134 ACOS Computation of floating-point ACOS 20
F135 ATAN Computation of floating-point ATAN 21
F136 RAD Angle converted into radian 22
F137 DEG Radian converted into angle 23

0
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F110 ECMP Comparison of binary floating-point number

F Comparison of binary
ECMP S1· S2· D·
110 D P floating-point number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

ECMP S1· S2· D·

S1·: Comparison value 1 of binary floating-point number

S2·: Comparison value 2 of binary floating-point number
D·: Comparison results, occupying continuous 3 points
Example:
X000
DECMP D30 D40 M0
M0
D31,D30>D41,D40 M0=ON
M1
D31,D30=D41,D40 M1=ON
M2
D31,D30<D41,D40 M2=ON

When X000 is OFF, even the instruction ECMP is not executed, M0-M2 keeps the state of X000
not OFF.

Compare S1 and S2 floating-point number values, and the results (ON or OFF) are stored in 3-bit
started with D. When the constants K and H are specified as source data, it is converted into
binary floating-point number automatically for processing.

1
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F111 EZCP Comparison of binary floating-point number zone

F Comparison of binary
EZCP S1· S2· S· D·
111 D P floating-point number zone
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
S· * * * * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

EZCP S1· S2· S· D·

S1·: Lower limit value of binary floating-point number for zone comparison
S2·: Upper limit value of binary floating-point number for zone comparison
S·: Comparison value of binary floating-point number
D·: Comparison result, occupying continuous 3 points
Note: when setting, S1·≤S2·; when S1·>S2·, value of S2· shall be taken as the same value of S1·.
Example:
X000
DEZCP D30 D40 D50 M0

M0
D31,D30>D51,D50 M0=ON
M1
D31,D30=D51,D50=D41,D40 M1=ON
M2
D51,D50>D41,D40 M2=ON

When X000 is OFF, even the instruction ECMP is not executed, M0-M2 keeps the state of X000
not OFF.
Compare content of S and S+1 and range of the two specified binary floating-point number S1 and
S2. The results (ON or OFF) are stored in the 3-bit started with D.
When the constants K and H are specified as source data, it is converted into binary floating-point
number automatically for processing.

2
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F112 EMOV Moving of binary floating-point number

F Moving of binary floating-point
EMOV S· D·
112 D P number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EMOV S· D·

S·: Binary floating point data (transfer source) or device number storing data
D·: Device number receiving floating point data.
Content (binary floating-point number) of the transfer source (S·+1, S·) are transferred to (D·+1,
D·). A real number (E) can be directly specified as S·.
Example:
X000
DEMOV D10 D0

(D11, D10) → (D1, D0)

X000
DEMOV E-1.23 D0

-1.23→ (D1, D0)

3
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F118 EBCD Binary floating-point number→Decimal floating-point number

F Binary floating-point number→
EBCD S· D·
118 D P Decimal floating-point number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EBCD S· D·

S·: Data source (binary floating-point number)

D·: Conversion results (decimal floating-point number)

Example:
X000
DEBCD D50 D40

Convert binary floating-point number in the element specified by the source data into decimal
floating-point number and store it in the destination address.
Binary floating-point number
D51 D50 Mantissa section 23-bit, the index section 8-bit and the symbol 1-bit

Decimal floating-point number

Index Mantissa
D41 D40

Mantissa section Index section

D40×10D41
The value of Decimal floating-point number = [Mantissa D40] X10 [ IndexD41]
Mantissa D40= (1,000~9,999) or 0
Index D41= -41 ~ +35
The decimal computation is executed based on the binary floating-point value in the PLC, for the
binary floating-pint value, it is hard to judge, so it shall be converted into binary floating-point
value. It is easy for the peripheral equipment to monitor.

4
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F119 EBIN Decimal floating-point number→Binary floating-point number

F Decimal floating-point number→
EBIN S· D·
119 D P Binary floating-point number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EBIN S· D·

S·: Data source (decimal floating-point number)

D·: Conversion result (binary floating-point number)
Example:
X000
DEBIN D50 D40

The decimal floating-point number in the element D50 specified by source data is converted into
binary floating-point numbers, which are stored in D41 and D40.
Decimal floating-point number
Index Mantissa
D51 D50

Mantissa Index
D50×10D51
The value of Decimal floating-point number =[Mantissa D50] X10 [IndexD41]
Mantissa D50= (1,000~9,999) or 0
Index D51= -41 ~ +35

Binary floating-point number

D41 D40

The mantissa section is 23-bit, the index section is 23-bit and the symbol is 1-bit.

5
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F120 EADD Binary floating-point number addition computation

F Binary floating-point number
EADD S1· S2· D·
120 D P addition computation
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EADD S1· S2· D·

S1·: Summand
S2·: Addend

D·: Sum Log e

Number on the buffer specified by S1· plus number on the buffer specified by S2·, the sum is
stored in the buffer specified by D· and the addition computation is executed with binary
floating-point number.
If number specified by S1· or S2· is constant, the instruction will convert the constant into binary
floating-point number for addition computation.
S1· and S2· can specify the same buffer number, under general conditions, the pulse executing
instruction DEADD P is used.
Example:

X000
DEADD D50 D40 D10

(D51, D50)+ (D41, D40) → (D11, D10)

When X000 ON, the binary floating-point numbers (D51, D50) plus binary floating-point numbers
(D41, D40), the numbers are stored in (D11, D10).

6
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F121 ESUB Subtraction computation of binary floating-point numbers

F Subtraction computation of binary
ESUB S1· S2· D·
121 D P floating-point numbers
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

ESUB S1· S2· D·

S1·: Minuend
S2·: Subtrahend
D·: Difference
Number on the buffer specified by S1· minus number on the buffer specified by S2·, the difference
is stored in the buffer specified by D· and the subtraction computation is executed with binary
floating-point number.
If number specified by S1· or S2· is constant, the instruction will convert the constant into binary
floating-point number for subtraction computation.
S1· and S2· can specify the same buffer number, under general conditions, the pulse executing
instruction DESUB P is used.
Example:

X000
DESUB P D50 D40 D10

(D51, D50) — (D41, D40) → (D11, D10)

When X000 ON, the binary floating-point numbers (D51, D50) minus binary floating-point
numbers (D41, D40), the numbers are stored in (D11, D10).

7
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F122 EMUL Multiplication computation of binary floating-point numbers

F Multiplication computation of
EMUL S1· S2· D·
122 D P binary floating-point numbers
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EMUL S1· S2· D·

S1·: Multiplicand
S2·: Multiplier
D·: Product
Number on the buffer specified by S1· multiple number on the buffer specified by S2·, the product
is stored in the buffer specified by D· and the multiplication computation is executed with binary
floating-point number.
If number specified by S1· or S2· is constant, the instruction will convert the constant into binary
floating-point number for multiplication computation.
S1· and S2· can specify the same buffer number, under general conditions, the pulse executing
instruction DEMUL P is used.
Example:

X000
DEMUL P D50 D40 D10

(D51, D50) × (D41, D40) → (D11, D10)

When X000 ON, the binary floating-point numbers (D51, D50) multiple the binary floating-point
numbers (D41, D40), the product is stored in (D11, D10).

8
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F123 EDIV Division computation of binary floating-point number

F Division computation of binary
EDIV S1· S2· D·
123 D P floating-point number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S1· * * * * *
S2· * * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EDIV S1· S2· D·

S1·: Dividend
S2·: Divisor (the number can not be 0, otherwise, it may be regarded as error computation, the
instruction will not execute)
D·: Quotient
Number on the buffer specified by S1· divides by number on the buffer specified by S2·, the
quotient is stored in the buffer specified by D· and the quotient computation is executed with
binary floating-point number.
If number specified by S1· or S2·, the instruction can convert the constant into binary
floating-point number for division computation.
S1· and S2· can specify the same buffer number, under general conditions, the pulse executing
instruction DEDIV P is used.

Example:

X000
DEDIV P D50 D40 D10

(D51, D50) ÷ (D41, D40) → (D11, D10)

When X000 ON, the binary floating-point numbers (D51, D50) divide by the binary floating-point
numbers (D41, D40); the quotient is stored in (D11, D10).

9
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F124 EXP Exponent arithmetic computation

F
EXP Exponent arithmetic computation S· D·
124 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

EXP S· D·

S·: Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation.
D·: c
The exponent of (S·+1, S·) is calculated, and the operation result is stored to (D·+1, D·).
A real number can be directly specified as S·.
In the exponential operation, the base (e) is set to “2.71828”.

e ( S • +1, S ) → (D·+1, D·)

Error condition:
An operation error in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
When the operation result is outside the following range (error code:K6706)
2−126 ≤|Operation result|< 2128
Example:

X000
DEXP D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number exponent value

(D21, D20) Power value as binary floating-point number

Points:
1) The operation result becomes less than “ 2128 ” when the BCD value set in D10 is 88 or less
128
because of “Log e =88.7”. If a value “89” or more is set, an operation error occurs and this

operation will not be executed.

2) Conversion from natural logarithm into common logarithm
In the CPU, operations are executed in natural logarithm.
For obtaining a value in common logarithm, specify a common logarithm value divided by
“0.4342945” in (S·+1, S·).
x
10 x = e 0.4342945

10
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F125 LOGE Natural logarithm computation

F
LOGE Natural logarithm computation S· D·
125 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

LOGE S· D·

S·: Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the natural logarithm operation.
D·: Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation.

Natural logarithm [logarithm whose base is “e (2.71828)”] of (S·+1, S·) is calculated, and the
operation result is stored to (D·+1, D·). A real number can be directly specified as S·.

Log e ( S ⋅ +1, S ⋅) → (D·+1, D·)

Only a positive value can be set in (S·+1, S·). (The natural logarithm operation cannot be executed
for a negative value.)

Error condition:
An operation error in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
When a negative value or 0 is specified in S·. (Error code:K6706)

Example:

X000
DLOGE D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number Power value

(D21, D20) Exponent value as binary floating-point number

11
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F126 LOG10 Common logarithm computation

F
LOG10 Common logarithm computation S· D·
126 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

LOG10 S· D·

S·: Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the common logarithm
operation.
D·: Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation.

Natural logarithm [logarithm whose base is “10”] of (S·+1, S·) is calculated, and the operation
result is stored to (D·+1, D·). A real number can be directly specified as S·.

Log10 ( S ⋅ +1, S ⋅) → (D·+1, D·)

Only a positive value can be set in (S·+1, S·). (The common logarithm operation cannot be
executed for a negative value.)

Error condition:
An operation error in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
When a negative value or 0 is specified in S·. (Error code:K6706)

Example:

X000
DLOG10 D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number Power value

(D21, D20) Exponent value as binary floating-point number

12
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F127 ESQR Square root of binary floating-point number

F Square root of binary floating-point
ESQR S· D·
127 D P number
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

ESQR S· D·

S·: source element to be square root(Only valid for positive numbers, if it is negative numbers, it is
regarded as computation error, M8067 ON)
D·: square root
Square root is executed for numbers on the buffer specified by S·, the square root is stored in the
buffer specified by D· and the square root computation is executed with binary floating-point
numbers.
If number specified by S· is constant, the instruction will convert the constant into binary
floating-point number for square root computation.

Example:
X000
DESQR D50 D40

(D51, D50) → (D41, D40)

When X000=ON, the binary floating-point numbers (D51, D50)are square root, and the square
root is stored in (D41, D40).

13
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F128 ENEG Binary floating-point numbers NEG computation

F Binary floating-point numbers
ENEG D·
128 D P NEG computation
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
D· * *

Instruction format:

ENEG D·

D·: Head device number storing binary floating data whose sign is to be inverted.

The sign of binary floating point stored in (D·+1, D·) is inverted, and the negation result is stored
to (D·+1, D·).
Example:

M0
DENEGP D10

(D11, D10)→ (D11, D10)

1.2345 → -1.2345

14
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F129 INT Binary floating-point → BIN integral conversion

F Binary floating-point → BIN
INT S· D·
129 D P integral conversion
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

INT S· D·

S·: Source to be converted

D·: Conversion result
The buffer content specified by S· is converted into BIN integral with the form of binary
floating-point form and temporarily stored in the buffer by D·, and decimal of BIN integral is
ignored.
Action of the instruction is opposite with the instruction F49 FLT.
If the conversion result is 0, the zero symbol M8012=ON. If the decimal point is ignored in the
conversion result, the borrowing symbol M8021=ON.
If the conversion results exceed the following range, the carrying symbol M8022=ON.
16-bit instruction: -32,768~32,767
32-bit instruction: -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
Example:
X000
INT D0 D10
X001
DINT D20 D30

When X000=ON, the binary decimals(D1, D0)are converted into BIN integral, the result is stored
in D10, decimal of the BIN integral is ignored.
When X001=ON, the binary decimals (D21, D20) are converted into BIN integral and the result is
stored in (D31, D30), decimal of the BIN integral is ignored.

15
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F130 SIN Computation of floating-point SIN

F
SIN Computation of floating-point SIN S· D·
130 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction symbol:

SIN S· D·

S·: Specified RAD value

D·: Computation result of CSIN
RAD value specified by S· is equal to (angle×π/180), and SIN value is obtained and stored in
buffer specified by D·.
Example:

X000
DSIN D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) SIN value as binary floating-point number

16
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F131 COS Computation of floating-point COS

F
COS Computation of floating-point COS S· D·
131 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

COS S· D·

S·: Specified RAD value

D·: Computation result of COS
RAD value 0(angle×π/180) specified by S· is obtained and stored in buffer specified by D·.
Example:

X000
DCOS D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) COS value as binary floating-point number

17
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F132 TAN Computation of floating-point TAN

F
TAN Computation of floating-point TAN S· D·
132 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S· * * *
D· * *

Instruction format:

TAN S· D·

S·: Specified RAD value

D·: Computation result of TAN
RAD value (angle×π/180) specified by S· is obtained and stored in buffer specified by D·.
Example:

X000
DTAN D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) TAN value as binary floating-point number

18
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F133 ASIN Computation of floating-point ASIN

F ASIN Computation of
ASIN S· D·
133 D P floating-point ASIN
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S * * *
D * *

Instruction symbol:

ASIN S· D·

S: Specify data source of ASIN

D: Computation result of ASIN
Content ARC SIN (inverse function of SIN) is taken as binary floating-point number and stored in
D.
-1≤S<1
Example

X000
D ASIN D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) ASIN value as binary floating-point number

19
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F134 ACOS Computation of floating-point ACOS

F Computation of floating-point
ACOS S· D·
134 D P ACOS
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S * * *
D * *

Instruction symbol:

ACOS S· D·

S: Specified ACOS data source

D: ACOS computation results
Content ARC COS (inverse function of COS) specified by S is taken as binary floating-point
number and stored in D.
-1≤S<1
Example:

X000
D ACOS D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) ACOS value taken as binary floating-point number

20
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F135 ATAN Computation of floating-point ATAN

F Computation of floating-point
ATAN S· D·
135 D P ATAN
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S * * *
D * *

Instruction symbol:

ATAN S· D·

S: Specify ATAN data source

D: ATAN computation results
Content ARC TAN (inverse function of TAN)specified by S is taken as binary floating-point
number and stored in D.
-π/2~π/2
Example:

X000
D ATAN D10 D20

(D11, D10) Binary floating-point number RAD value

(D21, D20) ATAN value as binary floating-point number

21
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F136 RAD Angle converted into radian

F
RAD Angle converted into radian S· D·
136 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S * * *
D * *

Instruction symbol:

RAD S· D·

S and D are binary floating-point forms.

The instruction realizes conversion from angle unit into radian unit.
Example:

X000
DRAD D10 D20

22
 Floating-point
6 Applied instruction interpretation instruction

F137 DEG Radian converted into angle

F
DEG Radian converted into angle S· D·
137 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z E
S * * *
D * *

Instruction format:

DEG S· D·

S and D are binary floating-point forms.

The instruction realizes conversion from angle unit to radian unit.

X000
DDEG D10 D20

23
 F147 Conversion instruction for upper and lower characters

F147 Conversion instruction for upper and lower characters

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F147 SWAP Conversion of upper and lower characters 1

0
 F147 Conversion instruction for upper and lower characters

F147 SWAP Conversion of upper and lower characters

F Conversion of upper and lower
SWAP S·
147 D P characters
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

SWAP S·

S·: for executing exchange unit for the upper and lower 8-bit.

X000
SWAPP D10

For 16-bit instruction, exchange the low 8-bit and high 8-bit.

D10
High 8-bit Low 8-bit

X000
DSWAPP D10

For 32-bit instruction, exchange the low 8-bit and hig 8-bit.

D11 D10
High 8-bit Low 8-bit High 8-bit Low 8-bit

It is noted that when the instruction is used as continuous executing instruction, the computation
cycle needs conversing.
Function of the instruction is the same as extended function of F17 XCH.

1
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

F156~F159 Location instruction

F156~F159 Locating instruction

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F156 ZRN Origin return 1
F157 PLSV Variable speed pulse 3
F158 DRVI Relative location control 4
F159 DRVA Absolute location control 6

0
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

F156 ZRN Origin return

F
ZRN Origin return S1· S2· S3· D·
156 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S3· * * * *
D· *

Instruction format:

ZRN S1· S2· S3· D·

z When executing relative location control of F158 (DRVI) and absolute location control of
F159 (DRVA), PLC increases or decreases the current value with its self-generated
positive/negative pulse, which are stored in current value register (Y000: [D8141, D8140],
Y001: [D8143,D8142]). Therefore, the mechanical location always keeps, in case of power
failure of the PLC, the location will disappear. For power on and initial operation, origin
return must be executed and data of origin location of mechanical action shall be written in
advance.
S1·: Speed of origin return
Specify speed of origin return start.
[16-bit instruction]: 10~32,767 (Hz)
[32-bit instruction]: 10~100,000 (Hz)
S2·: Crawling speed
Speed of low speed after DOG signal is ON.
10~32,767(Hz)
S3·: DOG signal
Specify DOG signal input (a contact-point input)
When specifying element out of the input relay (X), affected by mathematical
performance cycle of the PLC, it may lead to greater deflection of the origin location.
D·: Object number of pulse output
Only Y000 or Y001 is specified. Output of the controller must be in the form of
transistor.
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Output function of reset signal
z When M8140 is ON and origin return finishes, it outputs reset signal to the servo motor.
z Output number of the reset signal is determined by pulse output numbers.
Pulse output[Y000]→Clear output[Y002]
Pulse output[Y001] →Clear output[Y003]

1
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

Initial position
Origin return speed S1·
Pulse output Interruption
processing Crawling speed S2·

DOG

Reset signal
Y002 or Y003 Reset signal
Abt 20ms+1 scan cycle
Within 1ms

M8029 ON

M8147 OFF

Action of origin return

z Origin return shall be executed according to the following sequence.
① After the drive instruction, it move at the speed of origin return speed S1·.
y During origin return, if the instruction drive contact-point is OFF, it will not decelerate
but stop.
y After the instruction drive contact-point is OFF, when pulse output monitors (Y000:
M8147, Y001: M8148) are on, it will not receive another drive of the instructions.
② When DOG signal becomes ON from OFF, it is decelerated to the crawling speed S2·.
③ When DOG signal becomes OFF from ON, and pulse output stops, it writes 0 into the
current value registers (Y000: [D8141, D8140], Y001: [D8143, D8142]). In addition, when
M8140 (output performance for resetting signal) is ON, reset signal is output simultaneously.
After that, when the finishing flag sign (M8029) acts, the pulse output monitors (Y000:
[M8147], Y001: [M8148]) become OFF.

Relevant element address numbers

[D8141 (upper location), D8140 (lower location)]: pulse number output to Y000. (32-bit used)
[D8143 (upper location), D8142 (lower location)]: pulse number output to Y001 (32-bit used)
[M8145]: Y000 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8146]: Y001 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8147]: Y000 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY)
[M8148]: Y001 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY)

Attentions
z For it does not have the function of DOG searching, the origin return action shall be stated
from front end of the DOG signal.
z In origin return, data of current value registers (Y000: [D8141, D8140], Y001: [D8143,
D8142]) will change towards decreasing.

2
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

F157 PLSV Variable speed pulse

F
PLSV Variable speed pulse S· D1· D2·
157 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D1· *
D2· * * *

Instruction format:

PLSV S· D1· D2·

z The instruction is the variable speed pulse output instruction with direction of rotation.
S·: output pulse frequency
[16-bit instruction]：1~32,767 (Hz), -1~-32,768 (Hz)
[32-bit instruction]：1~100,000 (Hz), -1~-100,000 (Hz)
D1·: Object number of pulse output
Only Y000 or Y001 is specified. Output of the controller must be in the form of transistor.
D2·: Output object number for rotating direction signal
Actions are available for corresponding S·: when S· is positive, it is ON; when S· is negative,
it is OFF.
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
z Even in pulse output, the output pulse frequency S· can be changed.
z For there is no acceleration or deceleration at start/stop, if buffering is required, instructions
F67 (RAMP)and etc. can be used to change value of the pulse frequency S·.
z During pulse output, when the instruction drive contact-joint is OFF, it will not decelerate
but stop.

Relevant element address number

[D8141 (upper location), D8140 (lower location)]: pulse number output to Y000. It will re reduced
for reverse operation/ (32-bit used).
[D8143 (upper location), D8142 (lower location)]: pulse number output to Y001. It will re reduced
for reverse operation/ (32-bit used).
[M8145]: Y000 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8146]: Y001 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8147]: Y000 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY)
[M8148]: Y001 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY)

Attentions
z Pay attention to driving time on instructions.

3
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

F158 DRVI Relative location control

F
DRVI Relative location control S1· S2· D1· D2·
158 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D1· *
D2· * * *

Instruction format:

DRVI S1· S2· D1· D2·

z The instruction is used for single-speed location control with relative drive mode.
S1·: Output pulse number (relative specifying)
[16-bit instruction]: -32,768~+32,767
[32-bit instruction]: -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
S2·: Output pulse frequency
[16-bit instruction]: 10~32,767 (Hz)
[32-bit instruction]: 10~100,000 (Hz)
It can not be less than the frequency in the formula in the next page.
D1·: Object number of the pulse output
Only Y000 or Y001 is specified. Output of the controller must be in the form of transistor.
D2·: Output object number for rotating direction signal
Actions are available for corresponding S·: when S· is positive, it is ON; when S· is negative, it is
OFF.
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
z Corresponding locations of output pulse number are described below:
Output to Y000: [D8141 (high location), D8140 (low location)] (32-bit used)
Output to Y001: [D8143 (high location), D8142 (low location)] (32-bit used)
When it rotates oppositely, content of current value register will be decreased.
z During the instruction executing, even content of the operand is changed, it can not be
reflected to current operation and it will take affect in the next instruction drive.
z During instruction executing, when the instruction drive contact-joint is OFF, it stops
deceleration. At this time, the finishing flag sign M8029 does not act.
z The so-called absolute control means taking the origin location as basic point, move with a
certain pulse number with rotating direction.
z Minimum frequency of actual output pulse frequency is determined by the following
formula.

4
6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

Minimum frequency of output pulse frequency =

Maximum speed[D8147, D8146]Hz ÷ (2 × (Time for acceleration and deceleration[D8148]ms ÷ 1000))

Relevant element interpretation

[D8145]: Basic speed for executing the instructions FNC158 (DRVI), FNC159(DRVA) and
etc.
When controlling the step motor, considering resonance zone and self-starting frequency of
the step motor for setting speed.
Range of setting: less than 1/10 of maximum speed (D8147, D8146).
When it exceeds the range, it is reduced to 1/10 of maximum speed automatically.
[D8147 (high location), D8146(low location)]:
Maximum speed for executing the instructions FNC158 (DRVI) and FNC159 (DRVA).
Output pulse frequency specified by S2· must be less than the maximum speed.
Range of setting: 10~100000(Hz)
[D8148]: Time of acceleration and deceleration for executing the instructions FNC158
(DRVI) and FNC159 (DRVA).
Time of acceleration and deceleration means the required time for reaching the maximum
speed (D8147, D8146).
Therefore, when the output pulse frequency S2· is lower than the maximum speed (D8147
D8146), the actual time of acceleration and deceleration will be shortened.
Range of setting: 50~5000(ms)
[M8145]: Y000 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8146]: Y001 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8147]: Y000 pulse output monitoring (BUSY/READY)
[M8148]: Y001 pulse output monitoring (BUSY/READY)

5
 6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

F159 DRVA Absolute location control

F
DRVA Absolute location control S1· S2· D1· D2·
159 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D1· *
D2· * * *

Instruction format:

DRVA S1· S2· D1· D2·

z The instruction is used for executing single-seed location control with absolute drive mode.
S1·: Destination location (absolute specifying)
[16-bit instruction]: -32,768~+32,767
[32-bit instruction]: -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
S2·: Output pulse frequency
[16-bit instruction]: 10~32,767 (Hz)
[32-bit instruction]: 10~100,000 (Hz)
D1·: Object number of the pulse output
Only Y000 or Y001 is specified. Output of the controller must be in the form of transistor.
D2·: Output object number for rotating direction signal
Actions are available for differences of corresponding S· and current locations: when the
difference is positive, it is ON; and is OFF for negative.
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
z Corresponding relative locations of output pulse quantity S1· are stated below:
Output to Y000: [D8141 (high location), D8140 (low location)] (32-bit used)
Output to Y001: [D8143 (high location), D8142 (low location)] (32-bit used)
When it rotates oppositely, content of current value register will be decreased.
z During the instruction executing, even content of the operand is changed, it can not be
reflected to current operation and it will take affect in the next instruction drive.
z During instruction executing, when the instruction drive contact-joint is OFF, it stops
deceleration. At this time, the finishing flag sign M8029 does not act.
z The so-called absolute control means taking the origin location as basic point, move with a
certain pulse number with rotating direction.
z Minimum frequency of actual output pulse frequency is determined by the following
formula.
Minimum frequency of output pulse frequency =

max speed [ D8147, D8146]Hz ÷ (2 × ( acc/dec time[D8148]ms ÷ 1000))

6
6 Applied instruction interpretation Location instruction

Relevant element interpretation

[D8145]: Basic speed for executing the instructions FNC158 (DRVI), FNC159(DRVA) and
etc.
When controlling the step motor, considering resonance zone and self-starting frequency of
the step motor for setting speed.
Range of setting: less than 1/10 of maximum speed (D8147, D8146).
When it exceeds the range, it is reduced to 1/10 of maximum speed automatically.
[D8147(high location), D8146(low location)]:
Maximum speed for executing the instructions FNC158 (DRVI) and FNC159 (DRVA).
Specified output pulse frequency of S2· must be less than the maximum speed.
Range of setting: 10~100000(Hz)
[D8148]: Time of acceleration and deceleration for executing the instructions FNC158
(DRVI) and FNC159(DRVA).
Time of acceleration and deceleration means the required time for reaching the maximum
speed (D8147, D8146).
Therefore, when the output pulse frequency S2· is lower than the maximum speed (D8147
D8146), the actual time of acceleration and deceleration will be shortened.
Range of setting: 50~5000(ms)
[M8145]: Y000 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8146]: Y001 pulse output stops (Stop immediately)
[M8147]: Y000 pulse output monitoring (BUSY/READY)
[M8148]: Y001 pulse output monitoring (BUSY/READY)

7
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F160~F167 Clock computation

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F160 TCMP Clock data comparison 1
F161 TZCP Clock zone comparison 2
F162 TADD Clock data plus computation 3
F163 TSUB Minus computation of clock 4
data
F166 TRD Clock data reading 5
F167 TWR Writing-in of clock data 6

0
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F160 TCMP Clock data comparison

F
TCMP Clock data comparison S1· S2· S3· S· D·
160 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S3· * * * * * * * * * * * *
S· * * * *
D· * * *

Instruction format:

TCMP S1· S2· S3· S· D·

S1·: Specify “H” of the comparison time, range of specifying (0~23)

S2·: Specify “M” of the comparison time, range of specifying (0~59)
S3·: Specify “S” of the comparison time, range of specifying (0~59)
S·: Specify “H” of the time data, range of specifying (0~23)
S·+1: Specify “M” of the time data, range of specifying (0~59)
S·+2: Specify “S” of the time data, range of specifying (0~59)
D·: Comparison results, occupying 3 continuous bit elements.
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:
X000
TCMP K10 K30 K50 D0 M0
10H30M 50S
M0 D0(H)
10H30M50S> D1(M) ON
D2(S)

M1 D0(H)
10H30M50S= D1(M) ON
D2(S)

M2 D0(H)
10H30M50S< D1(M) ON
D2(S)

Even X000 is used to stop executing the instruction TCMP, M0~M2 shall
keep the state of X000 not OFF.

z Compare time of source data (S1·, S2·, S3·)and 3-point time data started with S·, 3-point
ON/OFF state is output according to the comparison results.

1
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F161 TZCP Clock zone comparison

F
TZCP Clock zone comparison S1· S2· S· D·
161 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * *
S2· * * * *
S· * * * *
D· * * *
Instruction format:

TZCP S1· S2· S· D·

S1·: Specify lower limit value of the comparison time

S2·: Specify upper limit value of the comparison time
S·: Specify time data
D·: Comparison result, occupying 3 continuous bit elements
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction
Example
X000
TZCP D20 D30 D0 M3

M3 D20(H) D0(H)
D21(S) > D1(M) ON
D22(S) D2(S)

M4 D20(H) D0(H) D30(H)

D21(M) = D1(S) = D31(M) ON
D22(S) D2(S) D32(S)

M5 D0(H) D30(H)
D1(M) > D31(M) ON
D2(S) D32(S)

Even X000 is used to stop the instruction TZCP, M3~M5

shall keep the state of X000 not OFF.
z Compare 3-point time data started with S· and time zones specified by the upper and lower
points S1· and S2·. 3-point bit element ON/OFF state started with D· is output according to
the comparison results.
S1·, S1· +1, S1· +2: “H”, “M” and “S” of lower setting value of the comparison time.
S2·, S2· +1, S2· +2, “H”, “M” and “S” of upper setting value of the comparison time
S·, S ·+1, S ·+2: “H”, “M” and “S” of the specified time
The lower limit value S1·may not be more than the upper limit value S2·. When the lower
limit value S1·>the upper limit value S2·, the lower limit value S1· shall be taken as the upper and
lower limit values for comparison.

2
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F162 TADD Clock data plus computation

F
TADD Clock data plus computation S1· S2· D·
162 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * *
S2· * * * *
D· * * * *

Instruction format

TADD S1· S2· D·

S1·: Summand of time

S2·: Addend of time
D·: Sum of time
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction
Example:

X000
TADD D10 D20 D30

D10 10(H) D20 3(H) D30 13(H)

D11 30(M) + D21 10(M) D31 40(M)
D12 10(S) D22 5(S) D32 15(S)

10H30M10S 3H10M5S 13H40M15S

z H, M and S of calendar data specified by S1· plus H, M and S of calendar data specified by
S2·, and the results are stored in H, M and S of buffer specified by D·.
z If the result is over 24H, the carrying flag sign M8022=ON. The computation result minus
24H, and the final result is obtained and stored.
Example:

18(H) 10(H) 4(H)

10(M) + 20(M) 30(M)
30(S) 5(S) 35(S)

z If the computation result is 0 (0 H 0 M 0S), and the zero flag sign M1020=ON.

3
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F163 TSUB Minus computation of clock data

F
TSUB Minus computation of clock data S1· S2· D·
163 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * * * *
S2· * * * *
D· * * * *

Instruction format:

TSUB S1· S2· D·

S1·: Minuend of time

S2·: Subtrahend of time
D·: Difference of time
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:

X000
TSUB D10 D20 D30

D10 10(H) D20 3(H) D30 7(H)

D11 30(M) - D21 10(M) D31 20(M)
D12 10(S) D22 5(S) D32 5(S)

10H30M10S 3H10M5S 7H20M5S

z H, M and S of calendar data specified by S1· minus H, M and S of calendar data specified by
S2·, and the results are stored in H, M and S of buffer specified by D·.
z When the result is less than 0, the carrying flag sign M8022=ON. The computation result
plus 24H, and the final result is obtained and stored.
Example:
5(H) 18(H) 11(H)
20(M) - 10(M) 10(M)
40(S) 5(S) 35(S)

5H20M40S 18H10M5S 11H10M35S

z If the computation result is equal to 0 (0 H 0 M 0 S), the zero flag sign M1020=ON

4
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F166 TRD Clock data reading

F
TRD Clock data reading D·
166 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D· * * * *

Instruction format:

TRD D·

D·: start device after readout of current time of the calendar, occupying 7 points
※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:

X000
TRD D0

z Read real-time clock data of the controller according to the following format. The reading
source is the special data registers (D8013~D8019)for holding the clock data.
Element Item Clock data Element Item
Special D8018 Y (Solar → D0 Y (Solar
2000~2099
data calendar) calendar)
register D8017 M 1~12 → D1 M
for D8016 D 1~31 → D2 D
real-time D8015 H 0~23 → D3 H
clock D8014 M 0~59 → D4 M
D8013 S 0~59 → D5 S
D8019 Week 0(Sun)~6(Sat) → D6 Week

5
 F160~F167 Clock computation

F167 TWR Writing-in of clock data

F
TWR Writing-in of clock data S·
167 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * *

Instruction format:

TWR S·

S·: Store start device of new setting value of the calendar

※ 1: TP03SR machine type does not support the instruction.
Example:

X000
TWRP D10

z Write data for setting clock into the real-time clock of the controller. To write clock data,
7-point element started with element address numbers specified by S· must be specified.
Element Item Clock data Element Item
Data for D10 Y (Solar → D8018 Y (Solar Real-time
2000~2099
clock calendar) calendar) clock for
setting D11 M 1~12 → D8017 M special
D12 D 1~31 → D8016 D data
D13 H 0~23 → D8015 H register
D14 M 0~59 → D8014 M
D15 S 0~59 → D8013 S
D16 Week 0(Sun)~6(Sat) → D8019 Week

6
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F170~F172 Peripheral equipment

F170~F172 Pheripheral equipment

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F170 GRY Conversion of BIN—GRY codes 1
F171 GBIN Conversion of GRY—BIN codes 2

0
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F170 GRY Conversion of BIN—GRY codes

F
GRY Conversion of BIN—GRY codes S· D·
170 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

GRY S· D·

S·: Source device:

D·: Device for storing grey code

Example:
X000
GRY K1234 K3Y10

b15 b0
BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Y23 Y20 Y17 Y10

GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

z Convert BIN data to grey code and send data.

z 32-bit grey code conversion can be executed in maximum.
z As for values of S·, it is only valid in the following range.
16-bit computation: 0~32,767
32-bit computation: 0~2,147,483,647

1
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F171 GBIN Conversion of GRY—BIN codes

F
GBIN Conversion of GRY—BIN codes S· D·
171 D P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S· * * * * * * * * * * * *
D· * * * * * * * * *

Instruction format:

GBIN S· D·

S·: Source device

D·: Device for storing reversal conversion of grey code.
Reversal conversion is executed for specified device by S· to BIN value and store it in specified
device by D·.
Example:
X000
GBIN K3X0 D10

Y13 Y10 X7 X10

GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

b15 b0
BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

z Convert grey code into BIN data and send data.

z 32-bit grey code reversal conversion can be executed in maximum.
z As for values of S·, it is only valid in following range.
16-bit computation: 0~32,767
32-bit computation: 0~2,147,483,647

2
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F188~F192 Peripheral communication instruction

Peripheral communication instruction

Function No. Memory view Name Page
F188 CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking 1
F190 DTLK Data Link 3
F191 RMIO Remote IO 10
F192 TEXT OP07/08 TEXT 17
F193 DTLK2 Data Link 2 19

0
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F188 CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking

F
CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking S D n
188 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S * *
D * *
n * * * *

Instruction format:

CRC S D n
S·: Source device
D·: Device for storing CRC calculation value
n: Number of source device
It is the instruction for computing CRC code, in 8-bit and 16-bit conversion mode.
8-bit conversion mode when M8161 ON
16-bit conversion mode when M8161 OFF

Reference: the main CRC expressions:

name expression
CRC-12 X12+X11+X3+X2+X+1
CRC-16 X16+X15+X2+1
CRC-32 X32+X26+X3+X22+X16+X12+X11+X10 X8+X7+X5+X4X2+X+1
CRC-CCITT X16+X12+X5+1

For example:
8-bit conversion mode[M8161=ON]
In 8-bit mode, only low byte of the element source would be operated
The result will be kept in the element of D and D+1, the low byte kept in D and the high kept in
D+1

M8000
M8161 8-bit mode

X000
CRC S D n

1
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

When S=D100, D=D0, n=6

element value
Address of S Low byte D100 low byte 01H
source device S+1 Low byte D101 low byte 01H
S+2 Low byte D102 low byte 03H
S+3 Low byte D103 low byte CDH
S+4 Low byte D104 low byte 6BH
S+5 Low byte D105 low byte 05H
——

S+n-1 Low byte ——

Address of D Low byte D0 low byte 42H
preserve CRC D+1 Low byte D1 low byte 82H
value

16-bit conversion mode [M8161=OFF]

In 16-bit mode, the low byte and the high of element source would be operated
The result will be kept in the element of D

M8000
M8161 16-bit mode

X000
CRC S D n

When S=D100,D=D0,n=6
element value
8 bit 16 bit
Address of S Low byte D100 low byte 01H 0101H
source device High byte D100 high byte 01H
S+1 Low byte D101 low byte 03H CD03H
High byte D101 high byte CDH
S+2 Low byte D102 low byte 6BH 056BH
High byte D102 high byte 05H
——

S+n/2-1 Low byte ——

High byte
Address of D Low byte D0 low byte 42H 8242H
preserve CRC High byte D0 high byte 82H
value

2
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F190 DTLK Data Link

F
DTLK Data Link K
190
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
K 0,1 0,1

Instruction format:

DTLK K

K,H:0,1
0: for built in RS485 port
1: for RS485 or RS232 expansion card

Operation:
This instruction F190 DTLK used by PLC can setup a small network which enables PLC
controlling other 15 PLC.
While two communication ports are ready for DTLK, only one firstly enabled is available.
Communication frame and baud rate is set through D8120 or D8320, which is controlled by the
different port.
Both the port RS485/ RS232 expansion card (all type is available for expansion), RS485 port
(only built-in port in H type) are available for Data Link. However, both of them can not be
enabled simultaneously.

Item Specification
Communication standard EIA RS-485
Baud rate 9600bps~307200bps
Number of slaves Max 15 slaves
Related devices D0~D157, M2000~M3023
Data length for each slave Max 64 bits+8 word
Communication cable Insulated twisted cable, 2 lines type,
Total length: 500m (76800bit/s), 1km(38400bit/s)

3
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Wiring:

A B SG R A B SG A B SG R A B SG

● Note 1: SHL terminal should be 3 class ground or the production will be interrupted to error
operation because of noise.
● Note 2: Branch of communication cable should not exceed 3.
● Note 3: R represents terminal resistor (120Ω,1/4W).

○ ×

Connector
Cable nod

Related devices:
(1) Special relays
Special Feature Function Description Respond
relays from
M8400 Read-only Master error The relay will be on as master is error. L
M8401 Read-only Slave 1 error The relay will be on as slave 1 is error. M/L
M8402 Read-only Slave 2 error The relay will be on as slave 2 is error. M/L
… … … … ..
M8414 Read-only Slave 14 error The relay will be on as slave 14 is error. M/L
M8415 Read-only Slave 15 error The relay will be on as slave 15 is error. M/L
M8416 Read-only state The relay will be on as DTLK is enabled. M/L
M8417 Read-only Data Link mode The relay will be on as expansion card is M/L
in Data Link.
M8418 Read-only Data Link mode The relay will be on as RS485 port is in M/L
Data Link.

4
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

(2) Data register

Special relays Feature Function Description Respond
from
D8173 Read-only Address number Saving its own address number M/L
D8174 Read-only The number of slaves Saving the number of slaves M/L
D8175 Read-only Refreshing range Saving refreshing range (Data Link) M/L
D8176 Write Slave address setting Setting its own address number M/L
D8177 Write Slavers number setting Setting the number of slaves M
D8178 Write Data Link setting Setting refreshing range (Data Link) M
D8179 Read/ write Retry times Setting retry timess M
D8180 Read/ write Time-out setting Setting communication time-out M
(Time-Out)
D8401 Read-only Current communication Saving current communication scan time M/L
scan time
D8402 Read-only Max communication scan Saving Max communication scan time M/L
time
D8403 Read-only Error times for master Error times for master L
D8404 Read-only Error times for slave 1 Error times for slave 1 M/L
D8405 Read-only Error times for slave 2 Error times for slave 2 M/L
… … … … ..
D8411 Read-only Error times for slave 8 Error times for slave 8 M/L
… … … … ..
D8417 Read-only Error times for slave 14 Error times for slave 14 M/L
D8418 Read-only Error times for slave 15 Error times for slave 15 M/L
D8419 Read-only Error code for master Error code for master L
D8420 Read-only Error code for slave 1 Error code for slave 1 M/L
D8421 Read-only Error code for slave 2 Error code for slave 2 M/L
… … … … ..
D8427 Read-only Error code for slave 8 Error code for slave 8 M/L
… … … … ..
D8433 Read-only Error code for slave 14 Error code for slave 14 M/L
D8434 Read-only Error code for slave 15 Error code for slave 15 M/L
Setting:
When the program is in operation, or TP03 is power ON, all the setting for Data Link will take
effect.
(1) Setting the slaver address (D8176)
Set 0~15 to the special data register D8176, 0 is for master, and 1~15 is for slave.
(2) Setting the slavers number (D8177)
Set 1~15 to the special data register D8177(default: 7). It is unnecessary for slavers,The
slavers number should be set according to different condition in order to raise the refreshing
speed.
(3) Setting the refresh range (D8178)
Set 0~2 to special data register D8178 (default: 0). It is unnecessary for slaves.

5
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

D8178 0 1 2
Data Link mode Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2
Refreshing Bit device (M) 0 point 32 point 64 point
range Word device (D) 4 point 4 point 8 point
The devices to be refreshed under different mode:
Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2
Address
(M) (D) (M) (D) (M) (D)
No 0 — D0~D3 M2000~M2031 D0~D3 M2000~M2063 D0~D7
No 1 — D10~D13 M2064~M2095 D10~D13 M2064~M2127 D10~D17
No 2 — D20~D23 M2128~M2159 D20~D23 M2128~M2191 D20~D27
No 3 — D30~D33 M2192~M2223 D30~D33 M2192~M2255 D30~D37
No 4 — D40~D43 M2256~M2287 D40~D43 M2256~M2319 D40~D47
No 5 — D50~D53 M2320~M2351 D50~D53 M2320~M2383 D50~D57
No 6 — D60~D63 M2384~M2415 D60~D63 M2384~M2447 D60~D67
No 7 — D70~D73 M2448~M2479 D70~D73 M2448~M2511 D70~D77
No 8 — D80~D83 M2512~M2543 D80~D83 M2512~M2575 D80~D87
No 9 — D90~D93 M2576~M2607 D90~D93 M2576~M2639 D90~D97
No A — D100~D103 M2640~M2671 D100~D103 M2640~M2703 D100~D107
No B — D110~D113 M2704~M2735 D110~D113 M2704~M2767 D110~D117
No C — D120~D123 M2768~M2799 D120~D123 M2768~M2831 D120~D127
No D — D130~D133 M2832~M2863 D130~D133 M2832~M2895 D130~D137
No E — D140~D143 M2896~M2927 D140~D143 M2896~M2959 D140~D147
No F — D150~D153 M2960~M2991 D150~D153 M2960~M3023 D150~D157
(4) setting retry times (D8179)
Set 0~10 to special data register D8179 (default: 3). It is unnecessary for slaves. If the master
retry communication with the slave for more than the set times, the slave will be in
communication error.
(5) setting time out (D8180)
Set 5~255 to special data register D8180 (default: 5), the product of such value and 10 is the
waiting time for communication time out (ms).
(6) Current communication scan time (D8401)
The product of such value and 10 is the current communication scan time (ms).
(7) Max communication scan time (D8402)
The example program for setting the said devices:
X 000
MOV K0 D 8176 S lave address range :0~15
Slaver num ber： 2
MOV K2 D 8177 (range: 1~15）
MOV K1 D 8178 R efresh setting : 1, m ode 1
（ range: 0~2） U nnecessary
MOV K3 D 8179 for slaves
R etry tim es: 3(3 tim es)

MOV K6 D 8180 T im e out setting : 6 (60m s)

X 001

DTLK 0

6
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Error code:
When there is error, the special relays M8400~M8415 will indicates the error condition and the
error code will be stored in special data registers (D8419~D8434).

Error Error Check

Error Description Check point
code address address
01H Communication L M There is no responding as the Wiring, power supply
time out error master sends the request to slave and run/ stop state
and time out.
02H Communication L M Address is not set according to the Wiring
number error certain relations between master
and slave
03H Communication L M The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between
master and slave
04H Communication L M, L Communication frame of slave is Wiring and DTLK
frame error error setting
11H Communication M L After the slave responses to master, Wiring, power supply
over time error the master does not send another and run/ stop state
request to slavers.
14H Communication M L Communication frame of master is Wiring and DTLK
frame error error setting
21H Without slave L L *1 Address in the net is wrong Address setting
22H Address error L L *1 Slave address does not comply Wiring
with the certain relations between
master and slave
23H Communication L L *1 The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between
master and slave
31H Receiving L L *2 Master send request before the Wiring, power supply
communication slave accepts the set parameter. and run/ stop state
parameter error
32H Other error L L *1 Communication instruction error Net setting
M: master L: slave
*1: another slave 2*: Individual slave

7
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Communication Timing Sequence and the Time Required for Transmission

● The communication for master-station and slave-stations is not synchronous with the scanning
cycle of master-station.
● The master station will perform the linked data exchange and update the communication flag
at the scan cycle after the communication completed.
Communication timing sequence diagram and communication delay diagram.
In Data Link net, there will be delay for receiving data. Please refer to following figure for
communication timing sequence:
For example: the M2064 for slave 1 is controlled by X010. The state of M2064 will be sent to
other nod of the net as the instruction DTLK is enabled.

X010
Slave n X000
Slave 1 M2064
DTLK 0
X000
M2064
DTLK 0 Y0

A period T for DTLK exchange data

Master I I I I I I I I I I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ta Tc Tb T0 Tb T0 Tb T0 Tb T0 Ta
Input X10 ON
Slave 1 I I I I I I I I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Tt Tu Tv T1 Tc
Tw
Slave 2 I I I I I I I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

T2 Tc

I I I I I I I
Slave n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Tn Tc
Tx Ty Tz Output Y0: ON
Input and output delay

8
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

The time required to complete transmission

In data-link mode, the time T required for the master-station to complete communication with all
slave-station can be devised as follows (not spend the SCAN TIME of master-station):
T=Ta + Tc + [Tb + Tn + Tc + T0]*n1{+[Tb+Tn+D8180*10]*n2};
Ta : the transmission time for master sending instruction for net configuration to slave.
Tb : the transmission time for master sending instruction for data-exchange to slave.
Tc : the transmission time for the net exchanging data (differs from different DTLK mode).
T0 : the time for master detecting communication states (0~1 SCAN TIME)
Tn: the time for slave detecting communication states (0~1 SCAN TIME)
(n1+n2): the number of DTLK slave set in master (D8177=1~15), n1: actual slave number, n2: the
number of the slave which is not recognized by master (0~15).
D8180 is timeout value.

Delay time:
Tu: the time required for PLC to detect the input status (max. 1 SACN TIME)
Tv: the time between the PLC received input state and program started to be scanned.
Tw: the time for operation result send out (max net scan time T);
Tx: the time between the data received and data written to registers (max. 1 scan time);
Ty: the time between program operated to output (1scan time);
Tz: output port delay

The transmission time under different Baud rate:

Tc (ms)
Baud
Ta (ms) Tb (ms) DTLK mode DTLK mode DTLK mode
rate(bps)
0 1 2
9600 21.8 12.6 31.0 40.1 67.6
19200 10.9 6.3 15.5 20.1 33.8
38400 5.5 3.2 7.8 10.0 16.9
57600 3.7 2.1 5.2 6.7 11.3
76800 2.8 1.6 3.9 5.0 8.5
128000 1.7 1.0 2.4 3.0 5.1
153600 1.4 0.8 2.0 2.5 4.3
307200 0.7 0.4 1.0 1.3 2.2

9
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F191 RMIO Remote IO

F
RMIO Remote IO K
191
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
K 0,1 0,1

Instruction format:

RMIO K

K,H:0,1
0: for built in RS485 port
1: for RS485 or RS232 expansion card
Operation:
This instruction F191 RMIO used by PLC can setup a small network which enables PLC
controlling other 4 PLCs.
While two communication ports are ready for RMIO, only the one firstly enabled is available.
Communication frame and baud rate is set through D8120 or D8320, which is controlled by the
different port.
● Note 1: When a PLC is set as a slave in RMIO mode, it is used as a expansion I/O for master
and only RMIO instruction is available for operation.
● Note 2: As long as PLC as a slave in RMIO mode, only stop the operation of program can
switch the RMIO to other mode.
In Remote I/O mode, the master PLC can control other 4 PLCs.

A B SG R A B SG A B SG A B SG R A B SG

Item Description
standard EIA RS485
Baud rate 9600bps~307200bps
Number of slaves Max 4 slave
Related devices Slave 1 Input: 36 points (M4200~M4235); Output: 24point (M4600~M4623)
Slave 2 Input: 36 points (M4240~M4275); Output: 24point (M4624~M4647)
Slave 3 Input: 36 points (M4280~M4315); Output: 24point (M4648~M4671)
Slave 4 Input: 36 points (M4320~M4355); Output: 24point (M4672~M4695)
Cable Insulated twisted cable, 2 lines type,
Total length: 500m (76800bit/s), 1km(38400bit/s)
Both the port RS485/ RS232 expansion card (all type is available for expansion), RS485 port
(only built-in port in H type) are available for Data Link. However, both of them can not be
enabled simultaneously.

10
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Note: Only basic unit can be set as a slave in RMIO mode.

Related devices:
(1) Special relays
Special relays Feature Function Description Respond
from
Communication state ON as RMIO communication is M/L
M8335 Read only
enabled
M8336 Read only Master error ON as master error L
M8337 Read only Slave 1 error On as slave 1 error M/L
M8338 Read only Slave 2 error On as slave 2 error M/L
M8339 Read only Slave 3 error On as slave 3 error M/L
M8340 Read only Slave 4 error On as slave 4 error M/L
M8341 Read only RMIO mode Expansion card is in RMIO mode M/L
M8342 Read only RMIO mode RS485 port is in RMIO mode M/L

(2) Data register D

Special Feature Function Description Respond
relays from
D8373 Read only Address number Saving its own address number M/L
D8374 Read only The number of slaves Saving the number of slaves M/L
D8376 Write Address number setting Setting its own address number M/L
D8377 Write Setting the number of slaves setting the number of slaves M
D8379 Read/write Retry times Setting retry times M
Setting communication time-out
D8380 Read/write Time-out setting M/L
(Time-Out)
Current communication Saving current communication scan
D8331 Read only M
scan time time
Max communication scan
D8332 Read only Saving Max communication scan time M
time
D8333 Read only Master error times Master error times L
D8334 Read only Slave 1 error times Slave 1 error times M/L
D8335 Read only Slave 2 error times Slave 2 error times M/L
D8336 Read only Slave 3 error times Slave 3 error times M/L
D8337 Read only Slave 4 error times Slave 4 error times M/L
D8338 Read only Master error code Master error code L
D8339 Read only Slave 1 error code Slave 1 error code M/L
D8340 Read only Slave 2 error code Slave 2 error code M/L
D8341 Read only Slave 3 error code Slave 3 error code M/L
D8342 Read only Slave 4 error code Slave 4 error code M/L

11
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Setting:
When the program is in operation, or PLC is power ON, all the setting for Remote I/O will take
effect.
(1) Setting the slaver address (D8376)
Set 0~4 to the special data register D8376, 0 is for master, and 1~4 is for slave.
(2) Setting the slavers number (D8377)
Set 1~4 to the special data register D8377(default: 4). It is unnecessary for slavers
The slavers number should be set according to different condition in order to raise the
refreshing speed.

The related devices for Remote I/O:

In Remote I/O mode, the related devices for master:
Master Slave 1
Slave Input M4200~M4235 X000~X043
1 Output M4600~M4623 Y000~Y027 Slave 2
Slave Input M4240~M4275 X000~X043
2 Output M4624~M4647 Y000~Y027 Slave 3
Slave Input M4280~M4315 X000~X043
3 Output M4648~M4671 Y000~Y027 Slave 4
Slave Input M4320~M4355 X000~X043
4 Output M4672~M4695 Y000~Y027
Wiring:

R S485— R S232 converter

R R
A B SG A B SG A B SG A B SG

● Note 1: SHL terminal should be 3 class ground or the production will be interrupted to error
operation because of noise.
● Note 2: Branch of communication cable should not exceed 3.
● Note 3: R represents terminal resistor (120Ω,1/4W).
Communication sequence and the time required for transmission

12
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

The Time Required for Transmission

The communication of master-station to slave-station, the data exchange of remote I/O and the
update of communication flag are synchronous with the scan cycle of master station.
The process (1 communication period) will increase the SCAN TIME of master-station
When there is error in communication between master and slave, Remote I/O communication and
PLC operation will stop and enter abnormal condition.

When an error occurs on the communication between the master station and slave-station, the
remote I/O communication and PLC operation will be stopped and enter error mode. Besides, all
communication flag of master-station and slave-station are set to OFF.
Possible cause of error is as follows:
c CRC error
d Slave in STOP mode or ERROR mode
e Slave not connected or connection wire broken
When the master-station is in STOP mode or ERROR mode, it will not communicate with any
slave-station. The settings for communication format between master and slave are not same.

Communication sequence for slave

The communication of slave to master is asynchronous with the scan time of slave.
After communication between master and slave is finished, the Remote I/O data and
communication flag will be refreshed, which will last about 0.2ms.

The time required for transmission

In remote I/O mode, the time T (the communication period, this period will be included in the

13
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

master station SCAN TIME) required for master-station to complete the communication with all
slave-stations is as follows :
Baud Rate Communication Time out, t Communication Normal
(bps) time for each (ms) time for master, communication
slave, Tn (ms) T(ms) time for master
and 4 slaves (ms)
9600 42 D8380*10 Tn*n1＋t*n2 168
19200 21 (n1: normal slave 84
38400 11 number; n2: slave 44
57600 7 number for time 28
76800 6 out) 24
128000 4 16
153600 3 12
307200 2 8

If there is communication error in slave, the communication time will be increased repeatedly (Tn
will be added to the time for each error)

14
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Delay time:
When the remote I/O is receiving data, there will be some delay as in the following figure.

X010
M4600

X000
RMIO 0

Program operation and RMIO data exchanging

One scam time for master

I/O I/O I/O

Input terminal

Input logical side

Data memory X010

Data memory M4600

T1 T2 T3

Slave scan I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

Output logical side

Output terminal
（output Y0 on slave 1）
T4 T5

T1: delay for input (response time for OFF to ON)

T2: time for master writing data to coil register (max 1 scan time)
T3: program operation and output time
T4: time between the slave received data to output terminal
T5: delay for output (response time for ON to OFF)

15
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Error code:
When there is error, the special relays M8400~M8415 will indicates the error condition and the
error code will be stored in special data registers (D8419~D8434).
Error Error Check
Error Description Check point
code address address
01H Communication L M There is no responding as the master Wiring, power
time out error sends the request to slave and time supply and run/
out. stop state
02H Communication L M Address is not set according to the Wiring
number error certain relations between master and
slave
03H Communication L M The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between master
and slave
04H Communication L M, L Communication frame of slave is Wiring and RMIO
frame error error setting
11H Communication M L After the slave responses to master, Wiring, power
over time error the master does not send another supply and run/
request to slavers. stop state
14H Communication M L Communication frame of master is Wiring and RMIO
frame error error setting
21H Without slave L L *1 Address in the net is wrong Address setting
22H Address error L L *1 Slave address does not comply with Wiring
the certain relations between master
and slave
23H Communication L L *1 The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between master
and slave
24H Communication L L *1 Communication frame of slave is Wiring and RMIO
frame error error setting

M: master L: slave
*1: another slave

16
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F192 TEXT OP07/08 TEXT

F
TEXT OP07/08 TEXT D S n
192 P
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
D * * * *
S * *
n 1,2 1,2

Instruction format:

TEXTP D S n

D: number of character for display

S: number of data register for display
n: display line of OP07/08

Operation:
This instruction should be used with OP07/08. After F192 is enabled, the value 13 will be written
to data register D8284, after OP07/08 saving the ‘13’ in D8284, the value 13 also will be written
to D8285 by OP07/08 itself.
As F192 is enabled, the certain text file will be saved to D8280 and D8281 (D8280 is for the file
to be displayed in the first line of OP07/08, D8281 is for the second one) and the value to be
displayed will be saved toD8295 and D8296.
The value in D8295 will be displayed in the ‘#’position of the first line, while the value in D8296
of the second line.
When there is ‘?’ on LCD, you can input data, the input data for first line will be saved in the D
register (Number =value in D8295 + 1). As for the second line, the input data in position ‘?’ will
be saved in D register (Number =value in D8296 + 1).
‘#’ and ‘?’ can be placed anywhere in the text file. However, only the former 5 ones can be set as
inputs or outputs.
Example:
LCD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
position
Text file 1:
D register 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
Content L e n g t h : # # . # # # c m
Text file 2:
D register 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Content W e i g t h : # # . # # # k g
Text file 3:
D register 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029
Content U n i t p r i c e : $ ? ? ? ? ?

17
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

X000
MOV K2 D200
Information on OP07/08 LCD
MOV K12345 D300
Weight : 12.345 kg
M100
TEXT D200 D300 K1

Description:
1, X000 ON, 2 will be moved to D200 while 12345 will be moved toD300;
2, when M100 is ON, TEXT instruction is enabled. D8284 defaults 13, D200 will be written to
D8280; D300 to [Link] OP07/08 will enter F192 mode.
3, F192 will operate for the first time. As D8280= D200= 2, OP07/08 will display the file 2 on the
first line of LCD. Because there is a ‘#’ in the file 2, 12345 in D300 will be displayed in the
place of ‘#’.

X000
MOV K2 D200
Information on OP07/08 LCD
MOV K12345 D300
Weight : 12.345 kg
Unit price : $?????
M100
TEXT D200 D300 K2

Description:
1, X000 ON, 2 will be moved to D200 while 12345 will be moved to D300;
2, When M100 is ON, TEXT instruction is enabled. D8284 defaults 13, D200 will be written to
D8280; sum of data in D200 and 1 will be written to D8281, D300 to D8285, [Link]
OP07/08 will enter F192 mode.
3, F192 will operate for the first time. As D8280= D200= 2, D8281=3, OP07/08 will display the
file 2 on the first line of LCD and file 3 on the second line. Moreover, 12345 in D300 will be
displayed in the place of ‘#’ and the input data by the keys will be stored in D301.

18
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

F193 DTLK2 Data Link 2

F
DTLK2 Data Link 2 S1· S2· K
193
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1· * *
S2· * * * *
K 0,1 0,1

Instruction format:

DTLK2 S1· S2· K

S1: start address of data source (D0~D7999)

S2: Length of data source (1~40)
K,H:0,1
0: for built in RS485 port
1: for RS485 or RS232 expansion card

Operation:
This instruction F193 DTLK2 used by PLC can setup a small network which enables PLC
controlling other 15 PLC.
While two communication ports are ready for DTLK2, only one firstly enabled is available.
Communication frame and baud rate is set through D8120 or D8320, which is controlled by the
different port.
Both the port RS485/ RS232 expansion card (all type is available for expansion), RS485 port
(only built-in port in H type) are available for Data Link. However, both of them can not be
enabled simultaneously.

Item Specification
Communication standard EIA RS-485
Baud rate 9600bps~307200bps
Number of slaves Max 15 slaves
Related devices D0~D7999,first address is decided by DTLK2
Data length for each slave Max 40word, length is decided by DTLK2
Communication cable Insulated twisted cable, 2 lines type,
Total length: 500m (76800bit/s), 1km(38400bit/s)

19
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Wiring:

A B SG R A B SG A B SG R A B SG

● Note 1: SHL terminal should be 3 class ground or the production will be interrupted to error
operation because of noise.
● Note 2: Branch of communication cable should not exceed 3.
● Note 3: R represents terminal resistor (120Ω,1/4W).

○ ×

Connector
Cable nod

Related devices:
(1) Special relays
Special Feature Function Description Respond
relays from
M8400 Read-only Master error The relay will be on as master is error. L
M8401 Read-only Slave 1 error The relay will be on as slave 1 is error. M/L
M8402 Read-only Slave 2 error The relay will be on as slave 2 is error. M/L
… … … … ..
M8414 Read-only Slave 14 error The relay will be on as slave 14 is error. M/L
M8415 Read-only Slave 15 error The relay will be on as slave 15 is error. M/L
M8416 Read-only state The relay will be on as DTLK2 is enabled. M/L
M8417 Read-only Data Link2 The relay will be on as expansion card is M/L
mode in Data Link2.
M8418 Read-only Data Link2 The relay will be on as RS485 port is in M/L
mode Data Link2.

20
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

(2) Data register

Special relays Feature Function Description Respond
from
D8173 Read-only Address number Saving its own address number M/L
D8174 Read-only The number of slaves Saving the number of slaves M/L
D8175 Preserve
D8176 Write Slave address setting Setting its own address number M/L
D8177 Write Slavers number setting Setting the number of slaves M
D8178 Preserve
D8179 Read/ write Retry times Setting retry timess M
D8180 Read/ write Time-out setting Setting communication time-out M
(Time-Out)
D8401 Read-only Current communication Saving current communication scan time M/L
scan time
D8402 Read-only Max communication scan Saving Max communication scan time M/L
time
D8403 Read-only Error times for master Error times for master L
D8404 Read-only Error times for slave 1 Error times for slave 1 M/L
D8405 Read-only Error times for slave 2 Error times for slave 2 M/L
… … … … ..
D8411 Read-only Error times for slave 8 Error times for slave 8 M/L
… … … … ..
D8417 Read-only Error times for slave 14 Error times for slave 14 M/L
D8418 Read-only Error times for slave 15 Error times for slave 15 M/L
D8419 Read-only Error code for master Error code for master L
D8420 Read-only Error code for slave 1 Error code for slave 1 M/L
D8421 Read-only Error code for slave 2 Error code for slave 2 M/L
… … … … ..
D8427 Read-only Error code for slave 8 Error code for slave 8 M/L
… … … … ..
D8433 Read-only Error code for slave 14 Error code for slave 14 M/L
D8434 Read-only Error code for slave 15 Error code for slave 15 M/L

21
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Setting:
When the program is in operation, or TP03 is power ON, all the setting for Data Link2 will take
effect.
(1) Setting the slaver address (D8176)
Set 0~15 to the special data register D8176, 0 is for master, and 1~15 is for slave.
(2) Setting the slavers number (D8177)
Set 1~15 to the special data register D8177(default: 7). It is unnecessary for slavers,The
slavers number should be set according to different condition in order to raise the refreshing
speed.
(3) setting retry times (D8179)
Set 0~10 to special data register D8179 (default: 3). It is unnecessary for slaves. If the master
retry communication with the slave for more than the set times, the slave will be in
communication error.
(4) setting time out (D8180)
Set 5~255 to special data register D8180 (default: 5), the product of such value and 10 is the
waiting time for communication time out (ms).
(5) Current communication scan time (D8401)
The product of such value and 10 is the current communication scan time (ms).
(6) Max communication scan time (D8402)

The example program for setting the said devices:

X000
MOV K0 D8176 Slave address range:0~15
Slaver number:2
MOV K2 D8177 (range:1~15)
Unnecessary
MOV K3 D8179 Retry times:3(3 times) for slaves

MOV K6 D8180 Time out setting:6(60ms)

X001
DTLK2 D0 K5 K0

22
 Peripheral
6 Applied instruction interpretation equipment

Error code:
When there is error, the special relays M8400~M8415 will indicates the error condition and the
error code will be stored in special data registers (D8419~D8434).

Error Error Check

Error Description Check point
code address address
01H Communication L M There is no responding as the Wiring, power supply
time out error master sends the request to slave and run/ stop state
and time out.
02H Communication L M Address is not set according to the Wiring
number error certain relations between master
and slave
03H Communication L M The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between
master and slave
04H Communication L M, L Communication frame of slave is Wiring and DTLK2
frame error error setting
11H Communication M L After the slave responses to master, Wiring, power supply
over time error the master does not send another and run/ stop state
request to slavers.
14H Communication M L Communication frame of master is Wiring and DTLK2
frame error error setting
21H Without slave L L *1 Address in the net is wrong Address setting
22H Address error L L *1 Slave address does not comply Wiring
with the certain relations between
master and slave
23H Communication L L *1 The data in communication counter Wiring
counting error does not conform to according to
the certain relations between
master and slave
31H Receiving L L *2 Master send request before the Wiring, power supply
communication slave accepts the set parameter. and run/ stop state
parameter error
32H Other error L L *1 Communication instruction error Net setting
M: master L: slave
*1: another slave 2*: Individual slave

23
 Contact comparison
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

F224~246 Contact comparison instruction

F224~F246 Contact comparison instructions

Function No. Memory view Name Page
224 LD (S1)=(S2) 1
225 LD (S1)>(S2) 1
226 LD (S1)<(S2) 1
228 LD (S1)≠(S2) 1
229 LD (S1)≦(S2) 1
230 LD (S1)≧(S2) 1
232 AND (S1)=(S2) 2
233 AND (S1)>(S2) 2
234 AND (S1)<(S2) 2
236 AND (S1)≠(S2) 2
237 AND (S1)≦(S2) 2
238 AND (S1)≧(S2) 2
240 OR (S1)=(S2) 3
241 OR (S1)>(S2) 3
242 OR (S1)<(S2) 3
244 OR (S1)≠(S2) 3
245 OR (S1)≦(S2) 3
246 OR (S1)≧(S2) 3

0
 Contact comparison
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

F224~230 Contact-joint state comparison LD

F
LD Contact-joint state comparison LD S1 S2
224~230 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * * *

S1: Comparison value 1

S2: Comparison value 2
The instruction for comparing contents of S1 and S2, when the comparison results are equal, the
instruction is active; when they are not equal, the instruction is not active.
The instruction LD can be used with bus wire.
F No 16-bit 32-bit Active Inactive
element element conditions conditions
instruction instruction
224 LD= D LD= S1=S2 S1≠S2
225 LD> D LD> S1>S2 S1≤S2
226 LD< D LD< S1<S2 S1≥S2
228 LD<> D LD<> S1≠S2 S1=S2
229 LD≤ D LD≤ S1≤S2 S1>S2
230 LD≥ D LD≥ S1≥S2 S1<S2
When leftmost of S1 and S2 (16-bit instruction: b15, 32-bit instruction: b31) is 1, the comparison
value is regarded as negative value.
When 32-bit length counter (C200~) is used in the instruction for comparison, 32-bit instruction
must be used (DLD※); if 16-bit instruction (LD※, CPU judges “program error”, red indicator
light on the host panel is twinkling and CPU can not run.
Program case
When C10 is equal to K200, Y10= On
When D200 is more than -30 and X0= On, Y11= On and hold.
When C200 is less than 6,784 or M3= On, M50= On

LD= K200 C10 Y10

X000
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y011

DLD> K6784 C200 M50

M3

1
 Contact comparison
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

F232~238 Contact-joint state comparison AND

F Contact-joint state comparison
AND S1 S2
232~238 D AND
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * * *

S1: Comparison value 1

S2: Comparison value 2
The instruction for comparing contents of S1 and S2, when the comparison results are equal, the
instruction is active; when they are not equal, the instruction is not active. The instruction LD is
the comparison instruction for series connection to the contact-joint.
F No 16-bit 32-bit Active Inactive
element element conditions conditions
instruction instruction
224 AND= D AND= S1=S2 S1≠S2
225 AND> D AND> S1>S2 S1≤S2
226 AND< D AND< S1<S2 S1≥S2
228 AND<> D AND<> S1≠S2 S1=S2
229 AND≤ D AND≤ S1≤S2 S1>S2
230 AND≥ D AND≥ S1≥S2 S1<S2
When leftmost of S1 and S2 (16-bit instruction: b15, 32-bit instruction: b31) is 1, the comparison
value is regarded as negative value.
When 32-bit length counter (C200~) is used in the instruction for comparison, 32-bit instruction
must be used (DLD※); if 16-bit instruction (LD※), CPU judges “program error”, red indicator
light on the host panel is twinkling and CPU can not run.
Program case
When X0= on, current value of C10 is K200, Y10= on.
When X1=on and buffer D200 is more then -30, Y11= On and hold.
When X2= on and current value of C200 is less than 6,784,or M3=on, M50=on.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10

X1
AND> D200 K-30 SET Y011

X2
DAND> K6784 C200 M50

M3

2
 Contact comparison
6 Applied Instruction Interpretation instruction

F240~246 Contact-point state comparison OR

F
OR Contact-point state comparison OR S1 S2
240~246 D
Bit element Word element
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D W V Z
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * * *

S1: Comparison value 1

S2: Comparison value 2
The instruction for comparing contents of S1 and S2, when the comparison results are equal, the
instruction is active; when they are not equal, the instruction is not active. The instruction is the
comparison instruction for parallel connection to the contact-joint.
F No 16 –bit 32-bit Active Inactive
element element conditions conditions
instruction instruction
224 OR= D OR= S1=S2 S1≠S2
225 OR> D OR> S1>S2 S1≤S2
226 OR< D OR< S1<S2 S1≥S2
228 OR<> D OR<> S1≠S2 S1=S2
229 OR≤ D OR≤ S1≤S2 S1>S2
230 OR≥ D OR≥ S1≥S2 S1<S2
When leftmost of S1 and S2 (16-bit instruction: b15, 32-bit instruction: b31) is 1, the comparison
value is regarded as negative value.
When 32-bit length counter (C200~) is used in the instruction for comparison, 32-bit instruction
must be used (DLD※); if 16-bit instruction (LD※), CPU judges “program error”, red indicator
light on the host panel is twinkling and CPU can not run..
Program case
When X1=on, or current value of C10 is equal to K200, Y10= On.
When X2 and M30 are equal to On or 32-bit buffer D101 and D100 is larger than or equal to
K1,000, M50=On.

X1
Y10

OR= K200 C10

X2 M30
M50

DOR≥ D100 K1000

3
 7Additional interpretation of basic functions Special device

Chapter VII Additional Interpretation of

Basic Functions
1 Additional interpretation for special devices

Operation symbol of PLC

RUN of operation state of PLC is used to M8000 and M8001, which are taken as drive conditions
for the instruction and display in normal operation.

M8000
“Normal operation”
Y000
RUN monitoring a
contact-joint Frequent output drive expected
During RUN, the constant
is ON

When M8001 is RUN, the constant is OFF.

After the initial pulse M8002 starts operation in PLC, only one computation is ON and it keeps
OFF in the left time.
The pulse is taken as initial setting signal for program initialization, writing specified values and
etc.
Data registers for
M8002
F40 holding
D200 D299
ZRST Clearing of
Initial pulse (a
D200~D299
contact-point)

M8003 is OFF for one computation cycle after RUN, and it keeps ON in other left time.

Time sequence of mark action

RUN input In RUN In STOP In RUN

M8000
RUN monitoring (contact A) ON ON

M8001 ON
RUN monitoring (contact B)

M8002
Initial pulse (contact A) ON ON

M8003 ON ON
Initial pulse (contact B)
 7Additional interpretation of basic functions Special device

Testing of super-low voltage of battery

Super-low battery voltage testing and external output
The device is used to test super-low battery voltage of backup lithium battery of the storage device.
When the PLC tests the battery voltage is super low, BATT error indication light is ON. The
sequential control program is used to report to the outside.

M8006
Y001 low voltage of battery
low voltage of
battery
M8007 used for state locking for low voltage of battery

Computation time (monitoring of scan time)

Computation time of PLC is stored in D8010~D8012.

D8010 Current value

Minimum
D8011 value
Number of peripheral equipment to monitor the values

Maximum
D8012 value

The numerical values include the waiting time of constant scan time stated in the following.
The machine offers the following four internal clocks. When the PLC is powered on, the four
types of time will keep oscillating.

10ms
M8011
(10ms)
100ms
M8012
(100ms)
1s
M8013
(1s)
1min
M8014
(1min)

Note: even the PLC is STOP, the clock still keeps operating. Therefore, falling edge and starting
time of clock monitored by RUN (M8000) are not synchronous.
 7Additional interpretation of basic functions Special device

Real-time clock

Clock setting of PLC

D8019

Y: M: D: WK:
D8018 D8017 D8016
D8015 D8014 D8013
H: M: S:

M8015 Start changed Time setting M8015

Setting Resetting

Details of using programming equipment

Forced setting
Current value of the data register is used to change the function. The clock data expected to be
calibrated is input to the data register. When reaching the setting time, it sets forcibly.

Common program executing

X000
M8015

PLF M0

F12 K30 M8013

MOV
F12 K20 M8014
MOV
F12 K10 M8014
MOV
F12 K25 M8016
MOV
F12 K4 M8017
MOV
F12 K0 M8018
MOV
F12 K2 M8019
MOV
X001
M8017

Attentions for clock calibration

When M8015 is OFF, no change can be done to the time register.
When M8015 is ON, a new time is input.
When the setting time is input, the time several minutes earlier than current time shall be set.
When it reaches the setting time, M8015 is changed from ON——OFF, the state changes and the
new time takes effect.
When the input time does not exist, the time can not be changed and the correct time data shall be
input a second time.
Values 2000~2099 of D8018 represent the years 2000~2099.
 7Additional interpretation of basic functions Special device

Holding stop of the storage device

Output holding in STOP
The special auxiliary relay M8033 is driven in advance, even after the PLC from RUN——STOP,
it still keeps the output state in operation.
For instance, if drive heating of the PLC is required, stop the PLC for the drive heater and other
equipment. After the executing program is changed, it can be performed a second time.

Instruction for all outputs prohibited

The output lock storage device is cleared by driving M8034, and all the output relays become OFF
and the PLC still operates on the image storage device.

All outputs prohibited

M8034
（Image RUN）

Constant scan mode

Fixing of computation processing time
The auxiliary relay M8039 is driven, and the destination scan time is written into the data register
M8039 with 1ms as unit in advance, and computation cycle of the PLC will not be less than the
value.
Even the computation ends earlier, it will wait in the left time, and return to the step 0.
M8000
M8039 Constant scan mode

F12
K20 D8039 Set constant scan time at 20ms
MOVP

When the scan synchronous instructions like FNC67 (RAMP), FNC71 (HKY), FNC74 (SEGL),
FNC75 (ARWS), FNC77 (PR) and etc. are executed, constant scan mode or timing interrupted by
the timer are used to drive.
Especially the instruction FNC71 (HKY) is used, filtration wave for button input will lead to delay
response, and the scan time must be set above 20ms.
Note: in the scan time of D8010~8012, it includes the specified time of constant scan mode.

Transfer prohibited during states

After driving M8040, even all the transfer conditions are provided, state transfer can not be
performed and output in the stop state will continue acting. Please refer to the step instruction
interpretation on output reset.
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions Program flow

2 Relation of control instructions of program flow

Relation of the instruction MC-MCR and the instruction CJ has been described in the instruction
F00CJ. See the following on relations of other instructions.
In the following figure, represents the relation of inclusion and represents repeating of
the front and back inter-zones.
Upper instruction Upper instruction

Left Left
instruction instruction

MC—CJ—P—MCR MC—CJ—P—MCR

MC-MCR CJ-P EI-DI FOR-NEXT STL-RET

MC-MCR
example 1
×(6607) ×(6605)
example 2
CJ-P

EI-DI

FOR-NEXT ×(6607) 16 ×(6607)

layers
×(6607) *2 ×(6607)
STL-RET ×(6605) In 1 STL

×(6605) ×(6607)
P-SRET ×(6606) ×(6606)
×(6608) ×(6607) ×(6605)
I-IRET ×(6606) ×(6606)
×(6606) ×(6607) ×(6606)
FEND-END
×(6608) ×(6701) ×(6607) ×(6605)
O-FEND
×(6608) ×(6607) ×(6605)
O-END
(No FEND) ×(6608) ×(6701) ×(6607) ×(6605)
○: It can be used without problem.
×: Combined use prohibited, number ()is error code.
△ : Although it is not strictly prohibited, it may lead to complication of actions, which shall be
avoided as much as possible.
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions Program flow

P-SRET I-IRET FEND-END Remark

×(6608) ×(6608) ×(6608) 1 No abnormality display, and DI state
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6608) forgotten.
△ △ △ 2 R FOR NEXT NEXT, such as real
△ △ △ line action.
○ ○ ○ 3 Only valid for FEND and END, not
○ ○ ○ all the programs to be written or
×(6607) ×(6607) ×(6607) executed. No abnormality display.
×(6701) ×(6607) ×(6607)
×(6605) ×(6605) ×(6605) Besides some instructions, the
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6605) instructions of inclusion relation can be
used in combined form and the
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6709)
following exceptions must be paid
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6709)
attention to.
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6606)
×(6606) ×(6606) ×(6606)
[Link]-MCR can not be used in
○ ○
FOR~NEXT, STL-RET, P-SRET,
×(6709) ×(6709)
I-IRET and other instructions.
×(6606) ×(6606)
[Link]-RETcan not be used in
×(6709) ×(6606)
FOR~NEXT, P-SRET, I-IRET and
×(6606) ×(6606)
other instructions.
×(6709) ×(6706)
[Link]-MCR, FOR-NEXT, P-SRET,
I-IRET can not use I, IRET, SRET,
FEND, END and other instructions.
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions ASC II code list

3 ASC II Character arrangement

<ASC II code list (Representation of 7-bit code and hexadecimal system)>

Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
system
0 DLE SP 0 @ P 、 p.
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a. q.
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b. r.
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c. s.
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d. t.
5 ENO NAK % 5 E U e. u.
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f. v.
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g. w.
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h. x.
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i. y.
A LF SUB * : J Z j. z.
B VT ESC + ; K [ k. {
C FF FS ， < L \ l.
D CR GS － = M ] m. }
E SO RS > N ^ n. ~
F SI US ／ ? O _ o. DEL

<Case of ASC II codes>

Decimal ASC II English ASC II English ASC II Code ASC II
system (Hexadecimal letter (Hexadecimal letter (Hexadecimal (Hexadecimal
number system system system system
number) number) number) number)
0 30 A 41 N 4E STX 02
1 31 B 42 O 4F ETX 03
2 32 C 43 P 50
3 33 D 44 Q 51
4 34 E 45 R 52
5 35 F 46 S 53
6 36 G 47 T 54
7 37 H 48 U 55
8 38 I 49 V 56
9 39 J 4A W 57
K 4B K 58
L 4C Y 59
M 4D Z 5A
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions List of error codes

4 List of error codes

M register D register Continue

No. Function No. Error code description to operate
8060 Expansion card 8060 Error code :200x: Expansion card not adapt to Y
error x: card install in fact
1:TP03-6AV
2:TP03-485RS
3:TP03-232RS
4:TP03-2AI
5:TP03-2TI
6:TP03-10P
6006：no communication card
8061 PC hardware 8061 Error code 0000: No error N
check 6101: RAM error
6102: ROM error
6103: Basic unit I/O bus error
6104: User program error
6105: watchdog time detecting over time
6106: RAM address error
8063 Communication 8063 6301：DTLK error Y
error 6302：RMIO error
8064 Parameter error 8064 Error code 0000: No error N
6401: program and parameter is not
corresponding
6402: register capacity set error
6409: other error
8065 Syntax error 8065 Error code 0000: no error N
6501: instruction address error
6504: pointer repeated
6505: device address is beyond range
6506: using undefined instruction
6507: Pointer error
6508: Interruption pointer error
6509: other
8066 Program error 8066 Error code 0000: no error N
6603: MPS continuously used for more
than 8 times
6604: MPS MRD MPP relation error
6605: STL continuously used for more
than 10 times
6606: no known label
6607: Main program has I and SRET
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions List of error codes

6609: CALL has more than 16 levels

nest.
6610: for next are not corresponding
6611: with JCS and without JCR
6612: with STL and without RET
6613: with MC and without MCR
6614: with SMCS and without SMCR
6615: with I and without IRET
6616: MC, MCR I, SRET between
6617:for,next has more than 16 levels
nest.
6618: no end
6621: other error
8067 Operation error 8067 Error code 6705: address error Y
6706: parameter error
6730: sampling time out of
range(Ts<0)
6732: PID input filter out of range
6733: PID proportional gain out of
range (Kp)
6734: PID integral time const out of
range.(TI)
6735: PID Derivative gain out of
range.(KD)
6736: PID Derivative time const out of
range
6740: PID sampling time ≤ scan
cycle
6742: Overflow of variational value
about measuring in PID
6743: Overflow of deviated value in
PID
6744: Overflow of integration
computation in PID
6745: Overflow of differential grain
leads to overflow of differential
value in PID
6746: Overflow of differential
computation values in PID
6747: Overflow of PID computation
results
6750: SV-PVnf<150,or system is
unstable
 7 Additional interpretation of basic functions List of error codes

6751: Large Overshoot of the Set Value

6752: Large fluctuations during
Autotuning Set Process
8069 I/O bus error 8069 6903: expansion I/O error Y
6904: expansion A/D error
6905:expansion A/D unit is power off